Technical Reference Options and Adapters Volume 1 Apr84

----
----
- ----
---
- - ---
- -- ---
.... __ .-
--_.-
Technical
Reference
Options and Adapters
Volumel
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
Revised Edition (April 1984)
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country where such
provisions are inconsistent with local law: International Business Machines Corporation
provides this manual "as is," without warranty of any kind, either expressed or implied,
including, but not limited to the particular purpose. IBM may make improvements and/or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this manual at any time.
This product could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes are
made periodically to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in new
editions of the publication.
It is possible that this material may contain reference to, or information about, IBM
products (machines or programs), programming, or services that are not announced in
your country. Such references or information must not be construed to mean that IBM
intends to announce such IBM products, programming, or services in your country.
Products are not stocked at the address below. Requests for copies of this product and for
technical information about the system should be made to your authorized IBM Personal
Computer dealer.
The following paragraph applies only to the United States and Puerto Rico: A Reader's
Comment Form is provided at the back of this publication. If the form has been removed,
address comments to: IBM Corp., Personal Computer, P.O. Box 1328-C, Boca Raton,
Florida 33432. IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it
believes appropriate without incurring any obligations whatever.
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1981, 1982, 1983, 1984
Federal Communications Commission
Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Warning: The equipment described herein has been certified
to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device,
pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of the FCC rules. Only
peripherals (computer input/output devices, terminals
printers, etc.) certified to comply with the Class B limits may
be attached to the computer. Operation with non-certified
peripherals is likely to result in interference to radio and TV
reception. If peripherals not offered by IBM are used with the
equipment, it is suggested to use shielded grounded cables
with in-line filters if necessary.
CAUTION
The product described herein is equipped with a grounded
plug for the user's safety. It is to be used in conjunction with
a properly grounded receptacle to avoid electrical shock.
iii
iv
Preface
The options and adapters manual is the second part of the
Technical Reference publication. It is designed to be used in
conjunction with any of the Technical Reference system unit
manuals.
The information in this publication is for reference, and is
intended for hardware and program designers, programmers,
engineers, and anyone else with a knowledge of electronics
and/ or programming who needs to understand the design and
operation of the options and adapters available for the IBM
Personal Computer family of products.
This manual is modular in format, with each module providing
information about a specific option or adapter available for the
IBM Personal Computer family of products. Modules having a
large amount of text contain individual indexes.
The modules are grouped by type of device. To find a specific
module:
1. Locate the full length hard tab with the type of device
(Displays, Printers, Storage Devices, etc.) printed on it that
describes the option or adapter you need information about.
2. Open the book to that section.
3. Leaf through that section to find the proper module.
The front matter of this manual also provides a "System to
Adapter Compatibility Chart," to identify the adapters supported
by each system, and an "Option to Adapter Compatibility
Chart," to identify the options supported by each adapter.
v
Notes:
vi
System to Adapter Compatibility Chart
The following chart identifies the adapters supported by each
system.
IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM
Personal Personal Portable Personal Expansion
Computer Computer Personal
XT Computer
64KB Memory Yes Yes Yes
Module Kit
64/256KB Yes Yes Yes
Memory
Expansion
Option
128KB No No No
Memory
Expansion
Option
256KB Yes Yes Yes
Memory
Expansion
Option
512KB No No No
Memory
Expansion
Option
Monochrome Yes Yes No
Display and
Printer
Adapter
Color / Graphics Yes Yes Yes
Monitor
Adapter
Printer Yes Yes Yes
Adapter
51/4 inch Yes Yes Yes
Diskette Drive
Adapter
Fixed Disk Yes Yes No
Drive Adapter
System to Adapter Compatibility Chart (Part 1 of 2)
August 24, 1984
Computer Unit
AT
No No
No No
Yes No
No No
Yes No
Yes No
Yes No
No Yes
No No
No Yes
vii
IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM
Personal Personal Portable Personal Expansion
Computer Computer Personal Computer Unit
XT Computer AT
Fixed Disk and No No No Yes No
Diskette
Adapter
Asynchronous Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Communications
Adapter
Serial/Parallel No No No Yes No
Adapter
Binary Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Synchronous
Communications
Adapter
Synchronous Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Data Link
Control
(SDLC)
Adapter
Cluster Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Adapter
Game Control Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Adapter
Prototype Card Yes Yes Yes No Yes
Prototype No No No Yes No
Adapter
Enhanced Yes Yes No Yes No
Graphics
Adapter
Professional No Yes No Yes Yes
Graphics
Controller
GPIB Adapter Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Data Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Acquisition
Adapter
PC Network Yes Yes Yes Yes No
System to Adapter Compatibility Chart (Part 2 of 2)
viii August 24, 1984
Option to Adapter Compatibility Chart
Because some adapters perform multiple functions, the following
chart identifies the options supported by each adapter.
>-
'"
'"
'"
a
>
> >-
a.
~ -
~
Ci
'"
'fJ
-",
a.
0
Cc
'"
'fJ
'"
'fJ
0",
>
~
'"
~
>
>-
0
'fJ
U
CL
~
Q)
>
Q)
~
'"
. ~ ."C
~
'fJ
.r:. Co
""
""
a.
. ~
'fJ a.
"'.-
~
'fJ
0
""
'fJ
.r:.
'"
cS
0
~
Q)
'fJ
0
'"
Q; a.
t5
Q)
>
.g:g
""
."
Q)
.?
~
0
'"
>-
c
c
a
~
'fJ
'" ""
."
E
'"
&
&
~
(,9
-
:u;
u

'" 0
:2
'fJ
""
'"
a.
c
50 0
'"
x
e
c ."
VJ a. 'fJ
u::
'fJ 'fJ
1)
~
:J
C
'"
0
Q)
'"
'"
0
.r:.
0
. ~ ."
'" ""
u iii
u ~
c
~
U
u
'"
0
CL
u
C 'fJ
< t : ~
-= :0 ."
Cl
0
.r:.
a.
.;::;
'"
'-.. .r:.
~
c a
a.
a ~
E
'fJ
'"
",a
E
:J
~
.S!' '" ~
E
>-
.r:.
'0
-'"
-
0
x
0
0
a 0 a u..
Ol
0
C
"'."
VJ
0 L!)
I u:: N ~ U
(,9
U U a:: ..J
--,
w D:
o<t:
51/4"
X X
Diskette Drive
Adapter
Fixed Disk
X
Drive Adapter
Fixed Disk and
X X X
Diskette Drive
Adapter
Color Graphics
X
X X
Monitor
Adapter
Monochrome
X X X
Display and
Printer
Adapter
Printer
X
X
Adapter
Asynch ronous
X
Communications
Adapter
Serial/Parallel
X X X
Adapter
Game Control
X
Adapter
Enhanced Graphics
X
Adapter
Professional
X
Graphics
Controller
Data Acquisition
X
and Control
Adapter
X - Adapter compatible with Option
Option to Adapter Compatability Chart
August 15, 1984
Copyright IBM Corporation 1984 ix
--- -
----
- - ---
- ---
- - ---
- -- ---
-----
--_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
mM Expansion Unit
6361468
ii
Contents
Description ................................... 1
Expansion Unit Cable ....................... 1
Expansion Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1
Power Supply ............................. 3
Extender Card ............................ 5
Receiver Card ............................. 7
Programming Considerations ..................... 9
Interface ..................................... 11
Specifications ................................. 13
Power Supply ............................. 14
Extender Card and Receiver Card ............. 15
Logic Diagrams ................................ 17
iii
iv
Description
The IBM Expansion Unit option enhances the system unit by
adding expansion slots in a separate unit. This option consists of
an extender card, expansion unit cable, and the expansion unit.
The expansion unit contains a power supply, an expansion board,
and a receiver card. This option utilizes one expansion slot in the
system unit to provide seven additional expansion slots in the
expansion unit.
Expansion Unit Cable
The expansion unit cable consists of a 56-wire, foil-shielded cable
terminated on each end with a 62-pin D-shell male connector.
Either end of the expansion unit cable can be plugged into the
extender card or the receiver card.
Expansion Board
The expansion board is a support board that carries the 1/0
channel signals from the option adapters and receiver card. These
signals, except 'osc,' are carried over the expansion unit cable.
Because 'osc' is not sent over the expansion cable, a
14.31818-MHz signal is generated on the expansion board. This
signal may not be in phase with the 'osc' signal in the system unit.
Decoupling capacitors provided on the expansion board aid in
noise filtering.
Expansion Unit 1
The following is a block diagram of the expansion board.
~
-
Expansion
r--
Channel
Slot 1 Slot
2
I--
Slot
3
Slot
-
4
Slot
5
I--
Slot
6
Slot I--
7
Power
Slot
Supply
8
Connector
Timing
"'---
Generator
(8284)
-
~
I.....-.
14.31818
I.....-.
MHz Crystal
----
-
Expansion Board Block Diagram
2 Expansion Unit
Power Supply
The expansion unit dc power supply is a 130-watt, 4 voltage-level
switching regulator. It is integrated into the expansion unit and
supplies power for the expansion unit and its options. The dc
output voltages for the power supply are listed in the following
table:
Voltage Current Regulation
(Vdc) (Amps) (Tolerance)
Nominal Minimum Maximum +% -%
+5.0 2.3 15.0 5 4
-5.0 0.0 0.3 10 8
+ 12.0 0.4 4.2 5 4
-12.0 0.0 0.25 10 9
Vdc Output
All power levels are regulated with overvoltage and overcurrent
protection. The input is fused and is either 120 Vac or 220/240
Vac. If dc overload or overvoltage conditions exist, the supply
automatically shuts down until the condition is corrected. The
supply is designed for continuous operation at 130 watts.
The power supply is located at the right rear of the expansion
unit. It provides two separate connections for power to the fixed
disk drives and supplies operating voltages to the expansion board
through two "keyed" connectors that plug into a 12-pin male
connector on the expansion board.
Vac Output
The receptacle at the rear of the power supply is a nonstandard
connector designed to be used only for the IBM Monochrome
Display. The power supply provides a filtered ac output that is
switched on and off with the main power switch. The maximum
current available at this output is 1 ampere for the 120-volt power
supply and 0.5 amperes for the 220/240-volt power supply.
Expansion Unit 3
Overvoitage and Overcurrent Protection
Voltage Nominal Vac Type Protection Rating Amps
110 Fuse 5
220 Fuse 3
Power On/Off Cycle: When the power supply is switched Off
for a minimum of 1.0 second, and then switched On, the 'power
good' signal is regenerated.
The 'power good' signal indicates that there is adequate power to
continue processing. If the power goes below the specified levels,
the 'power good' signal triggers a system shutdown.
This signal is the logical AND of the dc output-voltage 'sense'
signal and the ac input-voltage 'fail' signal. This signal is
TTL-compatible up-level for normal operation or down-level for
fault conditions. The ac 'fail' signal causes 'power good' to go to
a down-level when any output voltage falls below the regulation
limits.
The dc output-voltage 'sense' signal holds the 'power good' signal
at a down level (during power-on) until all output voltages have
reached their respective minimum sense levels. The 'power good'
signal has a turn-on delay of at least 100 ms but no greater than
500 ms.
The sense levels of the dc outputs are shown in the following
table.
Output Minimum Sense Voltage Nominal Maximum
(Vdc) (Vdc) (Vdc) (Vdc)
+5 +4.5 + 5.0 + 5.5
-5 -4.3 - 5.0 - 5.5
+12 + 10.8 + 12.0 + 13.2
-12 -10.2 -12.0 -13.2
4 Expansion Unit
Extender Card
The extender card is a four-plane card. It re-drives the I/O
channel to provide sufficient power to avoid capacitive effects of
the cable. The extender card presents only one load per line of
the I/O channel.
The extender card has a wait-state generator that inserts a wait
state on memory-read and memory-write operations (except
refreshing) for all memory contained in the expansion unit. The
address range for wait-state generation is controlled by switch
settings on the extender card.
The dual-in-line package (DIP) switch on the extender card
should be set to indicate the maximum contiguous read/write
memory in the system unit. The extender card switch settings are
described under "Switch Settings" in the Guide to Operations
manual. Switch positions 1 through 4 correspond to address bits
hex A19 to hex A16.
The DIP-switch settings determine which address segments have a
wait state inserted during memory-read and memory-write
operations. Wait states are required for any memory, including
ROM on option adapters, in the expansion unit. Wait states are
not inserted in the highest segment, hex addresses FOOOO to
FFFFF (segment F).
Expansion Unit 5
The following is a block diagram of the extender card.
-
r-
Control Bus
Control
Bus
Buffer
1/0 CH RDY
-
---------
MEMW,MEMR,DACKO
Wait-State M_AOL. 1/0 Address _

AO-A19
Address
'//.Z'///.'////. 'J'.
en Buffer
N
B
"
III
0
E
.,
c:
.'!l
c:
en
0
>
U
VI
'<

c:
a::
..
N
Data Latch Z Z
'"
;zz2 and Disable
Circuits 1
EXT DISABLE
DO-D7
Data
'/.'//.
Buffer
J'
-
L Bus Direction
-
DIR ENABLE
and Enable I-
Control
"--
-
Extender Card Block Diagram
6 Expansion Unit
Receiver Card
The receiver card is a four-plane card that fits in expansion slot 8
of the expansion unit. It re-drives the I/O channel to provide
sufficient power for additional options and to avoid capacitive
effects. Directional control logic is contained on the receiver card
to resolve contention and direct data flow on the I/O channel.
Steering signals are transmitted back through the expansion unit
cable for use on the extender card.
The following is a block diagram of the receiver card.
-
r---
Control Bus
Control
Bus ~
Z
Buffer
-----r
~
Bus Direction
and Enable
-
Control
'-
L
0;
DO-D7
c:
0
Data
c:
'"
t) Bus
..c:
'"
Buffer
U
c:
~
c:
c:
0
0
'iii
U c:
c:
V.
'"
Co
il:
~
x
N
Data Latch
fZ
w
CD
l\.
Circuit
V.
y
v:
..
~
-"
~ I/O Address iZ?Z
v: Decode
V.
~ Control Signal
V
Z
AO-A19
Address
.....,...,..,..
Z '//-
Buffer
-
---
Receiver Card Block Diagram
Expansion Unit 7
8 Expansion Unit
Programming Considerations
Several registers associated with the Expansion Unit option are
programmable and readable for diagnostic test purposes. The
following figures indicate the locations and functions of the
registers on the extender card and receiver card.
location Function
Memory FXXXX(*) Write to memory to latch address bits
Port 210 Write to latch expansion bus data (EDO - ED7)
Port 210 Read to verify expansion bus data (EDO - ED7)
Port 211 Read high-order address bits (AB - A 15)
Port211 Write to clear wait test latch
Port 212 Read low-order address bits (AO - A 7)
Port 213 Write 00 to disable expansion unit
Port 213 Write 01 to enable expansion unit
Port 213 Read status of expansion unit
DO = enable/disable
D 1 = wait-state request flag
D2-D3 = not used
D4-D7 = switch position
1 = Off
O=On
(*) Example: Write to memory location F123:4 = 00
Read Port 211 = 1 2
Read Port 212 = 34
(All values in hexadecimal)
Extender Card Registers
Expansion Unit 9
Location Function
Memory FXXXX(*) Write to memory to latch address bits
Port 214 Write to latch data bus bits (DO - D7)
Port 214 Read data bus bits (DO - D7)
Port 215 Read high-order address bits (AB - A 15)
Port 216 Read low-order address bits (AO - A 7)
(*) Example: Write to memory location F123:4 = 00
Read Port 215 = 12
Read Port 216 = 34
(All values in hexadecimal)
Receiver Card Registers
The expansion unit is automatically enabled upon power-up.
Both the extender card and receiver card will be written to, if the
expansion unit is not disabled when writing to FXXXX.
However, the system unit and the expansion unit are read back
separately.
10 Expansion Unit
Interface
All signals found on the system unit's I/O channel will be
provided to expansion slots in the expansion unit, with the
exception of the 'osc' signal and the system unit's power supply
voltages.
A 'ready' line on the expansion channel makes it possible to
operate with slow I/O or memory devices. If the channel's I/O
'ch rdy' line is not activated by an addressed device, all
microprocessor-generated memory cycles take five
microprocessor clock cycles per byte for memory in the expansion
unit.
The following table contains a list of all the signals that are
re-driven by the extender and receiver cards, and their associated
time delays. The delay times include the delay due to signal
propagation in the expansion unit cable. Assume a nominal cable
delay of 3 ns. As such, device access will be less than 260 ns.
Nominal Maximum
Delay Delay
Signal (ns) (ns) Direction (*)
AO -A19 27 39 Out
AEN 27 39 Out
OACKO-OACK3 27 39 Out
MEMR 27 39 Out
MEMW 51 75 Out
lOR 51 75 Out
lOW 27 39 Out
ALE 27 39 Out
ClK 27 39 Out
TIC 27 39 Out
RESET 27 39 Out
IRQ2-IRQ7 36
(* *)
In
ORQ1-0RQ3 36
(* *)
In
IIOCH ROY 36 51 In
1/0 CH CK 36 51 In
DO - 07 (Read) 84 133 In
DO - 07 (Write) 19 27 Out
(*) With resepct to the system unit.
(* *) Asynchronous nature of interrupts and other requests are more dependent on
microprocessor recognition than electrical signal propagation through
expansion logic.
Expansion Unit 11
12 Expansion Unit
Specifications
Size
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Power Cable
Length
Size
Signal Cable
Length
Size
Physical Specifications
Voltage (Vac)
142 mm (5.5 in.)
500 mm (19.6 in.)
410 mm (16.1 in.)
14.9 kg (33 Ib)
1.83 m (6 ft)
18AWG
1 m (3.28 ft)
22AWG
Frequency
(Hz)
Current (Amps)
Nominal Minimum Maximum :t 3 Hz Maximum
110 90
220/240 180
Input Requirements
Environment
Air Temperature
System On
System Off
Humidity
System On
System Off
Heat Output
137
259
Additional Specifications
60 3 at 90 Vac
50 1 .6 at 180 Vac
15.6 to 32.2C (60 to 90 F)
10 to 43C (50 to 110F)
8 to 80%
20 to 80%
717 BTU/hr
Expansion Unit 13
"3
:IE
CD
..
(J)
C
"CI
"CI
<"
I
:s
Q.
o
o
:s
:s
CD
S
..
en
Fixed Disk Drive
Power Connector __
Expansion
Board
Power CatI ..... n
Power On/Off Expansion Unit
Power Connector
IBM Monochrome Display
Power Connector
;l
CD

'0
Pin 4, + 5 Vdc
0

t P;. 3, G" .. j
CD
8i:::: Pin 2, Ground
'"I
7JJ.
CIl
ol-Pin 1, + 12 Vdc
c::
= '0
"=
Pin 4, +5 Vdc
'0
"=
-<
3, G, ... j
'0

....
or-Pin 2, Ground
::s
Pin 1, + 12 Vdc
n
0
Pin 6, +5 Vdc
::s
-
....
5, + 5 Vdc
CICI
c::
4, + 5 Vdc
'"I
II)
.....
3, - 5 Vdc
....
0
2, Ground
::s
CIl
1, Ground
II)
::s
Pin 6, Ground
Q..
-
5, Ground
0
n
4, -12Vdc
II)
.....
....
3, +12Vdc
0
2, Key
::s
CIl
1, Pwr Good
-
0
-
0"

Extender Card and Receiver Card
The extender card and receiver card rear-panel connectors are the
same. Pin and signal assignments for the extender and receiver
cards are shown below.
21 \@ @ ] ~ 1
42 @ @ 22
62 @ @ 43
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 +E IRQ6 22 +E D5 43 +E IRQ7
2 +E DRQ2 23 + E DRQ1 44 +E D6
3 +EDIR 24 +E DRQ3 45 +E I/O CH RDY
4 + E ENABLE 25 RESERVED 46 +E IRQ3
5 +ECLK 26 +EALE 47 +ED7
6 -E MEM IN EXP 27 +ET/C 48 + E D1
7 +E A17 28 +E RESET 49 -E I/O CH CK
8 +EA16 29 +EAEN 50 + E IRQ2
9 +EA5 30 +EA19 51 +EDO
10 -E DACKO 31 + EA14 52 +E D2
11 +EA15 32 +EA12 53 +ED4
12 + E A11 33 +E A18 54 + E IRQ5
13 +E A10 34 -E MEMR 55 +E IRQ4
14 +EA9 35 -EMEMW 56 +E D3
15 +EA1 36 +EAO 57 GND
16 +EA3 37 -E DACK3 58 GND
17 -E DACK1 38 +EA6 59 GND
18 +EA4 39 -EIOR 60 GND
19 -E DACK2 40 +EA8 61 GND
20 -EIOW 41 +EA2 62 GND
21 +EA13 42 +EA7
E= Extended
Connector Specifications
Expansion Unit 15
16 Expansion Unit
f.

e
2 .
....
...
......:J
0
I
,
3
,
5
6 A
A
A
A
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI
AE
7
8
g
0
I
,
3
,
5
6
7
8
g
N
0
I
,
3
,
5
6
7
R
R
iO
...illY
MMlI
MTMW
I
,
[JACKO
[JACK
[JACK
DACK 3
CL
71
AL
RESE
K
C
E
7
A31
A
"g
A28
A
"6
"5
A"
A22
'"
"
AI
AI
AI
AI
AI5
AI'
Al3
AI,
All
AD
AD
AD7
AD
AD5
AD,
AD3
A02
81'
81
I
811
81
81
82
I
"
B2
I-
I-
f-
f-
f-
f-
1/0
SLOT
JI
J'
J3
J'
J5
J6
J7
JB
830

RIlY 1
1 R012
f/C
15 ASYNG
Q
GNIl

'2
.5V
He 11 RESET

Ul
IBnA
825
82,
823
B22
821
818
B06
816
ADI
AlO
B08
B09
807
WH C2.:1
C3 :1
".1

C4
831 10pF
10p FT .047 T
10pF +r
B05

1)

lO"ft
B lOuT- 047 1:7 +
I
Expansion Board (Sheet 1 of 1)
mJ OSC
17
" 5100
X2
16
8284
lO"ft C8
CI

1
14.31818
.HZ

' 3
4
0
ri
0
o 1 P2 0 f--
I
L- 0 r------

6
0
e-
047 o e-

I RO'
IA03
IRQ4
IRQ5
IRQ6
IR07
ORQl
on02
DRQ3
I/OCHCK
IDCHRDV
RESERVED
POWER GOOD
N.C
+12VOC
12VDC
GNO
GNO
5VDC
}+5VDC

QC
tr:I
-=

=
=

5!.
....
tsaT3)

8244 12
_ AYI4
ISNT3)
ISKT3)
(SliT 31
[SliT 31
[SliT 31
ISIIT31
JSIIT3]
"

"
..
"

3
====l

f
--
ISB13)
ISIIT3)
[SH3t
ISMT31
(SHY 31
[SHYal
(BH3t
[SHT31
..
AS
A"
AI,
'"
'" Al'
...
'.

[S1IT3l Iimiii
(SHT31 TIC
ISHT3I ALE
l!llll'" ..!II
ISIIT21 MEMJIiIEXP
T
ISIIT2.3l F!!

(SMT2J IIDMDIIII
18H121 HID'
,

& ..
1 U18
Ill-

16 lY2 5
B !YO
14A U5 2VD ,O
L
2G 2'1
.....u1C 1

110 LS32
I
1 UI6 11
:1

10
LS20
r-----R!!----.., .., .sv Il
Ir
V
(SNU] 01
($N13) 02
(3813) DO!
::
[SNT3J 115
ISNT3I 011
ISHT3I 07

[8IIT2)nATA.BUSENAOlE

ll'
,
,
,
. C2 r
I t Rl
4.7KORPAC I I 4.7Krl
.IP
LiS' 1413 12 11
i'l::r
n
,m
'00
'" '"
, ..
'"
'D<
rur
ED, ED,
ED.
."
ED' '00
,'OIR
'"
ru
r
'-

EAIl----"TI 12
EA1?------f4 15
U10 19

:' "'" I"
EllS
,AI,
"'
'"
17
..
1116 3 q fL'i3B
4 r-i A 15
5U16 6 IrS! YO

IU2
B

,
.,
,
,
,
,
,

"
A3

EDI -E
[02 -E
..
AI
00
D1
E03 -E
"
"
..
18HT3j
18H13)
ISH13)
[8HT31
[8HT3)
[8HT31
(8813)
[S8131
(SHT3)
ISHT2.31
[8HT3)
[8HT31
18HT2.3[
'"
'" '116
'"

'"
, ..
,0<
'"
, ..
E07J
ttZ??;Z???
.,
.,
"
00
.,
IL:'
D1
In ,
..
..
A"
All
AlP
,
!
,
,
ILl
'"
'" ...
'"

(8HT2.3)

I
SRT3 8HT3
8HT3
[8HT3
1
8813
S"T3
>-- EJmiOI ['SHT3)
>--, TIC [SHT31

>--

mwi [SHT31
>-l

J LS74
,
'13

>--
IlCALDlA [SHlll
MEMJN.XP.[SHT31
m;nm'(If [SNT 21
.:16 >--

>--p
:0 g2
,m
'"
'" ...
,0<
I
'D5
,
"
ED.
."
Extender Card (Sheet 1 of 3)
[SHT1) PORTZII

[SIIT3.ljOACKO 10 LS74
16
'01
[SHT3)
(SliT 3)
[SliT 3)
[SliT 3)
.-----#ZA
+ + It==:06(SHT 131
SWI : Ii Y:: 2 U6 r -----;r U14 'b.L-. I 24 LSOO II
Il I UI5 5 UI4 6 4
S74

il LS04 12 PR 0
9
2 PR 0 NC
rJ.!.-mr---'\ 1115 -8 -6
l Ii: I +5'1 I 83 5 CUi 0 CUi 0
1 I, 82 OUT 12 LSOO r-;=lSOB 13 I
L I III '; "0
1
U21 13 U14 11 2 U2 3 , __ ._5V_j---:=-j':r,;SO:-' )L-----,
(SliT 3.11
(SH13)
(SHT31
(SIITl(
!SIIT31
(SHTI)
(SHT31
[SIH3.1I
(SIIT3(
[SHTJI
(SliT 3)
[SHT31
[SHT31
(SliT 31
[SHT31
(SliT 31
RNl RN38.2KO :3 A2 fJ 3411CLKIl3 3CLKU3 L-- ROMADOR
29-21 'i'"
P
2AB
-= I
[SliT I)
i.ti15LS04 r A,.blli- RESET (SliT II
L...JA y 14 fRESH [SliT 31
'lOW IS"'.I'
:,,1 U7 :,:,,',
DACK3 LS04 EOACK3 [SHT31
EOIH DATA BUS UABLE(SHTI)
EENABLE 'p I UIS r- __ --, +5'1 OIRTDCPU (SIITll
1 A4 1+5'1 19 10 a I 1
(SliT 1) LOCAL DIA + 22(10 UI5 LSiiO L 11 7- 5 3 7417 L 10 ts- 11 6 --
(SliT 3) EI/OCJlRDY I 2
I :
(SliT 31 EI/OCRCK 13
A

(SHT31 ERESERVE II t 10 !/OCIICK (811T31
:,1, 9 un
o ru
(8HT3)
(SliT 31 1iili- 2A 2Y PME.M , W
IA 9: - - I Jfil!fI
U8 +rra-:g '- ____ J +5'1

(SHTII EXTDlSABLE-----...... -+I-+,-.r.-ticll\L
r
r -'" -.,'5V r--- _'" " .5O L
It-t 13 ,,-, '1K ll- 10- ,,-1r, ;
(SliT 31 A
{SliT 31 EIII03 51 t
6
IR02
ISIIT3) EIAQ4 3 4 IR03
I,: Ul3 2,
.7 -
IR07
(SliT I)
(SliT 1)
[SliT 31
[SliT 3)
(SliT 3)
{SHT3)
ISIIT31
1811T3)
(SH131
(SliT 31
[SliT
(SliT
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
[SliT
[SliT
(SliT
(SliT
[SliT
[SliT
iSHT1)
[SliT
[SliT
[SliT
1)
1)
1)
.5V
GND
110 Gil GK
liD CII ROY
RESERVED
IRQZ
IRQ3
IRQ4
IRQS
IRQ6
IRQ?
DRQI
ORQ2
ORQ3
r-
110104710471.0471.04104710471047110"
T" T" }7 }6 Tes T C4 T" T" T C1
t=
AU1 AU9
AlO A08
AU7
808 A06
80' AOS
815 A04
81'
AU3
813 A01
811
811 A3)
A30
818 A19
806 418
816 417
416
415
A14
413
411
Al1
803 410
819 A19
A18
A17
A16
A15
A14
801 Al3
810 AI1
831 All
81'
813
811
811
810
817
B01
819
817
816
B15
818
CARD EDGE TABS
00 [SliT I)
01
[SliT 11
01 [SliT 11
03 [SliT 1)
04 [SliT 11
05
[SliT lJ
06
(SliT II
07 (SliT 1)
AU ISIIT I)
AI [SliT 1!
A1 (SliT I] (SliT 1) EAEN
A3 (SliT 1] (SliT II EAI9
A< [SliT 1) (SIITIJ EA1B
AS [SliT 11 (SliT II EAll
A6 [SliT lJ [SliT lJ EA16
A7 [SliT lJ (SliT IJ EAI5
AS (SHT 11 (SliT lJ EA14
A9 [SliT 1) (SliT lJ EAI3
AlO [SliT lJ (SliT 11 EAl2
All (SliT lJ (SliT 11 EAll
AI1 [SliT 1)
[SliT lJ EAlO
Al3 (SliT 1) (SliT I) EA9
A14 (SliT 1) [SliT I) EAS
A15 [SliT 1) (SliT 1) EA7
A16 (SliT 2] (SliT 1) EA6
A17 [SliT 21 [SliT I) EA5
AlB [SliT 2/ [SliT lJ EA<
Al9 (SliT 2) (SliT 1) EA3
"N
[SliT lJ (SliT I) EA1
[SliT 1) EAI
iOif ISHT I[ [SliT I) EAO
lOW [SHT 21
MEMR (SliT 1.21 [SliT 1) EDACKO
MEMW (SIIT2J (SliT 2) E[JACK!
(SliT 2) mm
eLK [SliT 2) (SliT 2) EOACK3
7/e (SliT lJ [SliT 21 EMEMW
RESET (SliT 2) [SliT 2.1) EMEMR
[SliT 2.11 EIOW
OACKO [SliT 2.IJ (SliT 2) ElOR
OACKI (SliT 2) (SliT 1) EALE
DACK2 (SliT 2) [SliT 2) EeLK
[JACK3 [SliT 2) (SliT lJ ETIC
ALE (SliT 1) [SHT 21 fiiESff
19
30
33
7
8
11
31
11
31
11
13
14
40
41
38
9
18
16
41
15
36
10
17
19
37
35
34
10
39
16
5
17
18
[J-SIiEll TYPE
CONNECTOR
J1 47
44
11
53
56
51
48
51
50
46
55
54
1
43
45
49
15
13
1
14
3
,
6
571-------
58r-------
591-------
601-------
6) I-------
61r-------
-
E07
E06
E05
E04
E03
E01
EOI
EOO
(SliT 2.1)
(SliT 2.1)
(SliT 2.1)
[SliT 2.11
[SliT I)
(SliT I)
(SliT 2.1)
(SliT I)
EIRQ2 [SliT 2)
EIRQ3 ISHT Z/
EIRQ4 [SliT 2/
EIRQS (SliT 2)
EIRQ6 (SliT 2)
EIRQ? (SliT 2)
EIIO CII ROY (SliT 2)
EIIO CII CK (SliT Z)
E RESERVED (SliT 2)
E ORQI [SliT 2)
E ORQZ (SliT 2)
E ORQ3 (SliT 2)
fiiiii (SliT 2)
E ENABLE (SliT 2)
E.MEM.IN EXP.(SIITI)
trl
~
!
s
=
~
5! .
....
~
...
'31
"'
'31
'31
,31
"' '31
'31
'31
'31
13'
'31
~ I
'31 ,.
,.
13'
'31 ,.
'31
"'
'31
,.
'31
'31
'31
'31
'31
'31
,.
,.
'31
13'
,31
,31
'31
'31
13'
Receiver Card (Sheet 1 of 3)
.EM
13'
'"
'31
'" 1m .u
'"
.,
'"
.,
."
'31
'"
'"
D1 (2.31
DO lUI
05 [l.31
.. lUI
D3 12,3[
"
12.31
DI lUI
DO (2.31
: : ~
.,
".
~ I
..
'31
:l
'31
'31
..
'31
A5
"'
..
'31
"
13' .,
13'
"
'31
m
[2.3)
".
'"
'" ,
2.31
....
"'
[2031
row
13'
""
[2.31
'"
13'
USUDRV
"'
PAEN
''I
EIR02
'31
EIRQ3
13'
~ I R 0 4
'31
E1805
13'
EIRQS
'31
flRQ7
13'
WO&NRDY
'31
"""""
'31
[3[
[3[
[3[
[3[
[3[
[3[
[3[
[3[
/3.1)
[3[
[3[
13.1)
[J.l)
[3[
(3.1)
[3[
13.1)
[3/
[iI
[iI
RNI AN.
."
11111
."
8.ZKO DIP RPAG Z K (1 DIP II-PAG
-J
6' 1

8 7 1 :1' 3 6 5
ED7
Tr
'"
13 7
ED. 14 6
ED3 15 5
'01
16
EDI 17 3
EDO 18 1

L--
I
1
11 LSJO lS04
2 LSOO lS04

I
1 U2 3 5 Ul 6 8 LS04 5
UII II
,
6
3
I
1
L1
I
MEMR
:1' lS32
E. MEM.IN EXP. J U15 3
I
TOI
PAEN
,lS32 II
lSlO TIME DELAY
I
2 U19
3 10
UI
,
I" OUT B
9 LS32
I

lOR
l lS31
I
,
150 NS
I

LSD4
OACKI
I
3

LSOO
6
+SV 12 0 PR 0 9
5 U1

ORO I

10 U15 B
l804 I l

1

lSOO
OR01 I

10 ,

+5V 12 0 PI! Q 9
, U1
lS04
."874 1
OACK3 3 U1

pE>l
'5V 13ClR
DRQ3
3 eLK ij 6N.C.
4 LSDO
6
4 lS32
5 UIB 5 UI5 6
I ell!
DATA lATCH WRITE
DATA LATCH READ
.J&lli-

L--.,.lo
QHt----

i"KOI
LJ!L
I
lS04
, I
,

+5V 2 0 PA Q 6
3 ClK
U9
Q 5 H.C
1 Ci"il
" D6
OS
D4
01
00
EHABLE
0111 Til CPU
[3.1[
(3.11
(3.11
[3.1[
13.1)
(3.1]
13.11
fJ,I)
[3[
[3}
[211fi1i1'ii""lPij
121 BLE

JI I
2
3

,
7
,
,
10
II
12
i3
"
"
"
17
IB
i9
2D
21
22
23
" 25
26
27
" 29
30
31
32
"
"
"
"
"
"
"
..
41
"
"
" ..
..
" ..
..
50
"
52
"
..
55
50
"
"
59
..
"
"
-
I EIR 111
EDR2
I
EEN E
eLK
E.I E 12]
EA17II}
III
III
III
EA1511}
1111
I III
ill
EAIIII
III
III
E III
III
III
III

III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
III
Iii
III
III
III
III
III
EA7111
1M
EUoeN RDY II)
3111

EDII2I
Iii
Iii

,

IRUfiflJ
III

I Y AB
14 y A
7 y A I3
3 v A 17
l: :::
y I
c-:Jtg

111i7D"'eiiCi
12.1)0
[2.I)Dfi
12..11
[2.1)
12..11
12.11
[2.1) I
12..1)
111 v
IIIAEIII
(119
(I) AI
III
(II AI
11]15
11114
[1) 1
(II AI!
III
[l}AIO
Iii
III
III
111 Ii
[llA5
111 4
III
III
IIIAI
Iii
Cp.!!illU!BS
ADI 801
A02 802
." 803
......
ADS 805
.. , ...
AD7 807
AOB B08
'" BOO
A12 812
AI3 813
AI4 814
AI5 815
Alii BI6
A17 817
AlB BIB
All BI9
A20 820
A21 821
An 822
.23 823
A24 124
A25 B25
A26 I2Ii
A27 127
A28 B28
A29 829
Aao 130
A31 831
L--
..
g
3-.
"';' i

'" R DR' III
'"
Iii
'.e
R 121
R
131
12.1)
Iii
12.11
12.11

[2.1)
121
III
IR Iii
I 'I
III
Iii
I II
I 2.1)
/ III
AlE
N.C.
,
Notes:
24 Expansion Unit
Notes
x
August 15, 1984
Copyright IBM Corporation 1984
----
----
- - ---
---
- - ---
- -- ---
-----
--_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
mM Monochrome
Display
6361474
ii
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Specifications .................................. 3
Logic Diagrams ................................. 5
iii
iv
Description
The high resolution IBM Monochrome Display connects to the
system unit through two cables. One cable is a signal cable from
the display adapter to the display, and the other provides power to
the display from the system unit. This arrangement eliminates the
need for a wall outlet and allows the system-unit Power switch to
control power to the display. The display unit has a 28.3 cm
(11.5 in.) diagonal, 90 deflection cathode ray tube (CRT). The
display may be placed on the system unit or on a nearby table or
desk. Brightness and contrast controls are on the front surface
and are easily accessible to the operator.
The characteristics of the display are as follows:
Screen
High-persistence, green phosphor (P39).
Etched surface to reduce glare.
- Presentation of 80 characters wide by 25 rows deep.
- Characters are defined in a 14 PEL-high by 9 PEL-wide
matrix.
Video Signal
- Maximum bandwidth of 16.257 MHz at -3dB
Vertical Drive
- Screen refreshed at 50 Hz with 350 lines of vertical
resolution and 720 lines of horizontal resolution
Horizontal Drive
- Positive level, TTL-compatibility, at a frequency of 18.432
kHz
Monochrome Display 1
2 Monochrome Display
Specifications
Size
Height
Length
Depth
Weight
Heat Output
Power Cable
Length
Size
Signal Cable
Length
Size
280 mm (11 in.)
380 mm (14.9 in.)
350 mm (13.7 in.)
7.9 kg (17.3Ib)
325 BTU/hr
0.914 m (3 tt)
18AWG
1.22 m (4 tt)
22AWG
Logic Diagrams
The IBM Monochrome Display has two models: a 110-Vac
model and a 220/240-Vac model. A logic diagram for each
follows.
VIDEO 1
'51'
380
'12W
H51D

"

<l>
"" '00' 112_
.0111' IOOK1/tW VR5l)I
82110
l1l5116
-
'1100
lIZ.
r-i
,
,
,
,
,
,
"" ' ,
.1122 r I
I30V 05IM I I
llIJI ....... i,
... @, .,
121 C5081 I
I/Z. nil I I
- 11IOVIa I
11507 I I
i: :
@', :
(!) Wi! .. >ti
""
, ..
'12W
:: __ --'
.: 0401 11402
VUTr.i\-+-.:jf:.-_1S .. 118 Tm
,."
.... ,
<D rpm It 11504 C5ID
IIID. 1C401 TDAII10 11 :: + r -;;- -----1
I I IIOISE83 I
:' bj' 'IDIJ" DiP IUZJ "Im)::.\, -I , -- -- I:, '1,1
::'K ..,[i1!J,= - I

C504 1
l IV... ,,,. , , "ot (il, .11311
VI.q! 5111( l1li( I R502 r I I 400V I
C4II2::to 11K L.. ______ ...J I
.15 - b_h- I50K l41li C4II5 I J I u
rij...--t_ ...... .. ... -.,:lg;::.,..o.:.I"'_'_,,,,..,,.J,! .: un :: ! :;:!
470, <{I 'C:!l.1I4OE& 1/2W I LN-WIUTIII
MOil I " ',.. '" .1, .. ",,', = I ,: : T. L __ II ___ J
110Vac Monochrome Display (Sheet 1 of 1)
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES
UP TO 450 VOLTS EXIST
ON THE PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS
/tOTES:
I. IIESIITOII VAlUES ARE 'NiOHI] 11Il001= 1.000.0000
2. All RESISTOII AilE 1/4W EXCEPT WHERE OTHERWISE INOICATED.
3. ALL CAPACITORS ARE 50V EXCEPT WHEM OTHERWIIE INOICUED.
4. CAPACITORI VALUES ARE J'f UNLESS OTHERWISE INOICUEO/, = pf= Iil".
5. ACWlRINSINRIRMUION
PIIASE= aLACK/BROnWIRE
NEUTRAL = WllITE/BLUE.IRE
OROllNO= SIIfEIIANOI'ELLOWWlR(
TilE PIIASE WIRE MUIT ao TO THE FUSEO SIDE OF TRAIISFOIIMfR.

=
=
=

=
9

0
.-.

-
sg
'<
-....I
A514
",
r----------------------------------i
I 0601 11601 r:::::=:::=l I 0507 t
PHASE I PI r-- 51 G2D 1O.5W [j]]] 1
: II!: &601 I . ,.J
: 15"' 01 T: Mm" i 01
: P2 82 i I
I
I '---r!= 0604 0605 1 l7815CV 2 I VR5G38
I t60l G2B G18 C6M J 1I1OOK lanK
01 3SV 41JJ llZW

",' 5" I
L __________________________________ J - L20l
!JfJ
H
112W 820011212
"'03
[A]J cr==lJ r &
1 2 3 4 5 6 14 l:=: @
11202 [ [ R205.0201CONTIIAST+ .............
DUAL 6 f-rt-_ ..
R513
390
1/2W
A215 270 150 1S2473 C514 - A21J8
ISDn L-- 47/1 470 TR19
11201 [8 7 jr-"""i' '1V1th>--+_-H'<o..;ft 2N39(14
TA18 0204
VIDEO 7 14!Jt&l01 2SCl1)26 11213 R20fi
Z-ZK -SOY 100
.
f
VEAT 9

HOR 8
I
&401
0011
L:. ________ -.J
SGl

R511
100'
1/2W
.DllKV IOOKII2W VR501

lll505 !!!f!!!
'509
10MO
I/zW
r-------,
1 r- I
I
I
1
I
I
I
C509 : :
D5D4 I ri'
\IrnAGP5040ls
0508 @>,
12K C50B I
112W+ 2211 I
- 160V 13
8501 I :
'" &507 I I
112W 022 I :
630' I
7 .'
lIm
0506
100'
111W
II ___ ---'
220/240Vac Monochrome Display (Sheet 1 of 1)
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES
ON THE PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS
NOTES
I. RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN IOMMI 0 K: 10000 M = 1.000.0000
2. All RESISTOR ARE 1/4W EXCEPT WIIERE OTHERWISE INOIC"'TEO
3 .... ll CAP...CITORS ARE 50V HCEPT WHERE OTHEAWISE INDICATED.
4.CAP"'CITORSVAlUES ...AE!iFUNLESSOTIIEAWISEIIIDlCATEDI1=!iF: 10".
5.ACW1RINSIHFORMATlDN
PHASE = BLACK/BROWNWIRE
NEUTRAL = WHlTE/BLUEWIRE
GROUND = SREEN AND YEUOW WIRE
IMPORTANT: THE PHASE WIRE MUST GO TO THE fUSED SIDE OF TRANSFORMER
Notes:
--- -
----
- ----
- ---
- - ---
- - - ---
-----
-----
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
mM Portable Personal
Computer Display
6361472
ii
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Logic Diagram ................................. 3
iii
iv
Description
The IBM Portable Personal Computer Display attaches internally
to the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter in the system unit and to
the power supply. A cable provides the composite drive signals
from the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter to the display.
Another cable provides dc power to the display from the power
supply.
The IBM Portable Personal Computer Display is designed to
blank out the color-burst signal generated by the Color/Graphics
Monitor Adapter. Blanking keeps the color-burst signal from
appearing on the composite video screen.
The display is a 228.6 mm (9 in.), amber cathode ray tube
(CRT). Brightness and Contrast controls on the front panel are
easily accessible.
The characteristics of the display are as follows:
Screen
Medium-persistence, amber phosphor (LA)
Etched surface to reduce glare
80-character by 25-line image
Characters are defined in a 8 PEL-high by 8 PEL-wide
matrix
Composite Video Signal
1.5 Vdc (peak to peak)
60 Hz refresh rate
15.75 kHz horizontal scan rate
IBM Portable Personal Computer Display 1
2 IBM Portable Personal Computer Display
Logic Diagrams
The following pages contain the logic diagrams for the IDM
Portable Personal Computer Display.
C301
1,022
: R301
R128
oaK
1/4W
10"10
CIl6
.001
10%
1KV
.,43
1.811.
'W
5% CHT
.001
CRill 10%
'"
....
R317
2.211.
+ C317
r
2201
2.'
C313 I W28
10/ I
+ 25V l
W29
C3lB
470/16V
R331
2,111.
WID._--------------------------
Q.';)
T
: W3
W33
~ ~ ... ~ ~ .. ~ ! 2 .. ~ ~ 7 ~ 2
voe
7
Portable Personal Computer Display (Sheet 1 of 2)
,....---,
1
0
, I
I'OK I
____ ____ ____ __ __ ______ ________ ,
L __ .J
&407 +
7125V
l 20%
COMPOSITE
INPUT
.. 07
20K
R427
1.8.
C416
1220Pf
CR405
COO.
220Pf
+ C401
R429
2701(
C008
.0047
.'2'
UK
CR404
0408
VIDEO
DRIVE 1
R422
'5K
I 22/1 OOV r----------------------
l40i ! VX201
I
R402
820K
2W
R415
'5K
R412 &403
47. 220Pf
1/4W
I 0%
22K

T
W221
RI32
82K
1/4W
10%
CI23
1
00,
IKV
-=- 10%
Portable Personal Computer Display (Sheet 2 of 2)
Notes:
--- -
----
- - ---
- ---
- ----
- -- ---
-----
-----
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
mM Color Display
6361470
ii
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Specifications .................................. 3
Logic Diagram ................................. 5
iii
iv
Description
The IBM Color Display connects to the system unit with a signal
cable of approximately 1.5 meters (5 feet) in length. This signal
cable is a direct-drive interface from the Color/Graphics Monitor
Adapter.
A second cable provides power to the display from an electrical
outlet. The display unit has its own power control and indicator
and will accept either l20-volt 60-Hz or 220-volt 50-Hz power.
The power supply in the display automatically switches to match
the applied power.
The display has a 340-millimeter (13-inch) CRT. The display
may be placed on the system unit or on a nearby table or desk.
The front panel of the display has a Power-On control, Power-On
indicator, Brightness control, and Contrast control. The rear
panel has the Vertical Hold and Vertical Size controls.
The characteristics of the IBM Color Display are as follows:
Screen
High contrast (black).
Displays up to 16 colors when used with the IBM
Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter.
Presentation of 80 characters wide by 25 rows deep.
Characters are defined in an 8 PEL-high by 8 PEL-wide
matrix.
Video Signal
- Red, green, and blue signals, and intensity are
independent.
Color Display 1
Vertical Drive
Positive synchronous, TTL-compatible
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Non-interlaced operation
Horizontal Drive
Positive-level, TTL compatibility, at a frequency of 15.75
kHz.
2 Color Display
Specific a tions
Size
Height
Length
Depth
Weight
Heat Output
Power Cable
Length
Size
Signal Cable
Length
Size
297 mm (11.7 in.)
392 mm (15.4 in.)
407 mm (15.6 in.)
11.8 kg (26 Ib)
240 BTU/hr
1.83 m (6 tt)
18AWG
1.5m(5ft)
22AWG
Color Display 3
4 Color Display
Logic Diagram
The following pages contain the logic diagram for the IBM Color
Display.
Color Display 5
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES
ON THE PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS
Color Display (Sheet 1 of 1)
6 Color Display
Q561

0504
IS2U76
DANGER
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES
ON THE PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS
----------
R5(l8
2.4K5W
R514
47K l!2W
PWB673 I

C429

k{r
,
I
ill
I
G2
:HFOOZo300
Color Display 7
Notes:
8 Color Display
--- -
----
- ----
----
- - ---
- -- ---
-----
-----
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Enhanced Color
Display
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Operating Characteristics ......................... 2
Specifications .................................. 5
Connector Information ....................... 6
v
vi
Description
The IBM Enhanced Color Display is an advanced color display
capable of operating in two separate modes. Mode 1 is a 16 color
640 by 200 overscan mode with a horizontal scan frequency of
15.75 kHz. Mode 2 is a 64 color 640 by 350 mode with a
horizontal scan frequency of 21.8 kHz. Both modes are
non-interlaced. The monitor determines which mode to operate in
by decoding the vertical sync polarity.
The IBM Enhanced Color Display attaches to the system unit by
a signal cable that is approximately 3.5 feet (1.07 meters) in
length. This signal cable provides a direct-drive interface from
the IBM Personal Computer.
A second cable provides ac power to the display from a standard
wall outlet. The display has its own power control and indicator.
Three models are provided. Model 001 is for northern hemisphere
operation and operates on 120 volts 50/60 Hz. Model 002 is for
northern hemisphere operation and operates on 220/240 volts
50/60 Hz. Model 003 is for southern hemisphere operation and
operates on 220/240 volts 50/60 Hz.
The display has a 13-inch, high-contrast CRT. The CRT and
analog circuits are packaged in an enclosure so the display may sit
either on top of the system unit or on a nearby tabletop or desk.
Front panel controls and indicators include: Power-On control,
Power-On indicator, Brightness and Contrast controls.
Additional controls on the rear of the display are: Vertical Size 1
and Vertical Size 2. There are two service controls on the rear of
the unit, black level adjustment and contrast default value
adjustment.
August 2, 1984 IBM Enhanced Color Display 1
Opera tiog Characteristics
Screen
Etched anti-glare screen
0.31mm dot mask
Displays 16 or 64 colors depending on the mode selected
User Controls
Brightness control affects the contribution of all input bits by
controlling the gain of the video stages. The display contains
a protection circuit which may overide this control.
Contrast control affects the contribution of the least
significant bits only. When pushed in, the contrast control is
rendered inoperative and contrast is determined by the
setting of the contrast default value adjustment on the rear of
the display. Pulling the contrast control knob out engages the
front contrast control.
V. Size 1 control controls the vertical size of the screen in
mode 1.
V. Size 2 control controls the vertical size of the screen in
mode 2.
Service Controls
Black level adjust control is adjusted to make the raster lines
just disappear when black input signal is supplied.
Contrast default value control is used to set the contrast
value when the front contrast control is pushed in. Normally
adjust for best brown color.
2 IBM Enhanced Color Display August 2, 1984
Vertical Sync
Uses polarity of Vertical Sync signal to automatically select
Mode 1 or Mode 2 operation. Mode 1 is selected by a
normally low positive going TTL pulse. Mode 2 is selected by
a normally high negative going TTL pulse.
Screen may be refreshed from 50 to 60 Hz. At 60 Hz there
are either 200 or 350 vertical lines of resolution depending
on the mode selected.
700 f-Lsec retrace time
Horizontal Sync
Normally low, positive going TTL pulse
In Mode 1, 15.75 kHz.
In Mode 2, 21.8 kHz.
6 f-Lsec retrace time
When operating in Mode 1, the display maps the 4 input bits into
16 of the possible 64 colors as shown in the following chart.
I R G
B Color
Rr Gg
Bb
0 0 0 0 Black
00 00
00
0 0 0 1 Blue 00 00
1 0
0 0 1
0 Green 00 1 0 00
0 0 1
1 CYan
00 1 0 1 0
0 1 0
0 Red 1 0 00 00
0 1 0
1 Maaenta
1 0 00 1 0
0 1 1
0 Brown
1 0 01 00
0 1 1
1 Gray 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 0 0 Gray 2 01 01 01
1 0 0
1 LiQht Blue
01 01 1 1
1 0 1
0 Liaht Green
01 1 1 01
1 0 1 1 Liaht Cyan 01 1 1
1 1
1 1 0
0 LiQht Red
1 1 01 01
1 1 0 1 Liaht Maaenta
1 1 01
1 1
1 1 1 0 Liaht Yellow
1 1 1 1 01
1 1 1 1 White
1 1 1 1
1 1
Note: The R G and B are the most significant bits. The r g
and b are the least significant bits.
4 IBM Enhanced Color Display August 2, 1984
Specifications
Size:
Length - 15.4 in (392 mm)
Depth - 15.6 in (407 mm)
Height - 11.7 in (297 mm)
Weight:
321bs
Heat Output:
300 BTU/hr
Power Cable:
Length - 6 ft (1.83 m)
Size - 18 AWG
Signal Cable:
Length - 3.5 ft (1.07 m)
Connector Information
The signals that are on the pins vary with the driver card being
used and the mode in which it is operating. All signals are
expected to be TTL levels supplied by totem pole drivers.
Pin Mode 1 (16 Color) Mode 2 (64 Color)
1 Shield Gnd Ground
2 SiQnal Gnd r
3 Red R
4 Green G
5 Blue B
6 Intensity
9
7 Unused b
8 Horiz Sync Horiz Sync
9 Vert SYnc Vert SYnc
Note: The R G and B are the most significant bits. The r g
and b are the least significant bits.
6 IBM Enhanced Color Display August 2,1984
--- -
----
- ----
- ---
- - ---
- - - ---
-----
--_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Personal Computer
Professional Graphics
Display Technical
Reference
6138159
August 15,1984
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Operating Characteristics ..................... 2
Specifications .................................. 3
Logic Diagrams ................................. 5
August 15,1984
Copyright IBM Corporation 1984 iii
iv
August 15, 1984
Description
The IBM Personal Computer Professional Graphics Display is a
640-by-480 PEL color raster display for medium- and
high-function graphics and alphanumerics. It operates with
separate red, green, and blue analog signals and is can support an
infinite number of colors.
The Professional Graphics Display attaches to the system unit
through a signal cable that is approximately 1.5 meters (4.9 feet)
in length. This cable provides a direct-drive connection from the
IBM Professional Graphics Controller. The cable consists of
shielded, twisted-pair lines, and has a 9-pin, subminiature, D-shell
connector at the system-unit end. The pins have the following
functions:
Hma arne S IN /D escriptlOn
p.
In
Red Video 1
Green Video 2
Blue Video 3
rofessional P
G
D
Horizontal and Vertical Sync 4
Professional
raphics Mode Control 5
Graphics
isplay Ground for Pin 1 6
Controller
Ground for Pin 2 7
Ground for Pin 3 8
Ground for Pins 4 and 5 9
A second cable provides power to the display from a standard
wall outlet. The display has its own power control and indicator.
Depending on the model number, it accepts either 100 to 127 Vac
at 50 to 60 Hz, or 200 to 240 Vac at 50 to 60 Hz.
The display has a 340-millimeter (I3-inch) cathode ray tube
(CRT). The CRT and analog circuits are enclosed so the display
may be placed on top of the system unit or on a nearby tabletop
or desk. Front-panel controls and indicators are the Power-On
indicator, Power-On control, and Contrast and Brightness
controls.
August 15,1984
Copyright IBM Corporation 1984 Professional Graphics Display 1
Operating Characteristics
Screen
High-contrast, antireflection
Displays an infinite number of colors
640 horizontal PELs by 480 vertical PELs
Video Signal
Maximum video bandwidth of 17 MHz
Red, green, blue, and synchronization signals are all
independent
Synchronization
Active low, TTL-compatible, at frequencies of 30.12
kHz horizontal, and 60.02 kHz vertical (non-interlaced)
Mode Control
Active low
Expands the screen capacity to 400 lines.
2 Professional Graphics Display
August 15, 1984
Specifications
Size:
Length: 392 mm (15.4 in.)
Depth: 407 mm (15.6 in.)
Height: 297 mm (11.7 in.)
Weight: 14.5 kg (32Ib)
Power Dissipation:
87 Watts Maximum
Power Cable:
Length: 1.8 m (6 ft)
Size: 18 AWG
Signal Cable:
Length: 1.5 m (4.9 ft)
Size: 28 AWG
August 15, 1984
Copyright IBM Corporation 1984 Professional Graphics Display 3
Notes:
August 15, 1984
Logic Diagrams
The following are the logic diagrams of the Professional Graphics
Display:

I
I;!
, '
.

August 15, 1984
\

::d

II)
'0
...
i
.s::.
II)
Copyright IBM Corporation 1984 Professional Graphics Display S
---------------- r----------
1
.1
1
1
1
1
1
1
~ ~ ~ ~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
(SHT3)
@>
nC::

:l.
.....
-VI
63:...

nOlO
S;+:o-
'"0
0
...

o
::s
- \0
oe
.j>.
(SHT2) B
(SHT 2) C
(SHT2) 0
(SHT 2) E
(SHT 2) F
(SHT 2) G
(SHT2) H
------------i
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
f
I
I
I
I
I M(SHT5)
: N (SHT5)

- P (SHT 5)

: (SHT5)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
i

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
r " r - ~ ~ - - l j ~ . ~ I
r I
I
I
I
~ i
r I
I
I
I
I
I
i
It)
....
____ ,,,,I
--------- ~ ~
<t ~ --
~
August 15, 1984
August 15, 1984
J
(SHT4)
(SHT4) K
(SHT 4) L
Sheet 5 of 5
Professional Graphics Display 9
August 15, 1984
--- -
----
- ----
- ---
- - ---
- -- ---
-----
--_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
mM Graphics Printer
6361480
Ii
Contents
Description ................................... 1
Printer Control Codes ...................... 3
Printer Control Code Quick Reference .......... 13
Print Mode Combinations .................... 16
Graphics Printer Character Set ................ 17
DIPSwitch Settings ........................ 22
Interface ..................................... 25
Specifications ................................. 27
Connector Pin Assignments .................. 29
Logic Diagrams ................................ 33
iii
iv
Description
The IBM Graphics Printer is a self-powered, stand-alone,
tabletop unit. It prints in two directions at 80 characters per
second (cps).
A 9-wire print head is used to print characters in a 9-by-9 dot
matrix. The IBM Graphics Printer can print in a compressed
mode of 132 characters per line, in a standard mode of 80
characters per line, in a double-width compressed mode of 66
characters per line, and in a double-width mode of 40 characters
per line. The printer can print double-size characters and
double-strike characters.
Besides printing the standard ASCII 96-character uppercase and
lowercase character sets, the IBM Graphics Printer has additional
capabilities including: an extended character set for international
languages, subscript, superscript, an underline mode, and
programmable graphics. It can also accept commands setting the
line-feed control desired for the application.
The printer unit obtains ac power from a standard 120-Vac wall
outlet. A 220-Vac model and a 240-Vac model are also available.
A 1.83 m (6 ft) signal cable connects the printer to the system
unit's Printer Adapter or combination Monochrome Display and
Printer Adapter. The cable is a 25-lead shielded cable with a
25-pin D-shell connector at the system unit end, and a 36-pin
connector at the printer end.
Graphics Printer 1
2 Graphics Printer
Printer Control Codes
On the following pages you will find codes for printer characters,
controls, and graphics. You may want to keep them handy for
future reference. The examples given in the "Printer Function"
descriptions are written in the BASIC language. The "Input"
description is given when more information is needed for
programming considerations.
ASCII decimal values for the printer control codes can be found
under "Graphics Printer Character Set."
The descriptions that follow assume that the printer dual-in-line
package (DIP) switches have not been changed from their factory
settings.
Graphics Printer 3
Printer Printer Function
Code
BEL Bell
Sounds the printer buzzer for 1 second.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(7);
CAN Cancel
Clears the printer buffer. Control codes, except SO, remain
in effect.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(24);
CR Carriage Return
Ends the line that the printer is on and prints the data
remaining in the printer buffer. (No Line Feed operation
takes place.)
Note: IBM Personal Computer BASIC adds a Line Feed
unless CHR$(128) is added; for example, CHR$(141).
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(13);
DC2 Device Control 2 (Compressed Off)
Cancels the Compressed print mode.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(18);
DC4 Device Control 4 (Double Width Off)
Cancels the Double Width print mode.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(20);
ESC Escape
Signals the printer that the next data sent
is a printer command.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);
4 Graphics Printer
Printer
Code
ESCA
ESCC
ESC D
Printer Function
Escape A (Sets Variable Line Feeding)
Format: ESC A;n;
Escape A sets the line-feed to n/72 inch. The example that
follows sets line feeding to 24/72 inch. ESC 2 must be sent
to the printer before the line feeding will change. For
example, ESC A;24 (text) ESC 2 (text). The text following
ESC A;24 will be at the previously set line-feed increment.
The text following ESC 2 will be printed with the new
line-feed increment of 24/72 inch. Any increment between
1/72 and 85/72 may be used.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(65);CHR$(24); CHR$(27);CHR$(50);
Note: How to enter "n": When "n"
is actually transferred to the printer as data, it is
transferred in the form of a 7-bit binary number. In
the case of "ESC A+24," actual output to the
printer is performed as <1 B>H<41 >H<18>H in
hexadecimal code.
Escape C (Set Lines per Page)
Format:ESC C;n;
Sets the page length. ESC C command must be followed by
a value to specify the length of page desired. (Maximum
form length for the printer is 127 lines.) The example
below sets the page length to 55 lines. The printer
defaults to 66 lines per page when powered on or reset.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(67); CHR$(55);
Escape C (Set Inches per Page)
Format:ESC C;n;m;
Escape C sets the length of the page in inches (one inch is
25.4 millimeters). This command requires a value of 0
(zero) for n, and a value between 1 and 22 for m.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(67);CHR$(0); CHR$(12);
Escape D (Set Horizontal Tab Stops)
Format: ESC D;n1 ;n2; ... nk;NUL;
Sets the horizontal tab stop positions. The example that
follows sets the horizontal tab stop positions at printer
columns 10, 20, and 40. They are followed by CHR$(O). the
Null code. They must be given in ascending numeric order.
Tab stops can be set between 1 and 80. When the printer is
in the Compressed print mode, tab stops can be set up to
132. The Graphics Printer can have a maximum of 28 tab stops.
The HT Code (CHR$(9)) is used to execute a tab operation.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(68);CHR$(10);
CHR$(20);CHR$(40);CHR$(0);
Graphics Printer 5
Code
ESC E Escape E (Emphasized)
Sets the printer to the Emphasized print mode. The speed of
the printer is reduced to half speed during the Emphasized
print mode.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(69);
ESCF Escape F (Emphasized Off)
Cancels the Emphasized print mode.
Example:
ESCG Escape G (Double Strike)
Sets the printer to the Double Strike print mode. The paper
is spaced 1/216 inch before the second pass of the
print hefld.
Example:
ESCH Escape H (Double Strike Off)
Cancels the Double Strike mode.
Example:
ESCJ Escape J (Sets Variable Line Feeding)
Format: ESC J;n;
When ESC J is sent to the printer, the paper will advance in
increments of n/216 inch. The value of n must be between 1
and 255. The example that follows sets the line feed to
50/216 inch. ESC J is canceled after the line feed takes
place.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27) ;CHR$(74) ;CH R$(50);
6 Graphics Printer
Printer
Code
ESCK
Printer Function
Escape K (480 Bit-Image Graphics Mode)
FormatESC K;n, ;n2;v, ;v2; ... vk;
Changes from the Text mode to the 480 Bit-Image Graphics
mode. n, and n2 are one byte each, and together specify
the number of bit-image data bytes (k) to be transferred. v,
through vk are the bytes of the bit-image data. The number
of bit-image data bytes (k) is equal to n, + 256n2 and
cannot exceed 480 bytes. At every horizontal position, each
byte can print up to 8 vertical dots. The least significant
bit of the byte corresponds to the bottom dot; the most
significant bit of the byte corresponds to the top dot.
Bit-image data may be mixed with text data on the same line.
Note: Assign values to n, and n2 as follows:
n, represents values from 0 through 255.
n2 represents the values of either 0 or 1 with a weight of 256.
The (z)s in the following description of n, and n2
can be either 1 's or O's,
n
2
I
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 z
2'5 2'4 2'3 2'2
2"
2'0 2
9
2
8
n,
I
Z Z Z Z Z Z Z z
27
2
6
2
5 24
2
3 22
2' 2
I
I
Graphics Printer 7
Printer
Code
ESC K
Cont.
Printer Function
Data sent to the printer.
DataA ESclK n1 In2 DataB DataC ESclK n1 In2 DataD
Text Length Bit- Text Length
Data of bit image data of bit
image data image
data V
1
-Vk data
480 bit-image positions
Note: Assume a total of 20 characters of text data (data
A and data C). In Text mode, 20 characters correspond
to 120 bit-image positions (20 x 6 = 120). The
printable portion left for Bit-Image Graphics
data (data B and data D) is 360 bit-image
positions (480 - 120 = 360).
Example:
1 'OPEN PRINTER IN RANDOM MODE WITH LENGTH
OF 255
2 WIDTH "LPT1 :",255
3 OPEN "LPT1 :" AS #1
4 PRINT #1,CHR$(13);CHR$(10);
5 SLASH$=CHR$(l )+CHR$(02)+ CHR$(04)+CHR$(08)
6 SLASH$=SLASH$+CHR$(16)+CHR$(32)+
CHR$(64)+CHR$(128)+CHR$(0)
7 GAP$=CHR$(O)+CHR$(O)+CHR$(O)
8 NDOTS=480
9 'ESC K N1 N2
10 PRINT #1,CHR$(27);"K";CHR$(NDOTS MOD 256);
CHR$ (FIX (NDOTS/256));
11 'SEND NDOTS NUMBER OF BIT IMAGE BYTES
Bit-
image
data
v
1
-Vk
12 FOR 1=1 TO NDOTS/12 'NUMBER OF SLASHES TO PRINT
USING GRAPHICS
13 PRINT #1 ,SLASH$;GAP$;
14 NEXT I
15 CLOSE
16 END
This example will give you a row of slashes
printed in the Bit-Image Graphics mode.
8 Graphics Printer
Printer
Code
ESC l
ESC N
ESCO
ESCS
ESCT
ESCU
Printer Function
Escape l (960 Bit-Image Graphics Mode)
Format: ESC L;n1 ;n2;v1 ;v2;.vk;
mode. The input is similar to ESC K. The 960 Bit-Image
Graphics mode prints at half the speed of the 480 Bit-Image
Graphics mode, but can produce a denser graphic image. The
number of bytes of bit-image data (k) is n1 + 256n2
but cannot exceed 960. n1 is in the range of 0 to 255.
Escape N (Set Skip Perforation)
Format ESC N;n;
Sets the Skip Perforation function. The number following
ESC N sets the value for the number of lines of Skip
Perforation. The example shows a 12-line skip. This will
print 54 lines and advance the paper 12 lines. The value of n
must be between 1 and 127. ESC N must be reset anytime the
page length (ESC C) is changed.
Example:
Escape 0 (Cancel Skip Perforation)
Cancels the Skip Perforation function.
Example:
Escape S (Subscript/Superscript)
Format: ESC S;n;
Sets the printer to the Subscript print mode when ESC S is
followed by a 1, as in the example that follows. When ESC S
is followed by a 0 (zero), the printer will print in the
Superscript print mode.
Example:
Escape T (Subscript/Superscript Off)
Cancels printing in the Subscript or Superscript print mode.
Example:
Escape U (Unidirectional Printing)
Format: ESC U;n;
The printer will print from left to right when ESC U is
followed by a 1. When ESC U is followed by a 0 (zero), the
left to right printing operation is canceled. The
unidirectional printing (ESC U) ensures a more accurate
print-start position for better print quality.
Example:
Graphics Printer 9
Code
ESCW Escape W (Double Width)
Format: ESC W;n;
Sets the printer to the Double Width print mode when ESC W is
followed by a 1. This mode must be canceled with ESC W
followed by a 0 (zero)
Example:
ESCY Escape Y (960 Bit-Image Graphics Mode Normal Speed)
Format: ESC Y n, ;n2;v, ;v2; ... vk;
mode, at normal speed. The printer cannot print dots on
consecutive dot positions. The input of data is similar to
ESC L.
ESCZ Escape Z (1920 Bit-Image Graphics Mode)
Format: ESC Z;n, ;n2;v, ;v2; ... vk;
mode. The input is similar to the other Bit-Image Graphics
modes. ESC Z can print only every third dot position.
ESCO Escape 0 (1/8-lnch Line Feeding)
Sets paper feeding to 3.175 mm (1/8 in.).
Example:
ESC 1 Escape 1 (7/72-lnch Line Feeding)
Sets paper feeding to 2.47 mm (7/72 in.).
Example:
ESC 2 Escape 2 (Start Variable Line Feeding)
ESC 2 is an execution command for ESC A. If no ESC A
command is given, line feeding returns to 4.23mm (1/6 in.).
Example:
ESC3 Escape 3 (Variable Line Feeding)
Format: ESC 3;n;
Changes the paper feeding to n/216 inch. The
example that follows sets the paper feeding to 1/4 inch
The value of n must be between 1 and 255.
Example:
ESC 6 Escape 6 (Select Character Set 21
Selects Character Set 2. (See "Graphics Printer Character
Set 2" later in this section.)
Example:
10 Graphics Printer
Printer
Code
ESC7
ESC8
ESC9
ESC -
ESC <
FF
Printer Function
Escape 7 (Select Character Set 1)
Selects character set 1. (See "Graphics Printer Character
Set 1" later in this section.) Character set 1 is
automatically selected when the printer is set to on or reset.
Example:
Escape 8 (Ignore Paper End)
Allows the printer to print to the end of the paper. The
printer ignores the Paper End switch.
Example:
Escape 9 (Cancel Ignore Paper End)
Cancels the Ignore Paper End command. ESC 9 is
automatically selected when the printer is set to on or
reset.
Example:
Escape Minus (Underline)
Format: ESC -;n;
ESC - followed by a 1, prints all of the following data with
an underline.
ESC - followed by a 0 (zero), cancels the Underline print
mode.
Example:
Escape Less Than (Home Head)
The print head will return to the left margin to print one
line following ESC <.
Example:
Form Feed
Advances the paper to the top of the next page.
Note: The location of the paper when the printer
is set to on, determines the top of the page. The
next top of page is 279.4 mm (11 in.) from that position.
ESC C can be used to change the page length.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(12);
HT Horizontal Tab
Tabs to the next horizontal tab stop. Tab stops
are set every 8 columns when the printer's power is applied
and can be changed with ESC D.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(9);
Graphics Printer 11
Code
LF Line Feed
Advances the paper up one line. Line spacing is 4.23 mm
(1/6 in.) unless reset by ESC A, ESC 0, ESC 1, ESC 2 or ESC 3.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(10);
NUL Null
Used with ESC B and ESC D as a list terminator.
NUL also is used with other printer control codes to select
options (for example, ESC S).
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(O);
SI Shift In (Compressed)
Changes the printer to the Compressed print mode.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(15);
SO Shift Out (Double Width)
Changes the printer to the Double Width print mode.
12 Graphics Printer
Printer Control Code Quick Reference
This is an alphabetic listing of the descriptions of the printer
control codes. You will find it helpful to locate the code you need
to perform a certain job, or determine the ASCII decimal value
quickly, once you are familiar with the control codes.
Note: ASCII values greater than 27 must be preceded by the
ESC code (ASCII value 27).
Description
Alarm
Audible alarm
Bell
Buzzer
Cancel
Cancel data
Cancel double-strike printing
Cancel double-width by line
Cancel double-width (lines)
Cancel emphasized printing
Cancel ignore paper end
Cancel perforation skip
Cancel subscript/superscript
Carriage return
Character set 1 select
Character set 2 select
Character spacing 10 per inch
Character spacing 17.1 per inch
Clear printer buffer
Command designator
Command end
Command prefix
Command start
Command terminator
Compressed On
Compressed print
Condensed print
Data cancel
Double-strike printing
Double-strike printing Off
Code
BEL
BEL
BEL
BEL
CAN
CAN
ESCH
DC4
ESCW
ESCF
ESC 9
ESC 0
ESCT
CR
ESC 7
ESC 6
DC2
SI
CAN
ESC
NUL
ESC
ESC
NUL
SI
SI
SI
CAN
ESCG
ESCH
ASCII
Value
7
7
7
7
24
24
72
20
87
70
57
79
84
13
55
54
18
15
24
27
o
27
27
o
15
15
15
24
71
72
Graphics Printer 13
Description Code ASCII
Value
Double-width-by-line Off DC4 20
Double-width-by-line On SO 14
Double-width On (lines) ESCW 87
Double-width printing (lines) ESCW 87
Eject form FF 12
Eject paper FF 12
Emphasized printing ESCE 69
Emphasized printing Off ESCF 70
Escape ESC 27
Feed line LF 10
Form feed FF 12
Graphics, 480 bit-image ESCK 75
Graphics, 960 bit-image, 1/2 speed ESCL 76
Graphics, 960 bit-image, full speed ESCY 89
Graphics 1920 bit-image ESCZ 90
Head, home
ESC <
60
Home head
ESC <
60
Horizontal tab HT 9
Horizontal tab stops set ESCD 68
Ignore paper end ESC 8 56
Ignore paper end, cancel ESC 8 56
Length-of-page set in inches ESCC 67
Length-of-page set in lines ESCC 67
Line-feed, set 1/6 inch LF 10
Line-feed, set 1/8 inch ESCO 48
Line-feed, set 7/72 inch ESC 1 49
Line-feed, set variable ESC 3 51
Line-feed, set variable ESC A 65
Line-feed, set variable ESCJ 74
Line-feed, start variable ESC 2 50
Line-feed, set variable ESCJ 74
Null NUL 0
Page eject FF 12
Page length, set in inches ESCC 67
Page length, set in lines ESCC 67
Paper eject FF 12
Paper end, ignore ESC 8 56
Perforation skip Off ESC a 79
Perforation skip set ESCN 78
14 Graphics Printer
Value
Print double-width one line SO 14
Print double-width multiple lines ESCW 87
Print emphasized ESCE 69
Print emphasized Off ESCF 70
Print 10 characters per inch DC2 18
Print unidirectional On/Off ESCU 85
Printer buffer, clear CAN 24
Return carriage CR 13
Select character set 1 ESC 7 55
Set 1 (character set 1) ESC 7 55
Set 1/8-inch line feed ESC 0 48
Set variable line feed ESC 3 51
Set horizontal tab stops ESCD 68
Set page length in lines ESCC 67
Set page length in inches ESCC 67
Set perforation skip ESCN 78
Set variable line feed ESC A 65
Skip perforation Off ESC a 79
Skip perforation On ESCN 78
Start 7/72 inch line feed ESC 1 49
Start double-strike print ESCG 71
Start double-width print by line SO 14
Start double-width print (lines) ESCW 87
Start emphasized print ESCE 69
Start perforation skip ESCN 78
Start subscript/ superscript ESCS 83
Start variable line feed ESC 2 50
Start underline ESC- 45
Stop double-strike print ESCH 72
Stop double-width by line DC4 20
Stop double-width print (lines) ESCW 87
Stop emphasized print ESCF 70
Stop perforation skip ESC a 79
Stop subscript/ superscript ESCT 84
Stop superscript/subscript ESCT 84
Stop underline ESC- 45
Graphics Printer 15
Value
Stops, horizontal tabs, set ESCD 68
Subscript/ superscript Off ESCT 84
Subscript/ superscript On ESCS 83
Tab horizontal HT 9
Tab stops, horizontal, set ESCD 68
Tabs horizontal set ESCD 68
Underline On ESC- 45
Unidirectional printing Off ESCU 85
Unidirectional printing On ESCU 85
Variable line feed ESC 3 54
Variable line feed set ESC 3 65
Variable line feed set ESC] 74
Vertical tabs set ESCB 66
Print Mode Combinations
The IBM Graphics Printer can use any of the combinations of
print modes listed in the following table. The print mode can be
changed at any place within a line. Modes can be selected and
combined if they are in the same vertical column.
Printer Modes
Normal X X X
Compressed X X X
Emphasized X X X
Double Strike X X X
Subscript X X X
Superscript X X X
Double Width X X X X X X X X X
Underline X X X X X X X X X
16 Graphics Printer
Graphics Printer Character Set
The tables on the following pages show each character with its
respective ASCII value.
Graphics Printer 17
Graphics Printer Character Set 1 (Part 1 of 2)
18 Graphics Printer
/f ~

;
..,
I

:::: :
:
1'

~
Graphics Printer 19
20 Graphics Printer
'; 1 ~ ' 1 '; 1 '; '; I ~ ' 1 ~ ' I:' ;' 1 ';.' 1
'; I';' 1;1 A ' ~ I ; I : ; I ; ': I; 1
~ r ~ 1 ' ~ I ': ' ~ I ~ 1 ;1; '; r; 1
160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169
alrHu nINI!!IQ ,1 .. 1
170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179
:::
~
r-
~
X ~ I

~

;

~

"
~
Graphics Printer Character Set (Part 2 of 2)
Graphics Printer 21
DIP-Switch Settings
There are two DIP switches on the control circuit board. In order
to satisfy the user's specific requirements, desired control modes
are selectable by the DIP switches. The functions of the switches
and their preset conditions at the time of shipment are as shown
in the following figures.
DIP Switch 2 DIP Switch 1
~ O O DOD
D ~ D 0 O ~ ~ DOD Dooq
o
o
o 0
D
Location of Printer DIP Switches
22 Graphics Printer
Switch Factory-Set
Number Function On Off Condition
1-1 Not Applicable
-
- On
1-2 CR Print Only Print & On
Line Feed
1-3 Buffer Full Print Only Print & Off
Line Feed
1-4 Cancel Code Invalid Valid Off
1-5 Not Applicable - - On
1-6 Error Buzzer Sound Does Not On
Sound
1-7 Character Generator Set 2 Set 1 Off
1-S SLCT IN Signal Fixed Not Fixed On
Internally Internally
Functions and Conditions of DIP Switch 1 (Graphics)
Switch Factory-Set
Number Function On Off Condition
2-1 Form Length 304.Smm 279.4mm Off
(12 inches) (11 inches)
2-2 Line Spacing 3.175mm 4.23mm Off
(1/8 inch) (1/6 inch)
2-3 Auto Feed XT Signal Fixed Not Fixed Off
Internally Internally
2-4 1 Inch Skip Over Perforation Valid Not Valid Off
Functions and Conditions of DIP Switch 2 (Graphics)
Graphics Printer 23
24 Graphics Printer
Interface
Specifications:
Data transfer rate: 1000 cps (maximum)
Synchronization: By externally-supplied -STROBE pulses.
Handshaking -ACKNLG or BUSY signals.
Logic level: Input data and all interface control signals are
compatible with the TTL level.
Connector type: 57-30360 (Amphenol)
Data Transfer Sequence:
BUSY ----,
ACKNLG
Approximately
5 J-Ls
DATA -----I
STROBE ---+-.....
0.5 J-Ls (Minimum)
0.5 J-Ls (Minimum)
0.5 J-Ls (Minimum)
Parallel Interface Timing Diagram
Graphics Printer 25
26 Graphics Printer
Specifications
Size
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Power Cable
Length
Size
Signal Cable
Length
Size
Voltage (Vac)
107 mm (4.2 in.)
400 mm (15.7 in.)
305 mm (12 in.)
5.5 kg (12 Ib)
1.83 m (6 ft)
18AWG
1.83 m (6 ft)
22AWG
Frequency
(Hz)
Nominal Minimum Maximum ! 3 Hz
120 104 127 60
220 198 242 50/60
240 216 264 50/60
Electrical Specifications
Current Power
(Amps) (Watts)
Maximum Maximum
1.0 100
0.5 100
0.5 100
Graphics Printer 27
Print Method
Print Speed
Print Direction
Number of Pins in Head
line Spacing
Printing Characteristics
Matrix
Graphic Character
Printing Sizes
Normal
Double Width
Compressed
Double Width-Compressed
Subscript
Superscript
Media Handling
Paper Feed
Paper Width Range
Copies
Paper Path
Interfaces
Standard
Inked Ribbon
Color
Type
Life Expectancy
Environmental Conditions
Operating Temperature
Operating Humidity
Heat Output
Printer Specifications
28 Graphics Printer
Serial-impact wire matrix
so cps
Bidirectional with logical seeking
9
4.23 mm (1/6 in.) or programmable
9x9
See "Graphics Printer Character Set"
tables.
Characters
per inch
10
5
17.1
S.25
10
10
Maximum
characters
per line
SO
40
132
66
SO
SO
Adjustable sprocket pin feed
101.6 mm (4 in.) to 254 mm (10 in.)
One original plus two carbon copies
(total thickness not to exceed 0.3 mm
(0.012 in.)). Minimum paper thickness
is 0.064 mm (0.0025 in.).
Rear
Parallel S- bit
Data and Control Lines
Black
Cartridge
3 million characters
5 to 35C (41 to 95F)
10 to SO% non-condensing
341 BTU/hr (maximum)
Connector Pin Assignments
Signal Return
Pin No. Pin No. Signal Direction Description
1 19 STROBE In STROBE pulse to read data
in. Pulse width must be
more than 0.5 Ils at
receiving terminal. The
signal level is normally
"high"; read-in of data is
performed at the "low"
level of this signal.
2 20 DATA 1 In These signals represent
3 21 DATA 2 In information of the 1 st to
4 22 DATA 3 In 8th bits of parallel data
5 23 DATA 4 In respectively. Each signal
6 24 DATA 5 In is at "high" level when
7 25 DATA 6 In data is logical" 1 " and
8 26 DATA 7 In "low" when logical "0:'
9 27 DATA 8 In
10 28 ACKNLG Out Approximately 5 Ils pulse;
"low" indicates that data
has been received and the
printer is ready to accept
other data.
11 29 BUSY Out A "high" signal indicates
that the printer cannot
receive data. The signal
becomes "high" in the
following cases:
1. During data entry.
2. During printing
operation.
3. In "offline" state.
4. During printer error
status.
Connector Pin Assignment and Descriptions of Interface Signals
(Part 1 of 3)
Graphics Printer 29
Signal Return
12 30 PE Out A "high" signal indicates
that the printer is out of
paper.
13
-
SLCT Out This signal indicates that
the printer is in the
selected state.
14 - AUTO In With this signal being at
FEED XT "low" level, the paper is
automatically fed one line
after printing. (The signal
level can be fixed to
"low" with DIP SW pin
2-3 provided on the
control circuit board.)
15
-
NC Not used.
16 - OV Logic GND level.
17
-
CHASSIS-
-
Printer chassis GND. In
GND the printer, the chassis
GND and the logic GND
are isolated from each
other.
18 - NC - Not used.
19-30 -
GND
-
"Twisted-Pair Return"
signal; GND level.
31
-
INIT In When the level of this
signal becomes "low"
the printer controller is
reset to its initial state and
the print buffer is cleared.
This signal is normally at
"high" level, and its pulse
width must be more than
50 )ls at the receiving
terminal.
(Part 2 of 3)
30 Graphics Printer
Signal Return
32 ERROR Out The level of this signal
becomes "low" when the
printer is in "Paper End"
state, "Offline" state and
"Error" state.
33
-
GND - Same as with pin
numbers 19 to 30.
34
-
NC - Not used.
35 Pulled up to + 5 Vdc
through 4.7 k-ohms
resistance.
36 - SLCTIN In Data entry to the printer is
possible only when the
level of this signal is
"low:' (Internal fixing can
be carried out with DIP
SW 1-8. The condition at
the time of shipment is
set "low" forthis signal.)
Notes: 1. "Direction" refers to the direction of signal flow as viewed from the
printer.
2. "Return" denoted "Twisted-Pair Return" and is to be connected at
signal-ground level.
When wiring the interface, be sure to use a twisted-pair cable for
each signal and never fail to complete connection on the return
side. To prevent noise effectively, these cables should be shielded
and connected to the chassis of the system unit and printer,
respectively.
3. All interface conditions are based on TTL level. Both the rise and fall
times of each signal must be less than 0.2 Ils.
4. Data transfer must not be carried out by ignoring the ACKNLG or
BUSY signal. (Data transfer to this printer can be carried out only
after confirming the ACKNLG signal or when the level of the BUSY
signal is "low:')
(Part 3 of 3)
Graphics Printer 31
32 Graphics Printer
Logic Diagrams
The following page and foldout contain the logic diagrams for the
the IBM Graphics Printer.
Graphics Printer 33
14
13
"
10
CN4
15
"
CN4 6
3
14
15
16
17
'N4 [j
CN15 18
[
" CN5 13
11
9
9 x 3.3K
HI
H'
H3
H4
H5
H5
H6
H6
H7
HB
HB
10
-
H9 ILl 9
iii

16V
RSO
RB
'W
680
"
15K
"
1000p
SOL 10
SOL
R4
+5 150
,; f f :::0 ::
0,01" GPE 16
GR 17
S52778
014
RI'
"0
5W
Rl3
"0
5W
'RA
"
GAB
"
'RG
13
GAO 24
SGA 13
lFA
"
l"
"
l"
"
lFD
"
SlF 14
CN4 18

REo
Gra h" ;:
34 Graphics Printer P ICS Printer (Sheet 1 of 2) 'PE 18
,,'

... 1094
HUt
RM43
R34 RM 10
34-11
len
lOp
AS
1.2K
IW
7C
9'
5
"
13
,
7C
II
10
A
7C

II 6E 12

r-__ ,

1500P ,':e
12
10 19
";:" I 4700P
'fa
137 38 21 22 23 2' 25 26 27 28'-----------).+-39-----....
pea PCI PAD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PCl PeJ
1881 8155
7C
7C
A38
2.2K
3"
A5
UK
,AI 3.3' P""I Cl8
I Io.olp

AlO" e945
A7
UK
lJ2W
18481
T
\
___ 0560. - ... ......- ... _< ;;:.....
..q:p , ;L } I .r e3 A.. """-t-----<l
I rl f3" ,l' 103 UK
A' Vee '0 5 , HII>3 ;:::=:=Q .2'
C12
101'

AO I"" T O.DIp 6 3e
________________ 5
I' 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 9 10 /29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 2 38 7 -b t::=::::g:t
'----- -.5
RM6-9
40 20
Vcc lin
CRI 0
'.H'L
I e13 '2
AlO
, 5 '7
.Ll '6
6E '5
,.,
4 63
"6 n
10K

1 117 l( TD625G4 Vi
7 78

, 78
II
5 78
"
1
C13 lOP
7 B 13
34 1.2K
PI7
INT
P17 ,... 3' 1./>',,'---"-+---'
Pl5 10::: 33:---'''--..:.:.-----'
78 14
78
Pl6 P:: 37:--------------'
P26
TO 11 r-----------..:I.:,IV d .:;,.1:.::0--..-_____ -,
3e
68
"
eN2
080 Vee Vu
I 14'

VII
L-____ _:=--..:.:..__ -:-;:-;=====::::;::;;:====g HEAD TRIGGER
AI015 R30 16 T062504 FP
MASK
AOM
5
.....--<...- VOo
Al7
UK
AI, ....- PROG
1.2' '-- 58
--..,,,
[lei
8049
8039
'
18 5
19 6
'0

5 j
.5 j j A31
18
",...J..9;:.L1.:J0c.:1.;.1c.:'.:J3.;.14:.c.::":.L:.:"=IJ_,.L:':".., ".-.....I..9-,-1_0L.'..J1L.13-,-14..1-"..I...."-,-I7_-,-':.;.'_ "'.-_1.:.91:'.:.1.:'.:.1'L'3:.L.14::J.::":J.:.:":L::17_:.L!."'- !l 4 5 Il 13 rI !l 4 5
Vee VPP sf 0 Vee 00 I l3 4 5 6 7 All Vee 00 I l 34 56 7 All CK A 8 C A 8 COl
O.Olp GNU l33Vl716 [18)Hl iiE 0.01 12 2716 [381 #l jj plO 0.01t.' Il GNO l716[l81 III lO CLR CLR
Il AD 1 l 3 4 5 6 7 8 !l 10 CS /1 GNo AD 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 AO 1 'I. 3 4 5 6 7 8 !l 10 Ci OA OB OC 00 OA 08 OC 00
18 7 I' I 51' 3 , I '3 21 19 18 ,. 18 7 , 5 , 3 , I '3 21 19 18 "" 18 71615 , 3 , I 13 11 19 18 I' 71'" I' 7 10"

l3 24
3 5 7 9 11 13 11 13 3 5 7 9
01 l 3 4 5 6 05 06"01 l 3 4
LS367 13A) LS367 [4A1 G;
.... ' r"-12_.;..3-,',-.;.5_:';.;";;,l G'l 15 6 11 l 3 4
...,,'f--",+-::..51-'"0,+-',,-'!-,-' 15 1:5 14 l 4 6 I 0

Al8
12K
PRO"
Ss
1981
8041
L ______________________
3.3K 6B 1
7D
Pl0 '1.7 CRB 9 8

CAA
I TE 5 ________________________-o
_ II 260 "'"' CA8
PII ___ CAe
T
CAO
"
PIt 29 , 7{3.3K 7 _____________ -<l
70
PI4I\.2.!31-!!Lf!.A----.. LfB
1070
9 13 O>-:-::-+---------------<llFA
3 8 70 Il

lFO
PIS 32 lFe
__
, 3 AM'

LF

'0 6
AM5
3.31( 5

T I __ 'E' ,

,.. R371.ll(
r-++ _____
" PRAV
31 RI 4 .-l-+------'-'-"'"'E"''''<j P10
____ P13
II
l3 UtR Pll
I
P11
R36 l.ll( 36
P25
Pl5 36 9 AO
Tl 39
Pl4 35
6 5 101( x7
I
R35 1 'lK 3T
P16
ii ' ii
6
2

L

CI5 _
TI p.:3::9_--",10,-P_-_________ -+.;.II{:1
TO p...-:-'____________ _1.::
'
<1:
Al8
15K
5
Il R41 R39
3E 131 ... ....--
! A"
"'0 I A43
8 101(" ", 1
3E 9 ... ----._----....-;;:;::-1---0 PTS
! C33 R'l3
*001 r

I
, 3e 3 3 ______________________________

5
5
vl r
NO PAPER ON ON OFF LFSW FF SW BUllER +12 Gl
__ ____ _____________________________________J1
T500P L---------------------------------------------------------t_--------------------------<l.
-!- Rl7
- 151(
Lt-,H15e, C6
"...105 13.3"
50V
14J 15 eNS
" 17
!}N4
13
"J
CNS
"
10 eN4
II
"
13
14
ilJ CN5 18
eN<
21
19
}-
20 CIM
10
eN5
II
18
'"
17
PURPLE GRAY WHIT{ YELLOW BLUE ORANGE RED BROWN BLACK
Graphics Printer (Sheet 2 of 2) Graphics Printer 35/36
--- -
----
- - ---
- ---
- - ---
- - - ---
-----
--_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
mM Personal Computer
Color Printer
6361478
ii
Contents
Description ................................... 1
Major Subsystems .......................... 3
6803 Microprocessor ....................... 6
Printing in Color ........................... 36
Color Printer Character Set 1 ................. 37
Color Printer Character Set 2 ................. 39
All Printable Characters ..................... 41
DIP-Switch Settings ........................ 43
Interface ..................................... 45
Specifications ................................. 47
Connector Pin Assignments .................. 50
Logic Diagrams ................................ 53
Index ........................................ Index-l
iii
iv
Description
The IBM Personal Computer Color Printer is a tabletop, wire
matrix, color printer. It attaches to the system unit's Printer
Adapter or combination Monochrome Display and Printer
Adapter through a standard printer cable, which has a 25-pin
connector on the system unit end and a 36-pin connector on the
printer end.
When the Color Printer is ready to accept data, the system unit
sends the data and control codes through the printer cable to the
printer's input/output (I/O) board. The I/O board directs the
data and control codes to a buffer. The 6803 Microprocessor on
the printer's controller circuit board monitors the buffer
constantly and decides when and how to print the information
based on the control codes.
The 6803 Microprocessor takes a character from the buffer and
compares the character against a table to determine what dots to
print. If the character is a control character, the microprocessor
compares the character against a control-character table so that it
knows what action to take.
When the 6803 Microprocessor reads a line-ending character, it
determines whether it would be faster to move to the right margin
and print backwards or to the left margin to begin printing. This
ability, called logic seeking, allows faster printer output.
Color Printer 1
The following block diagram shows the operation of the IBM
Personal Computer Color Printer.
Parallel
Data
Data
Flow
Control
0
~
Mode
Switches
and Sensors
110
Interface
Buffer
~
and
'\r-
ROS
Address
latch
Color Printer Block Diagram
2 Color Printer
Ribbon
Feed
Circuit
6803
Carriage
Micro-
Drive
processor
Circuit
-A.
Paper
r-/
Feed
Circuit
~
Wire
Bidirectional Data Bus Drive
Circuit
io
Function Printer
Select Status
Switch Indicators
Major Subsystems
The three major electromechanical subsystems of the printer are
the I/O subsystem, controller subsystem, and print subsystem.
Each subsystem is controlled by the 6803 Microprocessor
mounted on the controller circuit board. The power-supply
regulator circuits are an integrated portion of the controller card.
The 110 Subsystem
The I/O circuit board contains the circuits needed to direct the
parallel data from the computer and interface cable to the
printer's controller circuit board for processing. The I/O board
also contains the circuits for directing operational status signals
between the printer and the system unit.
Controller Subsystem
The controller subsystem consists of a 6803 Microprocessor and
its peripheral interface and memory devices, which are mounted
on the controller circuit board. The controller line buffer accepts
data from the computer through the printer's I/O board. The
controller decodes the data, then sends the data to the print
subsystem for printing.
The controller also controls operation of the paper and ribbon
feed. These circuits are activated by programming or by a
function-select switch. Power regulation and distribution within
the printer are also controlled by the controller board.
Color Printer 3
The power regulator circuit, which is part of the controller circuit
board, receives 5, 10, and 40 volts ac from the power supply
transformer. It rectifies and distributes the different voltages to
the various circuits and motors in the printer.
Print Subsystem
The print subsystem prints the data received from the controller.
The subsystem consists of the following:
Print head and carriage assembly
Carriage drive motor and belt
Left-margin sensor
Paper feed assembly
Ribbon drive assembly
The print head contains nine print wires. The print wires are
staggered in two vertical columns with five wires in one column
and four wires in the other. This arrangement is designed to allow
overlapping of print dots. Selectively driving the wires against the
ribbon and paper as the print head is moved across the platen,
results in the printing of high-quality characters.
The print head is mounted on a carriage which is driven
bidirectionally by the carriage drive stepper motor and drive belt.
The left-margin sensor is used to signal the controller that the
print head is at the home position.
4 Color Printer
The paper feed assembly is made up of a tractor assembly, paper
stepper motor, and a paper-out sensor. It feeds the forms into
position and holds the paper stationary while printing.
Continuous forms are fed by pin belts in the tractor assembly, and
single sheets of paper are fed by pressure rolls in the paper path.
The pin belts and pressure rolls are driven by a drive shaft, drive
belt, and the paper stepper motor.
The ribbon feed assembly drives the ribbon between the paper
and the print head at a constant speed. It consists of a ribbon
cartridge, ribbon drive motor, and a ribbon feed path made up of
two rollers, two fixed posts, and a print-head ribbon guide. The
ribbon cartridge contains a continuous loop of pre-inked 19-mm
(3/4-in.) wide ribbon. The ribbon is pulled from the cartridge,
around two guide posts, through the print-head ribbon guide,
around two more ribbon posts, and "stuffed" back into the
cartridge by two "stuffing" wheels.
In order to print different colors, the ribbon is shifted up and
down by the color control mechanism, which is made up of a
motor and cam assembly. The cam pivots the complete ribbon
feed assembly to four different levels that match the four color
bands on the ribbon.
Color Printer 5
6803 Microprocessor
The 6803 Microprocessor and its peripheral devices, which are
mounted on the controller circuit board, direct all operations of
the printer. This 8-bit single-chip microprocessor unit (MPU)
functions as a monolithic MPU requiring one +5-Vdc power
supply and is TTL-compatible. On-chip resources include parallel
I/O and a three function programmable timer. Some of the other
features include:
Enhanced 6800 MPU instruction set
8 x 8 multiply instruction
Upward-source and object-code compatibility with the 6800
MPU
Expanded operation to 64K-byte address space
29 parallel I/O and 2-handshake control lines
Internal clock generator with divide-by-4 output
The program-controlled operating mode determines the
configuration of 18 of the 40 MPU pins available, location
(internal or external) of interrupt vectors, and type of external
bus. The configuration of the remaining 22 pins is not dependent
on the operating mode.
Twenty nine pins are organized as three 8-bit ports and one 5-bit
port. Each port consists of at least a data register and a
write-only data-direction register. The data-direction register is
used to define whether corresponding bits in the data register are
configured as an input (clear) or output (set).
6 Color Printer
When the port is used as a "data port" or "I/O port," it is
controlled by the port data direction register and the programmer
has direct access to the port pins using the port Data Register.
Port pins are labeled as Pij, where "i" identifies one of four ports
and "j" indicates the particular bit. The operating mode
determines the configuration of Port 3, Port 4, SCI, SC2, and the
physical location of the interrupt vectors.
The mode used by the 6803 MPU is called the Expanded
Multiplexed mode. Expanded Multiplexed mode refers to the
type of bus it supports. In this mode, Port 3 functions as a
time-multiplexed address/data bus with address valid on the
negative edge of Address Strobe (AS), and data valid while "E"
(which is a timing signal), is high. Port 4 provides address lines
A8 to AIS.
Color Printer 7
8 Color Printer
The following pages list, in alphabetic order, the printer control
codes with a description of each. Some knowledge of BASIC
programming is necessary to insert printer control codes in your
program. An example of each code in BASIC is at the end of
each description. The "Format" information is given where more
information is needed for programming considerations.
Note: All combinations of printing qualities, character
spacings, and types are valid. For example, you can print in
emphasized print, double-width, and underline all at the same
time.
The printer can accept parameters for the ESC commands in
either of two formats:
Binary
ASCII Character
Although the default format is binary (as used in all examples in
the "Printer Control Codes" section), the command, ESC @;n;,
can be used to select either format.
This command affects only certain numeric parameters which
follow ESC control codes. Parameters not affected by this
command are those which select On or Off (lor 0) because the
Color Printer operates on only the least significant bit of n in
these commands. Therefore, any odd-numbered ASCII decimal
value gives the same result as n= 1 and any even-numbered ASCII
decimal value gives the same result as n=O.
Color Printer 9
Parameters affected by this command are given in the following
three examples:
1. A parameter defining numeric values.
In ASCII format these parameters must be stated as
decimal characters, with each numeric field terminated
with a non-numeric character (semicolon recommended).
For example, to select the near letter quality type font,
(ESC I3) the command is: LPRINT CHR$(27);
CHR$(73); "3; ";
In binary format the command is: LPRINT CHR$(27);
CHR$(73); CHR$(3);
2. A parameter defining lists of values ending in NUL.
In ASCII format these parameters must be stated as
decimal numeric characters, with each numeric field
terminated with a non-numeric character (semicolon
recommended) , with the final NUL being a second
semicolon. For example, to set tabs at columns 10 and 40,
(ESC D) the command is: LPRINT CHR$(27);
CHR$(68)' II 10'40" II.
, , '"
CHR$ (68); CHR$ (10); CHR$ (40); CHR$ (0);
3. A two byte parameter (n1 ;n2;) defining the amount of data to
be printed after the command.
In ASCII format this parameter must be sent as a single
decimal numeric value (0 to XXXX) terminated with a
non-numeric character (semicolon recommended). For
example, to print twenty eight bytes in bit-image graphics,
(ESC K) the command is: LPRINT CHR$(27);
CHR$(75);"28;":FOR X = 1 TO 28: LPRINT
CHR$(255);: NEXT X
CHR$(75);CHR$(28);CHR$(0);: FOR X = 1 TO 28:
LPRINT CHR$(255);: NEXT X
10 Color Printer
Printer
Code
BEL
BS
Printer Function
Audible Alarm
Sounds the printer buzzer for 1 second or less. The buzzer
may be turned off with DIP Switch S.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(7);
Backspace
Moves the print head one character width to the left. The
character width is determined by the selected character
spacing.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(S);
CAN Clear Data
CR
Clears the printer memory of all data waiting to be printed
following the last received line ending code. If the
initialize function is set On by ESC 7 (Set Initialize
Signal Function), all control codes, except SO (Double-Width
printing)' remain in effect. If the initialize function is
set Off by ESC 7, all control codes are cleared and the
printer is set to the values set by the DIP switches. (See
"ESC?" for more details about the initialize
function.)
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(24);
Carriage Return
Causes the printer to print the data that follows CR
beginning at the left margin. No line-feed operation takes
place unless DIP Switch 4 is On or ESC 5 (automatic
line-feed) has been sent.
Note: IBM Personal Computer BASIC (and many other
programs) automatically sends LF (line feed) with CR.
If you do not want LF sent after CR, use ASCII decimal
value 141 from Character Set 1 instead of ASCII decimal
value 13.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(13);
DC1 Select Printer
Sets the printer to accept data from the system unit.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(17);
DC2 10 Characters per Inch Print
Selects character spacing of 10 characters per inch.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(1S);
Color Printer 11
Printer
Code
DC3
DC4
ESC
ESCA
ESCa
ESC B
Printer Function
Deselect Printer
Sets the Color Printer so it will not accept data from the
system unit. A printer must be initialized by the system or
control panel buttons or selected using DC1 (Select Printer)
to accept data.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(19);
Cancel Double-Width Printing by Line
Ends double-width printing by line which was started by SO.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(20);
Command Prefix
Sets the printer to accept the next data sent as a printer
command. (See the following list.)
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);
Store Text Line Spacing
Format: ESC A;n;
ESC A stores a line-feed value of n/72 inch. ESC 2
(Start Text Line Spacing) must then be sent before the line
spacing will change. For example, to store a line-feed value
of 24/72 inch, the code is ESC A 24. However, until
ESC 2 is sent, any text following the ESC A 24 will space at
the previously set line-feed increment. The text following
the ESC 2 will be printed with a new line-feed increment of
24/72 inch. Any increment between 1/72 and
85/72 may be used.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(65);CHR$(n);
Select Automatic Ribbon-Band Shift
Causes the ribbon to shift one color band at the end of each
page. This command is used with an all-black ribbon to
extend the ribbon life.
Example:
Set Vertical Tabs
Format: ESC 8;n1 ;n2; ... n64;NUL;
Sets the vertical tab-stop positions. The power-on default
is without vertical tab stops set. n1 through
n64 represent tab-stop positions by line number.
The topmost line of the page is line O. Tab-stop positions
must be received in ascending numeric order and cannot exceed
the set page length. Up to 64 positions are recognized by
the Color Printer. The positions do not take effect until
NUL is received.
12 Color Printer
Code
ESC B. Once vertical tab stops are set, they remain in effect until
Cont. new ones are specified or all tab stops are set to the
power-on defaults by ESC R (Set All Tabs to Power-On
Defaults). If no vertical tab stops are set, the Vertical
Tab (VT) command behaves as a Line Feed (LF) command.
ESC B followed only by NUL cancels all vertical tab stops.
The form length must be set by the ESC C command (Set Page
Length in Lines) prior to setting vertical tab stops.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(66);CHR$(n1);
CHR$(n2);CHR$(n64);CHR$(0);
ESCb Select Band 4
Selects ribbon band 4 (black). The printer will continue to
print with band 4 until a command to change the ribbon band
is received.
Example:
ESCC Set Page Length in Lines
Format: ESC C;n;
Sets the page length in lines. The number of lines n is
converted to inches using the current line spacing. ESC C
must be followed by a value, n, that specifies the desired
length of page in lines. Maximum page length for this
printer is 127 lines. This command also sets the current
position of the paper as the top-of-form.
Note: Automatic perforation-skip (ESC N) and vertical
tabs (ESC B) may need to be reset after changing the
page length.
Example:
ESCCO Set Page Length in Inches
Format: ESC C;O;n;
Sets the page length in inches. This command requires a
value of n between 1 and 22. The power-on default is set
with DIP Switch 6. This command also sets the current
position of the paper as the top-of-form.
Note: Automatic perforation-skip (ESC N) and vertical
tabs (ESC B) may need to be reset after changing the
page length.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(67);CHR$(0); CHR$(n);
Color Printer 13
Printer
Code
ESCc
ESC D
ESCd
ESC E
Printer Function
Select Band 3
Selects ribbon band 3. The actual color printed will depend
on the ribbon being used. The printer will continue to print
with band 3 until a command to change the ribbon band is
received.
Example:
Set Horizontal Tabs
Format: ESC D;n1 ;n2; ... n28;NUL;
Sets the horizontal tab-stop positions represented by
n1 through n28. The power-on
default is a tab stop set at column 8 and every eighth column
thereafter. The printer recognizes up to 28 horizontal tab
stops. They must be in ascending numeric order and followed
by NUL. Tab stops can be set between 1 and the maximum
column count for the character spacing in effect. ESC D
immediately followed by NUL will clear all horizontal tabs.
ESC R (Set All Tabs to Power-On Defaults) may be used to set
horizontal tabs to the power-on default.
Note: Setting a tab at column 0 clears all tabs and
the following tabs will be considered data.
Example:
CHR$(n2);CHR$(n28);CHR$(O);
Variable Forward Space
Format: ESC d;n1 ;n2;
Places the next printed character
n1 ;n2/120 inch to the right of the last
dot of the current character. The position may be beyond the
right margin setting. If the position is beyond the physical
end of the line, the next character will be printed at the
left end of the printer.
n1 and n2 are binary numbers that
specify the number of 1 /120-inch increments the next printed
character is to be placed to the right. n1
represents values from 0 to 255, and n2
represents values from 0 to 255 times 256.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(100);CHR$(n1);CHR$(n2);
Emphasized Printing
Changes the printer to emphasized printing. Characters are
double struck with the smallest possible horizontal offset
between strikes.
Example:
14 Color Printer
Code
ESCe Variable Backspace
Format: ESC e;n1 ;n2;
Places the next printed character n1 ;n2/120 inch to
the left of the last dot of the current character. The
position may be beyond the left margin setting. If the
specified position is beyond the physical left end of the
printer. the next character will be printed at the left end
of the printer. n1 and n2 are binary numbers that specify
the number of 1/ 120-inch increments the next printed
character is to be placed to the left. n1 represents
values from 0 to 255. and n2 represents values
from 0 to 255 times 256.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(1 01 );CHR$(n1 );CHR$(n2);
ESC F Cancel Emphasized Printing
Ends emphasized printing started by ESC E.
Example:
ESCG Double-Strike Printing
Sets the printer to double-strike printing. Characters are
struck twice with no horizontal offset between strikes.
Example:
ESC H Cancel Double-Strike Printing
Ends double-strike printing started by ESC G.
Example:
ESC I Change Printing Quality
Format ESC I;n;
Selects the printing quality. When n is 1. data processing
quality is selected; when n is 2. text quality is selected;
when n is 3. letter quality is selected. Each printing quality
selection produces a different spacing of the dots that make up
a character. Each character box is: with data-processing
quality selected. 8 by 9 dots; with text quality selected. 24
by 9 dots; and with near-letter quality selected. 36 by 18 dots.
Example:
ESCJ Variable Line Space
Format: ESC J ;n;
Advances the paper in increments of n/144 inch. The value of
n must be between 1 and 255. Line spacing of 14/144 is
recommended for bit-image graphics using eight bits. ESC J
is canceled after the line space takes place. The value of n
is not stored.
Example:
Color Printer 15
Printer
Code
ESC K
Printer Function
1108 Bit-Image Graphics
Format: ESC K;n1 ;n2;v1 ;v2; ... v11OS;
Sets dot spacing to 84 by 84 dots per inch in 1:1 aspect
ratio, to 70 by 84 dots per inch in 5:6 aspect ratio (see
"ESC n (Set Aspect Ratio)"). All bit-image graphics is
printed from left to right. If the graphics data exceeds the
space remaining on the line, the data to be printed beyond
the end of the line is printed at the left margin on the next
line.
n1 and n2 are binary numbers that specify the number
of bit-image data bytes to be transferred. n1 represents
values from 0 to 255, and n2 represents values from 0 to 4
times 256. The total number of bit-image data bytes is
equal to n1 + n2 x 256 and cannot exceed 1108 (the total
number of dot positions in a 13.2 inch line).
Bit-image graphics is printed using eight of the nine
print-head wires (the bottom wire is not used).
v1 through v110S are bit-image data bytes, each of which
represents a set of 8 dots in a vertical line. The
horizontal position of these 8 dots is determined by the
position of the bit-image data byte within the v1 through
v110S series. v1 is printed at the starting
position followed in order from left to right by v2
through v110S' Each bit of a bit-image data byte
represents a vertical dot position at the horizontal position
represented by that bit-image data byte. The lowest value,
or least significant bit (Bit 0). represents the bottom dot
position, and the highest value, or most significant bit
(Bit 7), represents the top dot position.
16 Color Printer
Printer
Code
ESC K
Cont.
ESC L
ESCM
Printer Function
In the following table the left-hand column of (.)s
represents dot positions within a vertical line. The
right-hand column shows the corresponding bit number
within a bit-image data byte. (The bits are numbered
7 through 0, from left to right.)
Dot Position Bit
Number
Top

-
7

-
6

- 5

- 4

- 3

-
2

- 1
Bottom

- 0
For example: if v1 is binary 10000000 (decimal 128). only the
top dot prints in that horizontal position; if v1 is binary
00000001 (decimal 01). only the bottom dot prints; and if
v1 is binary 11111111 (decimal 255). all eight dots print.
Example:
CHR$(n2);CHR$(V1);CHR$(v2); .. , CHR$(v110S);
2216 Bit-Image Graphics (half-speed)
Format: ESC L;n1 ;n2;v1 ;v2; ... v2216;
"ESC n (Set Aspect Ratio)"). 2216 bit-image graphics
(half-speed) prints at one-half the speed of 2216 bit-image
graphics (ESC Y) for improved print quality and the ability
to print consecutive dot positions. n1, n2, v1,
and v2 through v2216 represent the same values as in 1108
bit-image graphics (ESC K). Refer to the description of ESC
K for a complete description of these values. The total
number of bit-image data bytes cannot exceed 2216 (the total
number of dot positions in a 13.2-inch line).
Example:
CHR$(n2);CHR$(V1);CHR$(V2); ... CHR$(v2216);
Automatic Line Justification
Format: ESC M;n;
Justifies the right margin. Automatic justification is
started when n is 1, and stopped when n is O. The printer
adjusts the spaces between words in the text so that the last
character of the words at the end of the lines all print in
the last position of the line. Thus both the left and right
margins appear as straight lines. This gives a block
appearance to the printed text. Automatic line justification
can be used with any of the character spacings.
Color Printer 17
Printer
Code
ESCM
Cont.
ESCm
ESCN
Printer Function
Notes:
1. Lines are not right justified if the text is less
than 75% of the specified line length. If a line fails
the greater than 75% rule, the remaining portion of the
text is tested.
2. If the justification results in a word wrap
condition, the remaining text is treated as separate
lines and follows the above rule.
3. Control codes in the datastream cause the text
before the control code to be printed based on the
justification rules. The remainder of the text is justified
between the current print position and the right margin.
4. If the last line of a paragraph, or any line of data,
is not to be justified, use the control code sequence,
backspace (8S) and carriage return (CR).
5. The Color Printer operates only on the least
significant bit of n. Therefore, any odd-numbered
ASCII decimal value gives the same result as n=1, and
any even-numbered ASCII decimal value gives the same
result as n=O.
Example:
Select Band 2
Selects ribbon band 2. The actual color printed depends on
the ribbon being used. The printer will continue to print
received by the printer.
Example:
Set Automatic Perforation-Skip
Format: ESC N;n;
Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of
each page. This causes the printer to automatically skip
over the perforation between pages of continuous forms. The
number of lines n, is converted to inches using the
line-spacing in effect. The value of n must be between 1 and
127. ESC N must be reset anytime the page length is changed
by ESC C (Set Page Length in Lines) or by ESC C 0 (Set Page
Length in Inches).
Example:
18 Color Printer
Code
ESC n Set Aspect Ratio
Format: ESC n;x;
Sets the printer to a 5:6 or 1 : 1 aspect ratio. When x is 1. the
aspect ratio is set to 1 : 1 ; when x is 0, the aspect ratio is
set to 5:6. With the 5:6 aspect ratio selected, graphics are
printed to match the shape that appears on the display. The
1:1 aspect ratio is recommended for bit-image graphics to
improve quality and simplify bit-position calculations. The
power-on default is the 5:6 aspect ratio.
Note: The Color Printer operates only on the least
result as n=O.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR${110);CHR${x);
ESCO Cancel Automatic Perforation-Skip
Cancels the automatic perforation-skip function.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR${79);
ESC P Proportional Spacing
Format: ESC P;n;
Starts proportional spacing when n is 1. Stops proportional
spacing when n is O. Proportional spacing gives each
different character a different amount of space on the line.
That is, narrow characters, such as i, are given a small
amount of space on the line relative to a broader character,
such as M. This is similar to the way people write
characters and gives a more balanced look to the text. Many
books are printed in proportional spacing, as is this one.
The distance of a forward space is 10 units; the distance of
a backspace is determined by the last printed character or
space, if the printing of the character or the space was the
last carriage movement.
Normal processing of all control codes continues during
proportional spacing.
result as n=O.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR${80);CHR${n);
Color Printer 19
Printer
Code
ESCQ2
ESC R
ESC S
ESCSI
ESC SO
Printer Function
Deselect Specific Printer
Format: ESC Q;2;
Sets only the Color Printer so it will not accept data from the
system unit. The printer must be initialized by the system
or selected using DC1 (Select Printer) to accept data.
Example:
Set All Tabs to Power-On Defaults
Sets all tabs, horizontal and vertical, to the power-on
defaults.
Example:
Subscript or Superscript Printing
Format: ESC S;n;
ESC S followed by 1 changes the printer to subscript
printing. ESC S followed by 0 changes the printer to
superscript printing. ESC S is canceled by ESC T.
Notes:
1. If line feed (LF) codes are issued while in
subscript or superscript printing, the line feed does
not change the subscript or superscript setting. For
example, if in superscript printing, the line feed
causes the paper to advance to the superscript
position of the next line.
2. The Color Printer operates only on the least
result as n=O.
Example:
Compressed Printing
Alternate command for SI.
Example:
Double-Width Printing by Line
Alternate command for SO.
Example:
20 Color Printer
Printer
Code
ESCT
ESC U
ESCW
Printer Function
Cancel Subscript or Superscript
Ends subscript or superscript printing started by ESC S.
Note: If ESC T is issued when not printing in
subscript or superscript, it is acknowledged and
ignored.
Example:
Unidirectional Printing
Format: ESC U;n;
When n is 1, sets the printer to print from left to right
only. ESC U 0 returns the printer to normal two-direction
printing. Unidirectional printing ensures a more accurate
printing start position for better print quality.
ASCII decimal value gives the same result as n=1. and
result as n=O.
Example:
Continuous Double-Width Printing
Format: ESC W;n;
ESC W 1 changes the printer to double-width printing. ESC W
o ends the double-width printing started by ESC W 1. ESC W 1
is not canceled by a line ending code and must be canceled by
ESCWO.
result as n=O.
Example:
Color Printer 21
Printer
Code
ESCX
ESCY
ESCy
Printer Function
Set Left and Right Margins
Format: ESC X;n1 ;n2;
The numbers, n1 and n2, are selected in relation to the left
side of the printer, with n1 representing the left margin and
n2 the right margin. The value of n1 or n2 is the column of
the page you wish to set as the left or right margin.
n2 must be greater than n1 by 1.27 cm (1/2 inch) or more,
and cannot be greater than 13.2 times the character-spacing
(in characters per inch) in effect. If n2 is greater than this
limit, the right margin will be set at the maximum allowable
length. Data is printed beginnihg in column n1. Column n2
is considered the last printable position of the line.
If a word to be printed exceeds the right margin, a
carriage-return and line-feed are inserted before the word, and
the word is printed on the next line. The margins are converted
to inches based on the current character-spacing setting.
The power-on default is set with DIP Switch 5.
Note: Both n1 and n2 must be included in
the command or the results will be unpredictable.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(88);CHR$(n1);CHR$(n2);
Format: ESC Y;n1 ;n2;v1 ;v2; ... v2216;
"ESC n (Set Aspect Ratio)") and prints at normal printing
speed. ESC Y graphics cannot print dots in consecutive
horizontal dot positions. If consecutive dot positions are
specified, the printer will not print the second dot.
n1, n2, v1, and v2, through v2216 represent
the same values as in 1108 Bit-Image Graphics (ESC K). Refer
to the description of ESC K for a complete description of these
values. The number of bit-image data bytes cannot exceed
2216 (the total number of dot positions in a 13.2-inch line).
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(89);CHR$(n1) ;CHR$(n2);
CHR$(V1);CHR$(v2); ... CHR$(V2216);
Select Band 1
Selects ribbon band 1. The actual color printed depends on
the ribbon being used. The printer will continue to print
received by the printer.
Example:
22 Color Printer
Printer
Code
ESCZ
ESCO
ESC 1
ESC2
ESC3
ESC4
Printer Function
Format: ESC Z;n, ;n2;v, ;v2; ... v4432;
Sets dot spacing to 336 by 84 dots per inch in 1 :1 aspect
"ESC n (Set Aspect Ration. 4432 bit-image graphics
prints at one-half the speed of 1108 bit-image graphics (ESC
K) for improved print quality. ESC Z graphics can print only
every third consecutive horizontal dot position. If
consecutive dot positions are specified, the printer will
ignore the second and third dots.
n2, v" v2, and v4432 represent the same
values as in 1108 bit-image graphics (ESC K). Refer to the
description of ESC K for a complete description of these
values. The number of bit-image data bytes cannot exceed
4432 (the total number of dot positions in a 13.2-inch line).
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(90);CHR$(n,);CHR$(n2);
CHR$(v,);CHR$(V2); ... CHR$(v4432);
1/8 Inch Line Spacing
Sets line spacing to 8 lines per inch.
Example:
6/72 Inch Line Spacing
Sets line spacing to 6/72 inch.
Example:
Start Text Line Spacing
ESC 2 is an execution command for ESC A (Set Text Line
Spacing). If no ESC A command has been given, line spacing
returns to 6 lines per inch.
Example:
Graphics Line Spacing
Format: ESC 3;n;
Sets line spacing to n/144 inch. Line spacing of 14/144 is
recommended for bit-image graphics using eight bits. The
value of n must be between 1 and 255.
Example:
Set Top of Page
Sets the current vertical position as the top-of-page.
Example:
Color Printer 23
Printer
Code
ESC5
ESC6
ESC7
ESC-
Automatic Line Feed
Format: ESC 5;n;
Printer Function
When n is 1, automatic line feeding starts; the printer will
line-feed each time a code that indicates the end of a line, such
as CR, is received. When n is 0, automatic line feeding stops.
result as n=O.
Example:
LPRI NT CHR$(27) ;CHR$(53) ;CHR$(n);
Select Character Set 2
Selects character set 2. (See "Character Set 2.")
Character Set 2 contains most characters and symbols used in
non-English languages. The power-on default for Character
Set is set with DIP Switch 1.
Note: Some programs use the control codes in Character
Set 1 that have ASCII decimal values above 128. These
control codes are not in Character Set 2. The use of
Character Set 2, therefore, may not give the desired
results with some programs.
Example:
Select Character Set 1
Selects character set 1. (See "Character Set 1".)
Character Set 1 contains characters and symbols commonly used
in the English language, along with some common, non-English,
characters and symbols. The power-on default for Character
Set is set with DI P Switch 1.
Example:
Continuous Underline
Format: ESC -;n;
When n is 1-all of the following data is underlined. ESC-
followed by 0 cancels underlining.
result as n=O.
Example:
24 Color Printer
Code
ESC: 12 Characters per Inch Printing
Sets character spacing to 12 characters per inch.
Example:
ESC< Move Carriage to Home Position
Returns the print head to the left side of the printer to
print the line following the command. No line feed occurs.
Example:
ESC 7 Set Initialize Signal Function
Format: ESC ?;n;
Defines what the printer does when an initialize signal is
received. The initialize signal is a hardware signal sent to
the printer by the system unit when called for by the program
being used. This signal is commonly called for when a
program is first loaded. When n is 1, the initialize function
is set On; when n is 0, the initialize function is set Off.
When the initialize function is On, the initialize signal
causes the printer to clear all data from the printer memory
and set all printer functions to the power-on defaults. Some
of the data may not have been printed and will be lost.
When the initialize function is Off, the initialize signal
causes the printer to insert CAN (Clear Data) into the data
in the printer memory. The CAN, when processed by the
printer, clears the printer memory of all data waiting to be
printed following the-last received line-ending code. All
control codes are cleared and the printer is set to the values
set by the DIP switches. This allows a printing job to be
completed before the printer is reset for the next application.
The power-on default is the initialize function set Off.
result as n=O.
Example:
Color Printer 25
Printer
Code
ESC@
ESC \
ESC]
ESC /\
Printer Function
Select Control-Value Data Type
Format: ESC @;n;
Allows the printer to accept certain parameters for the
ESC commands in either of two forms: binary or ASCII
character. When "n" is 1 (odd) ASCII is selected.
When "n" is 0 (even) Binary is selected.
Note: See "Programming Considerations at the
Beginning of this section for a detailed explanation
of this command.
Example:
Print All Characters
Format: ESC \;n , ;n2;
Allows the printing of all characters. This includes
characters that are normally recognized by the printer as
control codes. This code (ESC \) allows the printer to print
the special symbols assigned to these ASCII values. If no
character is assigned to a decimal value received by the
printer, a space character is printed. No control code
functions are performed when this command is in effect.
n, and n2 are binary numbers that specify the number
of characters to be printed. n, represents values from
o to 255, and n2 represents values from 0 to 255 times 256.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(92); CHR$(n,);CHR$(n2);
Reverse Line Feed
Causes the printer to move the paper down one line space as
defined by DIP Switch 2 or by printer control codes, ESC A
and ESC 2, ESC 0, ESC 1, or ESC 3.
Example:
Print Any Character
Allows the printer to print any character each time the
command is received. This includes characters
normally recognized by the printer as control codes. This
code (ESC /\) allows the printer to print the special
symbols assigned to these ASCII values. If no character is
assigned to a decimal value received by the printer, a space
character is printed.
Example:
26 Color Printer
Printer
Code
FF
HT
Printer Function
Form Feed
Advances the paper to the next top-of-form position. The
top-of-form position is set by the position of the paper when
power is switched On, or by ESC 4, ESC C, or the
control-panel buttons. The next top-of-form is determined by
the form length defined by DIP Switch 6, ESC C, or ESC CO.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(12);
Horizontal Tab
Moves the print head to the next horizontal tab stop. If the
next horizontal tab stop is beyond the right margin, the
character following HT is printed at the left margin. Tab
stops are set with ESC D. A tab stop every 8 columns is the
power-on default.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(9);
LF Line Feed
Advances the paper one linespace, as defined by DIP Switch 2
or by printer control codes; ESC A and ESC 2, ESC 0, ESC 1,
or ESC 3.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(10);
NUL Command End
Used with control commands as a command list terminator.
NUL is also used with other printer control codes to select
options.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(O);
81 Compressed Printing
Causes the printer to begin compressed printing. Character
spacing in compressed printing is 17.1 characters per inch.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(15);
80 Double-Width Printing by Line
Causes the printer to start double-width printing.
Double-width printing prints the characters twice as wide as
the current character spacing. This results in half as many
characters per inch. A Carriage Return, Line Feed or DC4
(End Double-Width Printing by Line) cancels the SO command.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(14);
Color Printer 27
Code
VT Vertical Tab
Advances the paper to the next vertical tab-stop position.
If the next vertical tabstop is beyond the bottom of the
page, the paper is placed at the first line of the next
page. If no vertical tab stops are set, the VT command is
treated as a line-feed (LF) command.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(11);
28 Color Printer
This is an alphabetic listing of the descriptions of the printer
control codes. You will find it helpful in locating the code you
need to perform a certain job, or to determine the ASCII decimal
value quickly, once you are familiar with the control codes.
Description
10 characters-per-inch print
12 characters-per-inch print
17.1 characters-per-inch print
Alarm
All-characters print
Aspect ratio set
Audible alarm
Auto justification On/Off
Auto line feed On/Off
Auto perforation skip Off
Auto perforation skip On
Auto ribbon-band shift
Auto ribbon shift
Backspace
Backspace n increments
Backspace variable
Band 1
Band 2
Band 3
Band 4
Bell
Black ribbon band
Buzzer
Code
DC2
ESC:
SI
BEL
ESC \
ESCn
BEL
ESCM
ESC 5
ESC 0
ESCN
ESC a
ESC a
BS
ESCe
ESCe
ESCy
ESCm
ESCc
ESCb
BEL
ESCb
BEL
ASCII
Value
18
58
15
7
92
110
7
77
53
79
78
97
97
8
101
101
121
109
99
98
7
98
7
Color Printer 29
Value
Cancel CAN 24
Cancel auto line feed ESC 5 53
Cancel data CAN 24
Cancel double-strike printing ESCH 72
Cancel double-width by line DC4 20
Cancel double-width printing (lines) ESCW 87
Cancel emphasized printing ESCF 70
Cancel perforation skip ESC 0 79
Cancel proportional spacing ESCP 80
Cancel subscript ESCT 84
Cancel superscript ESCT 84
Carriage return CR 13
Change color
(see ribbon band desired)
Change printing quality ESC I 73
Character quality set ESCI 73
Character set 1 select ESC 7 55
Character set 2 select ESC 6 54
Character spacing, 12 per inch ESC: 58
Character spacing, 10 per inch DC2 18
Character spacing, 17.1 per inch SI 15
Character under decimal 32, print ESC /\ 94
Characters under decimal 32, print ESC \ 92
Clear data CAN 24
Clear horizontal tabs ESCR 82
Clear tabs ESCR 82
Clear vertical tabs ESCR 82
Color band 1 ESCy 121
Color band 2 ESCm 109
Color band 3 ESCc 99
Color band 4 ESCb 98
30 Color Printer
Description
Command designator
Command end
Command prefix
Command start
Command terminator
Compressed On
Compressed print
Condensed print
Control-data value-type set
Data clear
Data-processing quality set
Data-value type set
Deselect printer
Deselect specific printer
Double-strike printing
Double-strike printing Off
Double-width-by-line Off
Double-width-by-line On
Double-width On/Off (lines)
Eject form
Eject paper
Emphasized printing
Emphasized printing Off
Escape
Feed line
Form feed
Form, set top of
Forward space variable
Graphics, 1108 bit-image
Graphics, 2216 bit-image, 1/2 speed
Graphics, 2216 bit-image, full speed
Code
ESC
NUL
ESC
ESC
NUL
SI
SI
SI
ESC@
CAN
ESC I
ESC@
DC3
ESCQ
ESCG
ESCH
DC4
SO
ESCW
FF
FF
ESCE
ESCF
ESC
LF
FF
ESC 4
ESCd
ESCK
ESCL
ESCY
ASCII
Value
27
o
27
27
o
15
15
15
64
24
73
64
19
81
71
72
20
14
87
12
12
69
70
27
10
12
52
100
75
76
89
Color Printer 31
Value
Graphics, 4432 bit-image, 1/2 speed ESCZ 90
Graphics, line-feed set ESC 3 51
Head, home
ESC <
60
Home head
ESC <
60
Horizontal tab HT 9
Horizontal tab stops set ESCD 68
Incremental backspace ESCe 101
Initialize function set ESC? 63
Justification On/Off ESCM 77
Length-of-page set in lines ESCC 67
Length-of-page set in inches ESC CO 670
Line-feed LF 10
Line-feed, auto On/Off ESC 5 53
Line-feed, reverse ESC] 93
Line-feed, set graphics ESC 3 51
Line-feed, store text ESC A 65
Line-feed, start text ESC 2 50
Line-feed, variable ESCJ 74
Margins set ESCX 88
Near-letter quality, set ESC I 73
Null NUL 0
Page eject FF 12
Page length, set in inches ESC CO 670
Page length, set in lines ESCC 67
Paper eject FF 12
Perforation skip Off ESC 0 79
Perforation skip set ESCN 78
Print all characters ESC \ 92
Print character under decimal 32 ESC A 94
32 Color Printer
Value
Print double-width one line SO 14
Print double-width multiple lines ESCW 87
Print emphasized ESCE 69
Print emphasized Off ESCF 70
Print quality set ESC I 73
Print 10 characters per inch DC2 18
Print 12 characters per inch ESC: 58
Print unidirectional ani Off ESCU 85
Printer deselect DC3 19
Printer deselect specific ESCQ 81
Printer select DCI 17
Proportional spacing OnlOff ESCP 80
Quality set ESC I 73
Return carriage CR 13
Reverse line feed ESC] 93
Ribbon band 1 ESCy 121
Ribbon band 2 ESCm 109
Ribbon band 3 ESCc 99
Ribbon band 4 ESCb 98
Ribbon band auto shift ESC a 97
Select color
(see ribbon band desired)
Select printer DC1 17
Set lI8-inch line feed ESC 0 48
Set aspect ratio ESCn 110
Set data-processing quality ESCI 73
Color Printer 33
Value
Set data-value type ESC@ 64
Set graphics line feed ESC 3 51
Set horizontal tab stops ESCD 68
Set initialize function ESC? 63
Set left margin ESC X 88
Set margins ESC X 88
Set near-letter quality ESC I 73
Set page length in lines ESCC 67
Set page length in inches ESC CO 670
Set perforation skip ESCN 78
Set right margin ESCX 88
Set text quality ESCI 73
Set top-of-form ESC 4 52
Set vertical tabs ESCB 66
Space forward variable ESCd 100
Specific printer deselect ESCQ 81
Start 6/72 inch line feed ESC 1 49
Start auto line feed ESC 5 53
Start double-strike print ESCG 71
Start double-width print by line SO 14
Start double-width print (lines) ESCW 87
Start emphasized print ESCE 69
Start graphics line feed ESC 3 51
Start perforation skip ESCN 78
Start proportional spacing ESCP 80
Start subscript ESC S 83
Start superscript ESCS 83
Start text line feed ESC2 50
Start underline ESC- 45
Stop auto line feed ESC 5 53
Stop double-strike print ESCH 72
34 Color Printer
Value
Stop double-width by line DC4 20
Stop double-width print (lines) ESCW 87
Stop emphasized print ESCF 70
Stop perforation skip ESC 0 79
Stop proportional spacing ESCP 80
Stop subscript ESCT 84
Stop superscript ESCT 84
Stop underline ESC- 45
Stops, horizontal tabs, set ESCD 68
Stops, vertical tabs, set ESCB 66
Store text line feed ESC A 65
Subscript Off ESCT 84
Subscript On ESC S 83
Superscript Off ESCT 84
Superscript On ESCS 83
Tab horizontal HT 9
Tab stops, horizontal, set ESCD 68
Tab stops, vertical, set ESCB 66
Tab vertical VT 11
Tabs clear ESCR 82
Tabs horizontal set ESCD 68
Tabs vertical set ESCB 66
Text line-feed store ESC A 65
Text line-feed start ESC 2 50
Text quality set ESC I 73
Top-of-form set ESC 4 52
Underline On/Off ESC- 45
Unidirectional printing On/Off ESCU 85
Variable backspace ESCe 101
Variable forward space ESCd 100
Variable line feed ESCJ 74
Vertical tabs set ESCB 66
Vertical tab VT 11
Color Printer 35
Printing in Color
The IBM Personal Computer Color Printer is capable of printing
in 8 colors when the process color ribbon is used. The 4 colors of
the ribbon are selected by: ESC b (Select Band 4) for black, ESC
c (Select Band 3) for cyan, ESC m (Select Band 2) for magenta,
and ESC y (Select Band 1) for yellow. You can print four
additional colors, orange, green, violet, and brown, by printing the
data twice. Print the data in one color and then print over the
data in a second color according to the table below. When
printing data twice to mix colors, always print the lighter color
first to avoid contaminating the ribbon.
Color Desired
Orange
Green
Violet
Brown
Ribbon Bands to Mix
Bands 1 (ESC y) and 2 (ESC m)
Bands 1 (ESC y) and 3 (ESC c)
Bands 2 (ESC m) and 3 (ESC c)
Bands 2 (ESC m) and 4 (ESC b)
To mix colors, data must be sent to the printer in the following
order: printer control code to select the first color, data to be
printed, carriage return with no line feed, printer control code to
select the second color, repeat the data to be printed. For
example, to print "IBM Personal Computer" in green, you must;
select band 1 (yellow) with ESC y, print "IBM Personal
Computer", return the carriage with no line feed with ASCII
decimal value 141 from "Character Set 1," select band 3 (cyan)
with ESC c, and print "IBM Personal Computer." To do this,
type the following:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(121);"IBM Personal
Computer";CHR$(141);CHR$(27);CHR$(99;)"IBM Personal
Computer"
Note: The above example is for use with "Character Set 1."
36 Color Printer
Color Printer Character Set 1
$1 ';L :. H
10 l' 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
IF I v+ H so is'! DOl OC21 DCa I
0';41 I : Ii C:"1 '; I '" ':1
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
.1 SP I! " # 1 $ % & '
; ;rl: ':
; ;1;1; ; ;1;1; ;
; :1;1; ;

:
1 :' 1 ;' I: 1 ';' 1 ';"
':1:1:
': H ; I '[ I ';'1']' I': '"
Color Printer 37
Color Printer Character Set 1 (Continued)
'; I ; I : I ~ I '; ; : ~ I ';; I ; ~ I :; I :; I
140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149
FF H SO H E 0+++C4!o1
' ~ I ~ I ;:'N I b I '" ;;: I ~ I ; I ~ I '; I
'; I ';' I ~ I ' ~ I ~ ~ I ~ ' I ~ I ~ " I ' ~ I
170 171 172 173 174 175' 176 177 178 179
r'-"-
::: I
-,
112
1/4
i

::: I:
::: I:
'--
H R' HI 6' ' Rn If ~ @ P I
go 6' I r I T I ';' I r I "'Ill '"8 '[R
I I ~
=+>< J -;-= o.
38 Color Printer
Color Printer Character Set 2
Color Printer 39
Color Printer Character Set 2 (Continued)
40 Color Printer
All Printable Characters
Color Printer 41
All Printable Characters (Continued)
130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139
I ~ ~ ijlA i G ~ I i j ~ _I
140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149
Ii i AlA E Z ~ 1 6 0 01
I; ~ ; I ~ ~ ~ ~ I ; ; ;1
160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169
I a I 61 u fi N ~ I Q l II
170 71 172 173 74 175 176 177 178 179 1 1
rr'--
;;;1'
-,
1/2
1/4
i

1 :
:::Ii
~ ......
42 Color Printer
DIP-Switch Settings
Many of the printer functions can be manually set with a
10-position dual in-line package (DIP) switch. Although these
same functions are programmable, the printer defaults to the
values set by the DIP switch.
The DIP switches must be set prior to switching the printer's
power to On. The printer logic reads the DIP-switch settings only
at power-on or printer initialization.
Note: Some programs use the control codes in Character Set
1 that have ASCII decimal values above 128. These control
codes are not in Character Set 2. The use of Character Set 2,
therefore, may not give the desired results with some
programs.
The charts on the following page describe the functions available
through the DIP-switch settings .
Switch lever
Location of Printer DIP Switch
Color Printer 43
Switch Setting Function
1 On Selects Character Set 2 (see "Character Set
2")(see "Note" below)
1 Off Selects Character Set 1 (see "Character Set 1 ")
2 On Sets line spacing to 8 lines per inch
2 Off Sets line spacing to 6 lines per inch
3 On Sets automatic 1-inch perforation skip
3 Off No automatic perforation skip
4 On Sets automatic line feed on carriage return
4 Off No automatic line feed on carriage return
5 On Sets printer to a 13.2-inch print line
5 Off Sets printer to an 8-inch print line.
6 On Selects 12-inch page length
6 Off Selects 11-inch page length
7 On Sets automatic ribbon-band shift (use with
all-black ribbon)
7 Off No automatic ribbon-band shift (use with color)
8 On Does not allow audible alarm to sound
8 Off Allows audible alarm to sound
DIP-Switch Settings -1 Through 8
Switch 9 Switch 10 Quality and Spacing Set
Off Off Data processing quality, 1 2 characters per
inch, (see "Note" below)
Off On Data processing quality, 10 characters per
inch
On Off Text quality, 10 characters per inch
On On Near letter quality, 10 characters per inch
DIP-Switch Settings - 9 and 10
Switches 9 and 10 select the printing quality and character
spacing. See "ESC I" in "Printer Control Codes" for a
description of the printing qualities.
Note: When switches 9 and 10 are Off, the printer prints with
a 1-inch page length with no perforation skip. Switches 3 and
6 are overridden. This is the self-test setup.
44 Color Printer
Interface
Specifications:
Data transfer rate: 1000 CPS (max.)
Synchronization: By externally supplied STROBE pulses.
Handshaking: -ACKNLG or +BUSY signals.
TTL-compatible.
Connector type: 57-30360 (AMPHENOL), or equivalent,
36-pin connector on printer end of cable.
Data Transfer Sequence:
BUSy----,
ACKNLG
DATA -----I
STROBE ---+--.
0.5 \ls (Minimum!
0.5 \ls (Minimum!
0.5 \ls (Minimum!
Parallel Interface Timing Diagram
Color Printer 45
46 Color Printer
Specific a tions
Size
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Power Cable
Length
Size
Signal Cable
Length .
Size
Voltage (Vac)
24.4 em (10 in.)
57.8 em (22.75 in.)
35.43 em (14 in.)
18.4 kg (40 Ib)
1.98 m (6.5 ft)
28AWG
1.89 m (6 ft)
3by18AWG
Frequency
(Hz)
Nominal Minimum Maximum :!: 3 Hz
100 90 118 50/60
120 102 139 60
200 180 236 50/60
220 190 264 50/60
Current Power
(Amps) (Watts)
Maximum Maximum
1.5 135
1.5 135
1.0 135
1.0 135
Color Printer 47
Print Method
Print Speed
Data Processing Quality
Text Quality
Near Letter Quality
Print Direction
Number of Pins in Head
Size of Pins in Head
Line Spacing
Matrices
Character Sets
Printing Sizes
Normal
Double Width
Compressed
Proportional
Subscript
Superscript
Media Handling
Paper Feed
Speed
Paper Width Range
Forms tractor feed
Friction feed
Paper Weight
Continuous forms
Single sheet
Wire matrix
200 cps
110to 150 cps
30 to 40 cps
Bidirectional with logic seeking
9 (4- and 5-column arrangement)
.356-mm (0.014-in.) wire diameters
4.23 mm (1/6 in.) or programmable
Data processing: 9 x 9
Text: 24 x 9
Near-letter: 36 x 18
Block graphic: 24 x 14
See "Color Printer Character Sets" 1
and 2.
Characters
per inch
10
5
17.1
13.3
12 (average)
10
10
Maximum
characters
per line
132
66
225.7
175.5
158.4 (average)
132
132
Forms tractor feed and friction feed
127 mm (5.0 in.) per second
76.2 to 406.4 mm (3 to 16 in.)
177.8 to 304.8 mm (7 to 12 in.)
(216 to 432 mm (8.5 to 17 in.)
adjustable length)
Single part: 15 to 20 Ib bond
Multipart: 12 to 15 Ib, 6 to 8 Ib carbon
15 to 20 Ib bond
Printer Specifications (Part 1 of 2)
48 Color Printer
Media Handling (continued)
Copies
Continuous forms
Single sheet
Paper Path
Continuous forms
Single sheet
Interfaces
Inked Ribbon
Type
Color
Process Ribbon
Primary Ribbon
Operating Humidity
Heat Output
Memory Allocation
Internal
Data
Reserved
Total
1 to 4 parts
1 part only
Front, bottom, and rear
Front
Standard parallel 8-bit
Data and Control lines
Cartridge (all ribbons)
COLOR
BAND
Yellow
1
Magenta
2
Cyan
3
Black
4
COLOR
BAND
Red
1
Green
2
Blue
3
Black
4
10 to 40C (SO to 104F)
10 to 80% non-condensing
140 BTU/hr (maximum)
2K bytes
6K bytes
8K bytes
16K bytes
Printer Specifications (Part 2 of 2)
Color Printer 49
Connector Pin Assignments
Printer connector-pin assignments and descriptions of signals are
provided in the following chart.
Connector Pin Assignment
Signal Pin Signal Description
No.
1 -STROBE -STROBE pulse to read data in. Pulse width
must be more than O. 511s at receiving
terminal. The signal level is normally
high (logical 1); data is read at the
low (logical 0) level.
2 DATA 1 These signals represent
3 DATA 2 information of the 1 st
4 DATA 3 to 8th bits of parallel
5 DATA 4 data respectively.
6 DATA 5
7 DATA 6
8 DATA 7
9 DATA 8
10 -ACKNLG Approx. 0.511s pulse. A low signal
indicates that the printer is ready to
accept other data.
11 +BUSY A high signal indicates that the printer
cannot receive data. The signal becomes
high in the following cases:
1 . During data entry
2. During printing operation
3. In offline state
4. During printer error status
12 +PE A high signal indicates that the printer is
out of paper.
13 +SLCT A high signal indicates that the remote
(ENABLE) control select feature has not deselected
the printer. The signal level goes high
upon going ready or receiving a DC 1
(SELECT). If currently ready but
deselected. it goes low upon
receiving a DC 3 (DESELECT).
14 -AUTO Not used
FEED
15 Not used
16 Ov Logic GND level.
Connector Pin Assignment (Part 1 of 2)
50 Color Printer
Connector Pin Assignment
Signal Pin Signal Description
No.
17 CHASSIS Printer chassis ground (GND). In the
GND printer, the chassis GND and the logic
GND are isolated from each other.
18 Not used
19-30 GND TWISTED-PAIR RETURN logic GND
level.
31 -INIT When the level of this signal becomes
low, the printer controller is reset to
its initial state, and the print buffer is
cleared. This signal is normally at high
level, and its pulse width must be more
than 50 ils at the receiving terminal.
32 -ERROR The level of this signal becomes low
when the printer is in:
1 . Paper Out state
2. Offline state
3. Error state
33 GND TWISTED-PAIR return logic GND level.
34 Not\Jsed
35 Not used
36 Not used
Connector Pin Assignment (Part 2 of 2)
Notes:
1. All interface conditions are based on TTL-level signals. The
rise and fall time of each signal must be less than 0.2
microseconds.
2. Data must not be transmitted until the -ACKNLG signal and
+BUSY signal go low.
Color Printer 51
52 Color Printer
1
4
2 DATAl 12
!
5 OATM
Ul SIP lK/B.2K
5

)
8
9
BOBO
6 BOll7

TO

-,
"I
1
,
,
,
,
1
611

7 \-----N.C.

'-, *"

II
Ri.! 2010h
6.2K -=-
VCC GNO
3 AlS314 2
410 IDS
1 6
8 40 40 9
13 50 UI 50 12
14 60 60 '5
17 70 70 16
18 BO 80 '9
CLK DC

NOTES:
1- All RESISTORS ARE 'loW. 5'10, CF.
Color Printer - I/O Board (Sheet 1 of 1)

SERIN ,:
BOBO 29

:g:: E
80B6 35
BOB7 31
RSElO 13
i'illTI 19
k.
BAORII 23
BADR09 24
IRa 16
TO CONTROllER PC8
12 I
" 12
0 0
9 N,C.
11 ClJt a B '.C
lS74A
J3
=
HIGltUTOESIGNATIDNS
P3,US,R7, CRI,
C2B.ol,Xl
MISSING DESIGNATIONS
C24,CIO23,C26
IITERflUPl8RMDDULF
3733-001-148
1.-
I
I
j
L!_
IC
"'
U.
CR1
114004
+5V
+5V
..
....
Ef.=I.1
..
..,,,
+5V
..
"
"

+5V
.U1
'-
B

C2
R7
.t-l
OlD" np126
-=-
..
2.2.1
..
.... TIP 121
Color Printer - Color Shift (Sheet 1 of 1)
MOTOR, DC-PERM. MAGIIIET
'-I
"BI
:
I I
"

+SV(ljO}
+SVUJOI
RIO
"
330
OS,
POWER
.12
" '"
004
FORIIS
",4
"
'"
+SVPJOj
OS,
TEST
'"
".
"
'"
2.21(
',,--::W,='::EL,,-O " _____ 7-"'4'fC:: ____ .. [
... ;'"-,"".80"'--_"""""""'.---0,,,,,.--'-'-1'3 0 10El':--' ---;,T'",ST,:-::::::-_-, S 6
Vl
d! SO 18 I 77
+SVUjOJ r:Q:TI-1l U2 40 9 READY l
: : I NC2S9 7 ROYClR 2 lS31
'.-;"0-"":::O':::'__ C :: NC
'.....,"",'.""'=0-1"+-I-j--<>---f---'-l2 B 10 f- Ne ,: B
';,...=8A"'."'RO='_rl+-l_>_--+----'-l' A DO IC

.r.,

12
UtO 11
13 HCDII
,
7
+SVIIJDj
OS2READY J'
e.
G,
7 ,
, Y
" 70 12
60 13
I
+lSVlllOl
-- R17
200
Ie -tl>
Ie -tl>
Ie -t7'O
SO 14
U7
.. "
Ne2S1
3. '
BADRII
,
e ,.
,
BAOR10 10
, ,. 3
BADR09 11

o. 4
,
-:- +SVtIJOJ
+SVUJDj
L-Ja

BADRI1 , e
BAORIO
BAOR09
10 ,
IIOTES:
11
1. UllESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED; AlL RESISTAICI VAlUES
ARE III OHMS, CAPACITAIICE VALUES AMII MICROfARADS.
2. UlllESS OTHEfIWISE SPfClFIED AU RESISTORS ARE Yo W.
51'"
3. ZERO OHM HEstSTORS IIOT SHOW8} ARE RI.. e .. R9.
4. A BAR 011 TOP OF A CHARACTER 011 SW1 MEAlS THAT THE
COIOITIOI EXIST WHEI THAT DIP SWITCH IS SET TO ''OM''
5. mpSWlTCHI
SWIO
Off Off
Off ON
.. Off
ON ON
FORMLEIGTH
10CPI
.10CPI
r 2 10 9 B 6 4 n 1M
+ 1m
LLI-, ...... ........ -::":::'--.J
TEST
FOIM
ff
Lf
Color Printer - Control Panel (Sheet 1 of 1)
+SVII)D}
UtA 3

2 HCOO
Ie

Heoo
Ie
SPARE GATES
Color Printer - Controller Board (Sheet 1 of 3)
[----------
I LINE SUPPRESSOR !=2:=
250V I]lfflirJ[l
I I 2711).00J.829I
s BRill "'-'----'--u...'-.L-"
G."/Vi, I
I I
__
I ,- I v-"""t"--'T-----,
L_J
POTTER COMPANY
MOD.#600C2
GRN/VEL
'-"'''''------jl
L ______ __________
+
CRll CRZi
ES13D2 UESl302
+ C5'
lleOOIl
C033
UESl3D2
SINGLE
POIITGND
CR32 CAlO
ESnOl UES1302
f+
5VIM'
f+
5VIOI
1,.+111111
+'.":''JI,iMI tli:ili:iliiliiloI
C51 +
47001Jf
'5V
05' +
100001lF
Z5V
...
,.
112W
." ,.
1I2W
+14VRTN
-14V
+4DV
+4OVRTN
i+
svIIJOJ
Index
A
All Printable Characters 41
ASCII values 29
B
block diagram 2
c
codes (printer control quick reference) 29
color control mechanism 5
Color Printer Character Set 1 37
Color Printer Character Set 2 39
color printing 36
connector type 45
control codes (quick reference) 29
controller subsystem 3
D
data direction register 6
data register 6
Index-l
data transfer rate 45
description 1
DIP-switch settings 43
E
Expanded Multiplexed mode 7
H
handshaking 45
I
1/ 0 subsystem 3
interface 45
L
logic level 45
M
major subsystems 3
microprocessor 6
Index-Z
MPU (microprocessor unit) 6
p
paper feed 5
parallel interface 45
print head 4
print subsystem 4
print wires 4
Printable Characters (All) 41
printer control code quick reference 29
printing in color 36
process color ribbon 36
Q
quick reference (printer control codes) 29
R
ribbon feed 5
s
switch settings (DIP switches) 43
synchronization 45
Index-3
Index-4
--- -
----
- ----
- ---
- - ---
- -- ---
-----
--_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
mM PC Compact
Printer
6361476
ii
Contents
Description ................................... 1
Print Mode Combinations .................... 11
Compact Printer Character Set ................ 12
Interface ..................................... 15
Specifications ................................. 17
Logic Diagram ................................ 21
iii
iv
Description
The IBM PC Compact Printer is a stand-alone, tabletop unit that
plugs into a standard, 120-Vac wall outlet. Using a print head
with eight print elements and thermal-sensitive paper, the printer
can print characters from the standard ASCII, 96-character,
uppercase and lowercase character set, and prints the characters
in a 5-by-8 dot matrix at 50 characters per second (cps). The
printer prints in one direction (left-to-right) and has four print
modes. In the standard mode, the printer prints 80 characters per
line; in the compressed mode, 136 characters per line; in the
double-width mode, 40 characters per line, and in the compressed
double-width mode, 66 characters per line. The IBM PC
Compact Printer can also underline characters, has an extended
character set for international languages, and can accept special
characters in all-points-addressable mode to do graphics or draw
special characters under program control.
The printer has a 1.89 meter (6-foot), 16-lead, printer cable.
This cable connects to the 25-pin D-shell connector of an
Asynchronous Communications Adapter (primary or alternate)
through the use of the IBM PC Compact Printer Connector
Adapter.
Compact Printer 1
The following is a block diagram of the IBM PC Compact Printer.
+VH--+
VOLTAGE
REG. AND ..
SAFETY
..
P17
LOGIC
..
THERMAL
HEAD
A .....
~ ~
P3037 K ADR/DATA BUS )
DATA LATCH HEAD DRIVER
....--- V
SN74LS273 ULN2B03A
=)
PULSE
'\
LAMP/MOTOR
MOTOR
Pl013
DRIVER
ULN2013
P16
/
MPU
~ T O L E D
HD68D1
V5
P46
...
FROM LF KEY
....
P47
...
FROM HOME
....
POSITION SWITCH
~
~ ~
~
---"J...
'\
ADDRESS
. ~
LATCH
~
SN74LS373 ,/
CJ HAL
2KB
---.J"" 4.91 MHz
STATICRAM
HM6116
P4044 HIGH ORDER ADDRESS
'\
/
P23
...
-"}
....
DRIVER/
TO IBM PC
RECEIVER
P15
____ CTS
p-
I I
+12V -12V
Compact Printer Block Diagram
2 Compact Printer
The following pages list, in alphabetic order, the printer control
codes with a description of each. Some knowledge of BASIC
programming is necessary to insert printer control codes in your
program. An example of each code in BASIC is given at the end
of each description. The "Format" information is given where
more information is needed for programming considerations.
Compact Printer 3
Printer
Code
CAN
CR
Printer Function
Cancel
Clears the printer memory of all data waiting to be printed
following the last-received line-ending code. Resets the
printer to the power-on defaults.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(24);
Carriage Return
Causes the printer to print the data that follows CR
beginning at the left margin. No line-feed operation takes
place unless ESC 5;1 (Automatic Line-Feed) has been sent.
Notes:
1. IBM Personal Computer BASIC (and many other
programs) automatically sends LF (line feed) with CR.
2. If no data precedes the CR, or if all
preceding data is spaces, the printer does not
carriage return. If automatic line feed is On,
the paper is advanced one line space.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(13);
DC2 Device Control 2 (Compressed Off)
Ends printing in the Compressed mode.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(18);
DC4 Device Control 4 (Double Width Off)
Ends printing in the Double Width mode.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(20);
ESC Escape
Sets the printer to accept the next data sent as a printer
command. (See the following list.)
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);
4 Compact Printer
Printer
Code
ESCB
ESCC
ESCD
Printer Function
Escape B (Set Vertical Tabs)
Format: ESC B;n, ;n2; ... n64;NUL;
Sets the vertical tab-stop positions. The power-on default
is no vertical tab stops set. n, through n64
represent tab-stop positions by line number. The topmost
line of the page is line O. Tab-stop positions must be
received in ascending numeric order and cannot exceed the set
page length. Up to 64 positions are recognized by the
Compact Printer. The positions do not take effect until NUL
is received. Once vertical tab stops are set. they remain in
effect until new ones are specified or all tab stops are set
to the power-on defaults by ESC R (Clear Tabs). (If the
printer is reset or switched Off. set tab stops are cleared.)
If no vertical tab stops are set. the Vertical Tab (VT)
command behaves as a Line Feed (LF) command. ESC B
followed only by NUL clears all vertical tab stops. The
form length must be set by the ESC C command (Set Lines
per Page) prior to setting vertical tab stops.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR$(66);CHR$(n,);
Escape C (Set Lines per Page)
Format: ESC C;n;
Sets the page length in number of lines (n). The ESC C
command must be followed by a value to specify the length of
page desired. (Maximum form length for the printer is 127
lines.) The printer default is 66 lines per page when
switched On or reset.
Example:
Escape D (Set Horizontal Tab Stops)
Format: ESC D;n, ;n2; ... n28;NUL;
Sets the horizontal tab-stop positions represented by n,
through n28' The power-on default is a tab stop set at
column 8 and every eighth column thereafter. The printer
recognizes up to 28 horizontal tab stops. They must be in
ascending numeric order and followed by NUL. Tab stops can
be set between 1 and 80 in standard print mode; between 1 and
136 in compressed print mode. ESC D immediately followed by
NUL will clear all horizontal tabs. ESC R (Clear Tabs) may be
used to set horizontal tabs to the power-on default.
Example:
Compact Printer 5
Printer
Code
ESCK
Printer Function
Escape K (560 Bit-Image Graphics Mode)
Format: ESC K;nl ;n2;vl ;v2; ... v560;
Changes the printer to the Bit-Image Graphics mode. Dot
density is 70 by 70 dots per inch. If the graphics data
exceeds the space remaining on the line, the printer ignores
the excess data. 7 bytes of bit-image data equal 1
standard-width character.
n, and n2 are binary numbers that specify the number
of bit-image data bytes to be transferred. n, represents
values from 0 to 255, and n2 represents values from 0 to
2 times 256. The total number of bit-image data bytes is
equal to n, + (n2 x 256) and cannot exceed 560.
All eight of the print-head thermal dots are used to print
bit-image graphics. vl through v560 are bit-image data
bytes, each of which represents a set of 8 printable dots in
a vertical line. The horizontal position of these 8 dots is
determined by the position of the bit-image data byte within
the vl through v560 series. v, is printed at the starting
position followed in order from left to right by
v2 through v560'
Each bit of a bit-image data byte represents a vertical dot
position at the horizontal position represented by that
bit-image data byte. The lowest value, or least significant
bit (bit 0), represents the bottom dot position, and the
highest value, or most significant bit (bit 7), represents
the top dot position.
In the following table the left-hand column of (.)'s
represents dot positions within a vertical line. The
right-hand column shows the corresponding bit number within
a bit-image data byte. (The bits are numbered 7 through 0,
from left to rig ht.)
Dot Position Bit Number
Top

- 7

- 6

- 5

- 4

- 3

- 2

- 1
Bottom

- 0
For example, if v, is binary 10000000 (decimal 128). only
the top dot prints in that horizontal position; if v, is
binary 00000001 (decimal 01)' only the bottom dot prints; and
if v, is binary 11111111 (decimal 255), all eight dots print.
Example:
CHR$(n2);CHR$(v,);CHR$(v2); ... CHR$(v560);
6 Compact Printer
Printer
Code
ESC N
ESC 0
ESC R
ESCW
ESCO
ESC 1
ESC2
Printer Function
Escape N (Set Skip Perforation)
Format: ESC N;n;
Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of
each page. This causes the printer to automatically skip
over the perforation between pages of continuous forms. The
number of lines n, is converted to inches using the
line-spacing in effect. The value of n must be between 1 and
127. ESC N must be reset anytime the page length (ESC C) is
changed. The default for skip perforation is 25.4 mm (1 in.).
Example:
Escape 0 (Cancel Skip Perforation)
Cancels the Skip Perforation function.
Example:
Escape R (Clear Tabs)
Resets all tab stops, both horizontal and vertical, to the
power-on defaults.
Example:
Escape W (Continuous Double-Width Print)
Format: ESC W;n;
Changes the printer to double-width printing when ESC W is
followed by 1. This mode is not canceled by a line feed or
DC4. It is canceled when ESC W is followed by 0 (zero).
Example:
Escape Zero (1/9-lnch line Feed)
Changes the line feed to 2.82 mm (1/9 in.). This produces 9
lines per inch.
Example:
Escape One (1/9-lnch line Feed)
Changes the line feed to 2.82 mm (1/9 in.). This produces 9
lines per inch. ESC 1 functions the same as ESC O.
Example:
Escape Two (1/6-lnch line Feed)
Resets line spacing to 4.23 mm (1/6 in.). This
produces 6 lines per inch and is the power-on default for
vertical line spacing.
Example:
Compact Printer 7
Code
ESC5 Automatic Line Feed
Format: ESC 5;n;
When n is 1, automatic line feeding starts; the printer will
line-feed each time a code that indicates the end of a line,
such as CR, is received. When n is 0, automatic line feeding
stops.
Example:
ESC- Escape Minus (Underline)
Format: ESC -;n;
ESC - followed by 1, causes all of the following data
to be printed with an underline. ESC - followed by 0
(zero), cancels the underlining.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(27);CHR(45);CHR$(n);
ESC < Escape Less Than (Home Head)
Returns the print head to the left margin to print the line
following ESC <. This occurs for one line only.
Example:
FF Form Feed
Advances the paper to the top of the next page. The location
of the paper, when the printer Power switch is set to On,
is the top-of-page position. The next top-of-page
is determined by the form length as defined by the power-on
default, 279 mm (11 in.), or as set by ESC C. Always
separate multiple Form Feed commands with spaces.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(12);
HT Horizontal Tab
Causes the carriage to move to the next horizontal tab stop.
Tab stops are set with ESC D. A horizontal tab stop every 8
columns is the power-on default.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(9);
LF Line Feed
Advances the paper one line space. Line spacing is 4.23 mm
(1/6 in.) unless reset by ESC 0, ESC 1, or ESC 2.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(10);
NUL Null
Used with control commands as a command list terminator.
NUL is also used with some printer control codes to
select options.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(O);
8 Compact Printer
Printer
Code
SI
Printer Function
Shift In (Compressed On)
Causes the printer to begin compressed printing. This
command is canceled by DC2 (Compressed Off).
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(15);
SO Shift Out (Double Width)
Causes the printer to start double-width printing.
Double-width printing prints the characters twice as wide as
the current character spacing. This results in half as many
characters per inch. A Carriage Return, Line Feed or DC4
(Double Width Off) cancels the SO command.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(14);
VT Vertical Tab
Advances the paper to the next vertical tab-stop position. If
no vertical tab stops are set, the VT command is treated as a
line-feed (LF) command. Vertical tab stops are set with
ESC B.
Example:
LPRINT CHR$(11);
Compact Printer 9
Description
Cancel
Carriage return
Compressed character off
Double width off
Escape
Vertical tab set
Lines per page set
Horizontal tab stops set
Graphics mode (bit-image)
Skip perforation
Cancel skip perforation
Tabs clear
Double width (multiple lines)
Line feed (2.82 mm (1/9 in.
Line feed (automatic)
Underline
Home head
Form feed
Tab (horizontal)
Line feed
Null
Compressed character
Double width
Tab (vertical)
10 Compact Printer
Code
DC2
CR
DC2
DC4
ESC
ESCB
ESCC
ESCD
ESCK
ESCN
ESCO
ESCR
ESCW
ESCO
ESC 1
ESC 2
ESC 5
ESC -
ESC <
FF
HT
LF
NUL
SI
SO
VT
ASCII
Value
24
13
18
20
27
66
67
68
75
78
79
82
87
48
49
50
53
45
60
12
9
10
o
15
14
11
Print Mode Combinations
The following figure shows the print-mode combinations possible
with the IBM PC Compact Printer. Modes shown with XXX in
the same column can be combined.
A print mode can be changed at any time within a line; however,
the double-width mode affects the entire line.
Allowable Mode Combinations
Standard XXX
Compressed XXX XXX XXX
Double-Width XXX XXX XXX
Underline XXX XXX XXX XXX
Allowable Mode Combinations
Compact Printer 11
Compact Printer Character Set
['
[ :: [ : !'! [
10':1 [':'[1 [C:N[ ! [.:[

40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
[ ( [ ) [ H ' 1-[ . [ / [0 [ 1 [
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
1213H
s
16171
a
191: I; I

80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89
[P[Q[R[S[T[U[V[W[X[V[

[ ; [': [ ';' [ '; [ I';' [ 'j" [ [ ';' [: I
110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119
[n[o[p[q[r[s[t[u[v[wl
I': I': ["[ [": ["j I': Z I
12 Compact Printer
Compact Printer Character Set (continued)
Compact Printer 13
14 Compact Printer
Interface
Specifications:
Data transfer rate: 1200 bps (maximum)
Synchronization: Internal clocking
Handshaking: CTS (Clear to Send) Pacing
EIA levels
Serial Interface Timing Diagram
Character Period
ReceivedU
Data -
One
Start
Bit
High (Ready)
ROY
I
Two
Stop
Bits

Low (Busy)
Compact Printer Serial Interface Timing Diagram
Compact Printer 15
16 Compact Printer
Specific a tions
Size
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Power Cable
Length
Size
Signal Cable
Length
Size
Voltage (Vac)
88.9 mm (3.5 in)
312.4 mm (12.3 in)
221 mm (8.7 in)
3.0 kg (6.6 Ib)
1.98 m (6.5 tt)
28AWG
1.89 m (6 tt)
3by18AWG
Frequency
(Hz)
Nominal I Minimum I Maximum :!: 3 Hz
120 I 108 I 132 60
Current Power
(Amps) (Watts)
Maximum Maximum
0.25 36
Compact Printer 17
Print Method
Print Speed
Print Direction
Print Elements in Head
Line Spacing
Matrix
Character Set
Graphics
Printing Sizes
Normal
Double Width
Compressed
Media Handling
Paper Feed
Paper Width
Copies
Paper Path
Interface
Print Color
Operating Humidity
Heat Output
Printer Specifications
18 Compact Printer
Thermal, non-impact, dot-matrix
50 cps
Left to right only
8
4.23 mm (1/6 in.) or 2.82 mm (1/9 in.)
5x8
See "Compact Printer Character Set"
tables.
APA (All Points Addressable)
Characters
per inch
10
5
17.5
8.75
Friction feed
216 mm (8-1/2 in.)
Single sheet only
Top
Maximum
characters
per line
80
40
136
66
Serial data and control lines
Black
5 to 40C (41 to 104F)
10 to 80 % non-condensing
54.6 BTU/hr (maximum)
BM PC I
C
P
C
ompact
rinter
able
AoB A01
,@]@]@]@]@]@]
@]@]@]@]@]@]
End of Printer Cable
BOB B01
Pin Description
-
Not Used
A04 Transmitted Data
A08 Receive Data
A03 Request To Send
A07 Clear To Send
A06 Data Set Ready
B02 Signal Ground
B03 Received Line Signal Detector
-
~
+ Transmit Current Loop Data
B05
Not Used
-
B06 - Transmit Current Loop Data
-
B07 Not Used
I---
B08 IBM PC
Not Used
I---
Compact
A05 Not Used
Printer
Connector Not Used
Adapter
Not Used
Not Used
+ Receive Current Loop Data
Not Used
A02 .... Data Terminal Ready
Not Used
AOI
Ring Indicator
Not Used Not Used
BOl Not Used
Not Used Receive Current Loop Return
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 ~
10
11
Asynchronou
12
Communicati
13
Adapter
14
(RS232C)
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Note: An IBM PC Compact Printer Connector (as shown in the diagram above) is
required to connect the Compact Printer to an IBM Asynchronous
Communications Adapter (primary or alternate).
s
on
Compact Printer 19
20 Compact Printer
'.
.. ,
__________
IIJ " Icc 2 ITld. ,.6 Z3 IItfJj
+ t: I.. ,*. '45 24

C26 It2 &13-1 RI Ii2t:::11lU
(tllODD 5.. l8DOp 31 rJ, :'mfi 1'__ t2_"'-Jit.JO
sa 1.-t...Vu r Of I'll 19 (LAMPI 11
51 o---JR3 2 :. PlD 13 {MAl 2'
CT-S -, 1&2 '11 t4 r-J 3,
::"d1 ."",:1- .. "'l"5 ,,2 1 !Mil
o----@fI*C2'
l1
f'13 If IItiI 5 1-"'-;____
r--;S81
>----t-----",-,
........
,
'"
__
25v RIO
., 471'0 15K
&18
,,..,
.
1'31 38 I 17 0 .-----:--___:=:__
1'32 35 2' 14 12 8Or''------'''1'-'''---','''-I, Wi E----:-,', ,'IC.
P33 34 3 13. 1:5373 A3 01 10 1 I ,,0 'c-----::" ,
P34 33 4 U D2 11 2' 2' r.:-------:-
PlS 32 5 4- AS 03 13 : ,3 13 f'154----+-'Co-+H
.,-" '38 31 6 7 14'4 3 lS213
pn 30 7 8 0515 5 5 4- 13
"'t I 816 fa SCI 38 (U) 11 eK OBp.!, D6 1& 6 15 7 L...L---2. 12
ZIII 04 III P4(I 29 (l8l i=:, Ib 23 07 17 1" 7 Cit
: zr:::R29"-'-+-+-'--' '"tT :: : :%1 : t
"'" :::... d :: "," (Alll , r ! h
''',,;' no ":1:' .. __ IC_'_, __ ,_. +-'_' _'_',-:----,----,
-le3 7 1. 'ItES 1&2 11M
L--:-:---c--''I-_ V'lClI 1 ICI 12
hlt 3t3 IffUnr-....!t18 5 6 13
ION' Jo1K lUI 11010 11 11010
0+0+'-' __ ----, UK .
, r1>::. d. ,r. .. . Il.
20:,.1 4<
ZIJI L_ J
Il

... 112' 23
820 R21 "01
3.," 4.7K
2.CII
II
1.51
..
h!: ..
I

lelf
CIO
""
....
.. ,
'"

10 0.47
)b'
"
'n t----
02' ....l.2tl13
;fZD5
1.21
Compact Printer (Sheet 1 of 1)
1.2016
KElUJtIT
....
'RUlnll
n
Notes:
22 Compact Printer
--- -
----
: ~ ~ :
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
mM 5-1/4" Diskette
Drive
6361486
ii
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Specifications .................................. 3
Logic Diagrams ................................. 5
iii
iv
Description
The system unit has space and power for one or two 5-1/4 inch
diskette drives. A drive can be single-sided or double-sided with
40 tracks for each side. The diskette drive is a self-contained unit
consisting of a spindle drive system, a read positioning system,
and a read/write/erase system.
The diskette drive uses modified frequency modulation (MFM) to
read and write digital data, with a track-to-track access time of 6
milliseconds.
The IBM 5 -1/ 4" Diskette Drive uses a standard 133.4 millimeter
(5.25 inch) diskette. Single-sided, double-density, soft-sectored
diskettes are used for single-sided drives. Double-sided drives use
double-sided, double-density, soft-sectored diskettes.
This recording medium is a flexible magnetic disk enclosed in a
protective jacket. The protected disk, free to rotate within the
jacket, is continuously cleaned by the soft fabric lining of the
jacket during normal operation. Read/write/erase head access is
made through an opening in the jacket. Openings for the drive
hub and diskette index hole are also provided. The following
figure is a simplified drawing of the diskette used with the IBM
5-1/ 4" Diskette Drive.
3.56 mm 6.30 0.25 mm
1
1
.140 in.) -l f-f'O.
25
0.01 in.)
--, Sealed
Protective
-.- Jacket

E:
=! 133.4 mm
I
J
I
I
---0.
@
I
eel
1
15
.
25

-.L.
'---133.4 mm-1
r-15.25 in.)
ill
I
Recording Medium
Oxide Coated
Mylar'" Disk
Spindle
Access
Hole
Head
Aperture
Diskette Drive 1
To insert a diskette, the operator raises the latch at the front of
the diskette drive and inserts the diskette in the slot. Plastic
guides in the slot ensure the diskette is in the correct position.
Closing the latch centers the diskette and clamps it to the drive
hub. After 250 milliseconds, the servo-controlled dc motor starts
and drives the hub at a constant speed of 300 rpm. The head
positioning system, which consists of a 4-phase stepper-motor and
band assembly with its associated electronics, moves the magnetic
head so it comes in contact with the desired track of the diskette.
The stepper-motor and band assembly uses one-step rotation to
cause a one-track linear movement of the magnetic head. No
operator intervention is required during normal operation. During
a write operation, a 0.33-millimeter (0.013-inch) data track is
recorded, then tunnel-erased to 0.30 millimeter (0.012 inch). If
the diskette is write-protected, a Write Protect sensor disables the
drive's circuitry, and an appropriate signal is sent to the interface.
Data is read from the diskette by the data-recovery circuitry,
which consists of a low-level read amplifier, differentiator,
zero-crossing detector, and digitizing circuits. All data decoding
is done by the adapter card.
The diskette drive also has the following sensor systems:
1. The Track 00 switch, which senses when the head/carriage
assembly is at track 00.
2. The Index sensor, which consists of an LED light source and
phototransistor. This sensor is positioned to generate a digital
signal when an index hole is detected.
3. The Write Protect sensor disables the diskette drive's
electronic circuits whenever a write-protect tab is applied to
the diskette.
For interface information and programming considerations, refer
to "IBM 5-1/4" Diskette Drive Adapter" in this manual.
2 Diskette Drive
Specifications
Size (maximum)
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Power
Media
Tracks per Inch
Number of Tracks
Temperature
(exclusive of media)
Operating
Non-operating
Relative humidity
Operating
Non-operating
Seek Time
Head Settling Time
Error Rate
Recoverable
Irrecoverable
Seek Errors
Hfll1ti Life
Media Life
Disk Speed
Long term
Instantaneous
Start Time
Transfer Rate
Recording Mode
86 mm (3.4 in.)
149 mm (5.9 in.)
203 mm (8.0 in.)
2.04 kg (4.5 Ib)
+12 Vdc 5 %, (900 mA average)
+5 Vdc 5 %, (600 mA average)
Industry-compatible 5-1/4 inch diskette
48
40
10 to 44C (50 to 112F)
-40 to 60C (-40 to 140F)
20 to 80% (non-condensing)
6 ms track-to-track
15 ms (last track addressed)
1 per 10
9
bits read
1 per 10
12
bits read
1 per 10
6
seeks
20,000 hours (normal use)
3.0 X 10
6
passes per track
300 rpm 1.5%
300 rpm 3.0%
500 ms (maximum)
250K bps
MFM
Mechanical and Electrical Specifications
Diskette Drive 3
4 Diskette Drive
1f
",
15U
LS14
+12V
N WRT ;--1-+---'1
W ~ T E nl--4.-------"j, ,,>0'---------'
DATA
+12V
'T'
J2
+12V 1
.5V
4
GND 3
5-1/4 Inch Diskette Drive - Type 1 (Sheet 1 of 3)
.5V
R16
1K
TP3 ~
.
0
R18
(J'Q
1K
TP10
_.
~
n
~
TP4
_.
~
(J'Q
'""l
~
=
rI1
C3J
."
.,
+ 1:26.1:30.
1:38.1:39
4)
35V
GNU
INDEX!
SECTOR
PHOTO
ASSY
5V
N WRITE GATE 24
NUSO 10
NDS1 12
NOS214
NDS3 6
N MOTOR ON 16 1-----'.0-+-'1
J1
DIRECTION 18 1---'-'=1"----'1
N STEP 20 r----''''+'-''j
1"
462
NOTES; UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. All RESISTORS ARE IN OHMS. 1/4 W.
ti%
2. All CAPS ARE IN ;JFD.
3. ALL DIODES ARE IN 4446.
4. All TRANSISTORS NPNARE 2n4124&
PNP ARE 2N4125.
PART OF
P10
i\-r\-
+12V 1 10
GNO
, ,
'---
,-
-TACH
, ,
+TACH 5 1

P21
PART OF
Jl

"
10K
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIEO
I.RESISTORSAREINOHMS.+5'o.1/4W.
2. 1"0 RESISTORS ARE 1/8W.
3. CAPACITORS ARE INIif. +20" 35V.
"
,.
11
3.3/.1H
L R7
r
470
J" 47
C4
1 .
" "
R3 IKPOT. IK.I%
lKl,
,--------f- ,------

,J
_______
C3
R6
.1
150K
'"
,.
i>-=--
C6
.022
" 4700
L,
I
I
I
I
I
I
--.J
8

'8
1K

I::!' 2N4124

'"
1.1!2W
'"
2.2K
"0
1K
'"
2.2K
PART OF
Jl
['Ir+/"P
ARTOFP2
,
,
1
, +MOTORPOWER
2 MOTOR RETURN
r-
r-
4 NMOTORON
PART OF
P20

30 DATA/t

...
30IJ
__
L-______
+12V
CRI7
____________________ ____
ACTIVITY
LEO
L-==== ______________________________ .. ____ 2
r __ ____ __,.--'''j:....;;;;;;..-<>-''''i
____

PULtUP/+L
B 2
POR/-L C 2
PTO/-L T 2

;= __ -= ______ ...!MO"""T.R"'ET'-______
NOTE:THISOIAGRAMVAUD.FORORIVES
WITH IBM SERIAL NUMBERS THAT BEGINS
WITH"[f'
MOTOR
5-1/4 Inch Diskette Drive -- Type 2 (Sheet 1 of 2)
WRITEENABLE/-L
PTO/-l
1 B PUlLUP/+L
POA/-L

"'v

DATA+l
'"
I.OK
ISHEET!I-uATcDNRTuT
I5H!Tll-uATEIIIITDATA
SPHCl >----l-_--+ __ ---'

IN4150

n

'" .8 In
W
"'
"'
"" 0'
"'
0"
"'
NO.DFPINS (;liD +5V
" ,
+REAOIlATA lSHUTlI

1----->1iii..a

1----->'"

________________________________
..
..
II"EETII + DATA
,-
----------70

"" rt----21S AR Ll,U.1W J?-J
'""'". '"'. --- - ,
'" UB: A 3 I )
tR2 J)15IPlU[;181
; ,. US) 8 6 CRI lSI
+ERASESS2ISHEEUI
-MRTKm >-_---l.'_lj,
ISHEETl1 +"'''''''''"-'-------1

-GATEDWRTDATA (SlIfElU
_ WRT
>------"
>----c:c----:c,--f-+-t====4==t=====:::;::==;ijt
, ___________________________ !!.''''''''''EXISHEET21
7'"
_______________ -1-- .. ,,'''-X (SIIEET21
----v-
..

--- -
----
- - ---
- ---
- - ---
- - - ---
----- --_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
mM Slimline Diskette
Drive
6361484
Ii
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Specifications .................................. 5
Logic Diagrams ................................. 7
iii
iv
Description
The IBM Portable Personal Computer has space and power for
one or two 5-1/4 inch slimline diskette drives. Each drive can
use single-sided or double-sided diskettes with 40 tracks on each
side. The drive is completely self contained, and consists of a
spindle drive system, a head positioning system, and a
read/ write / erase system.
The recording medium is a flexible magnetic disk enclosed in a
protective jacket. The protected disk, free to rotate within the
jacket, is continuously cleaned by the soft fabric lining of the
jacket during normal operation. Read/write/erase head access is
made through an opening in the jacket. Openings for the drive
hub and diskette index hole are also provided. The following
figure is a simplified drawing of the diskette used with the IBM
5-1/4 Diskette Drive.
I
)
I
I
3.56 mm I 6.30 0.25 mm
(0.140 in.) I] (0.25 0.01 in.)
I Sealed
--1- Protective
-, - Jacket

e .:
Oxide Coated
Mylar
T
Disk
---(0.
@
I
ill
In C; 133.4 mm
: 1(5.25 __ ...1...1.-

--.L
133.4 mm ------...J

I
Recording Medium
Index Hole
Head
Aperture
Slimline Diskette Drive 1
To load a diskette, the operator twists the latch at the front of the
diskette drive counter-clockwise and inserts the diskette into the
slot. Plastic guides in the slot ensure the diskette is in the correct
position. Twisting the latch clockwise centers the diskette and
clamps it to the drive hub. After 250 milliseconds, the
servo-controlled dc motor starts and drives the hub at a constant
speed of 300 rpm.
The diskette drive uses modified frequency modulation (MFM) to
read and write digital data with a track to track access time of 6
milliseconds. It reaches operating speed in 0.5 seconds and drives
the hub at a constant 300 rpm.
The head positioning system, which consists of a 4-phase
stepper-motor and band assembly with its associated electronics,
moves the magnetic head so it comes in contact with the desired
track of the diskette. The stepper-motor and band assembly uses
one-step rotation to cause a one-track linear movement of the
magnetic head. No operator intervention is required during
normal operation. During a write operation, a 0.33 millimeter
(0.013-inch) data track is recorded, then tunnel-erased to 0.30
millimeter (0.012 inch). If the diskette is write-protected, a
write-protect sensor disables the drives circuitry, and an
appropriate signal is sent to the interface.
Data is read from the diskette by the data-recovery circuitry,
which consists of a low-level read amplifier, differentiator,
zero-crossing detector, and digitizing circuits. All data decoding
is done by the adapter card.
2 Slimline Diskette Drive
The diskette drive also has the following sensor systems:
The track 00 switch, which senses when the head/carriage
assembly is at track 00.
The index sensor, which consists of a light emitting diode
(LED) light source and phototransistor. This sensor is
positioned so that a digital signal is generated when the index
hole is detected.
The write-protect sensor disables the diskette-drive write
circuits whenever the diskette has a write-protect tab.
For interface information and programming considerations, refer
to "IBM 5-1/4" Diskette Drive Adapter" in this manual.
4 SUmline Diskette Drive
Specifications
Size (maximum)
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Power
Media
Tracks per Inch
Number of Tracks
Temperature
Operating
Non-operating
Relative humidity
Operating
Non-operating
Seek Time
Head Settling Time
Error Rate
Recoverable
Irrecoverable
Seek Errors
Head Life
Media Life
Disk speed
Long Term
Instantaneous
Start Time
Transfer Rate
Recording Mode
42 mm (1.6 in.)
146 mm (5.S in.)
203 mm (S.O in.)
1.1 kg (2.4 Ib)
+12 Vdc 5%
+5 Vdc 5%
Industry-compatible 5-1 /4 inch diskette
4S
40
10 to 50C (41 to 122F)
-40 to 60C (-40 to 140F)
20 to SO% (non-condensing)
6 ms track-to-track
21 ms (from last step pulse)
1 per 10
9
bits read
1 per 10
12
bits read
1 per 10
6
seeks
20,000 hours (normal use)
3.0 X 10
6
passes per track
300 rpm 1.5%
300 rpm 3.0 %
500 ms (maximum)
250K bits/sec
MFM
Slimline Diskette Drive S
Logic Diagrams
The following pages contain the logic diagrams for the IBM
Slimline Diskette Drive.
SIim1ine Diskette Drive 7
JHO)
JH2)
JH.)
JI8 )
J,.,II
w.
J120
PR
ONTRK
DRIVE SELECT U
DRIVE SELECT 1
DRIVE SELECT 2
DRIVl SElECT 3
DIRECTION
PHD
OUT
STEP
DSO
0
DS!
0
DS2
0
.S.
0
DS MOmfOII
JH8) (Sheet 1 of 4)
. 0" kette Orlve
Slimhne IS
. k tte Drive
8 Slimline DIs e
M
-
-
-
-
-
M
.51
0
J5'll

r-______________________ -O-___

.U
4.7K
+12
1
U13 S
RN2
J385
+51 CRl 2
LS'.

1
R
rP

:J
10K

2 75452
-=
CRa

J3'A5 01
1 15452
CRO

1 J3'81
U13 82 0

DO
5 LSSS
2 75452

un
CRIO
r- >ClK O 0 U13 0
LS7.
.
T 10 LSaa
ij8
15B 5
J3A6
DB

TP93
I
OUT

U12 4
'HO
r--------------- r- L-- 7'02H
Cl +5V
I 100.. t
UF 180K

.ONTHI(
13 LS88
., 01
.. 01
Ul PN2222A
lSI.3 5
10
TrIO2
-=0 T i -=
I
I
L _______________
J w.
e U11 B

IIfti
Jl8
U18
LSI.

3

2 7438N
J'2S
a
fiiRIOli
J,a
J3ll
+5V
057
lK
.oJ
4 RNI
Jel2 T 11 150
.r-.
0"
b
.70
0
i
o13
C13
10K
.1
CI. '--...!
C3'
J3BI
-= ,N2222.
.100V
Ul
fL-
O .. .001
-=
0.3 .022 ,J
eS2117
IDOl( 200V
-D'
1M
S jL
2

l7
Ul

Cl:*,
LSI' 0
.01 H55
1 1501(
400V 51 OK
I I
: 012) I
J3,u
I
-=
L __ _ __.J

Slimline Diskette Drive (Sheet 2 of 4)
SUmline Diskette Drive 9
OS
"'AD'
R/W COIL
ERASE COIL
PU
J'22
00 (J1-1 >
Rll
B7
B6
BS
,
,
\
W'

WRITE DATA
SISNAL RETURN
l
CR'
IN4150
R3
3.31(
CRS
IN4150
+SV
7 RN'
8 150K
+5V
ue
,,-

+SV
+5V
1 RH2
4 4.71(
RID
lOll'.
UID
LS221
UID
LS221
CLR
11

OS
0"
R"
4221( L1
1% 220,uH
C,
180Pf
R'S
4221 l2
1% 220MH
12 RNI
3 150K
Jl.32>--'S!!JID""'-"-"S"'''''''C''-T ____ ____________ t_ ________ _
1'II ... ------L4
J2') +12V ItV_:_::_0._0._/3-1irc_,_s __________
1
4
.
7
I7
18V 18V
L5 ALOG DIGITAL
.00 7 aOD: +SVA
JC24 JC28 1c29 1e30 1c31 1e33 1c34 +5V
I1:v r:v l' I' I' I' l'
J2.2) +12VRETURN
J2._> +5V
J2.3) +5V RETURN
Slim line Diskette Drive (Sheet 3 of 4)
M
+12VI C32
C3
4.7
TP18
1000PI
{l
100V TP1I

.1
.'6
2.21K
lB
1%
817
C5
2.21K
1%
.1
+ 12VI
M
16V +5V +5V
TP2 TP3
C7
.1
J-1

81B Rl.
1'.5K 1.15K
1% 1%
11
Cl0
.0033
10%
820
51.1K
13
1%
5.6p.H
8B3 50K
823
831
330K
.35
220K
.37
220K
10K
+12VI
.37
220K
832
06 43.2K
PN29071
11 READ DATA
Jl30
+12VI

V81
3.3V
+5V

,,0
PN22221
867
po--".'
C36
.01
50V
Slimline Diskette Drive (Sheet 4 of 4)
Notes:
----
----
- - ---
---
- - ---
- -- ---
-----
---,-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
Double Sided
Diskette Drive
for
IBM Personal Computer AT and IBM
Personal Computer XT
6139788
March 17,1986
Notes:
iv March 17, 1986
Contents
Description ..................................... 1
Interfaces ...................................... 2
Input Signals ................................. 3
Output Signals ............................... 5
Specifications ................................... 6
Logic Diagrams .................................. 7
March 17, 1986
v
Notes:
vi March 17, 1986
Description
The IBM Personal Computer Double Sided Diskette Drive is a
direct-access device that can store 320/360Kb of data on a
dual-sided 5-1/4 inch diskette. All data format and access
control is in the system. The following figure describes the type
of diskette required by this drive.
Characteristic Requirement
Certification Double sided
48 TPI
40 tracks per surface
Soft Sector
Recording density 5,876 bits per inch
Media coercivity 300 to 350 Oersteds
Jacket Standard 5-1/4 inch
Diskette Requirements
The signals for operating the diskette drive are generated through
the IBM Personal Computer AT Fixed Disk and Diskette Drive
Adapter or the IBM Personal Computer Diskette Adapter.
March 17,1986 Double Sided Diskette Drive 1
Interfaces
The diskette drive has two types of interface: control and dc
power. The following figure shows the signals and pin
assignments for the control interface.
Signal Name 1/0 Signal Pin Ground Pin
Reserved
-
2 1
Reserved
-
4
3
-Drive Select
3
I 6
5
-Index 0 8 7
-Drive select 0 I 10
9
-Drive select 1 I 12 11
-Drive select 2 I 14 13
-Motor On I 16 15
-Direction Select I 18 17
-Step I 20 19
-Write Data I 22 21
-Write Gate I 24 23
-Track 00 0 26 25
-Write Protect 0 28 27
-Read Data 0 30 29
-Side 1 Select I 32 31
Reserved
-
34 33
Control Interface (P1/J1)
Following are the signals and pin assignments for the dc power
interface.
Signal Name Pin
+ 12 Vdc 1
+ 12 Vdc Return 2
+ 5 Vdc Return
3
+ 5 Vdc 4
Power Interface (P2/J2)
All signals operate between + 5 V dc and ground with the
following definitions:
Inactive Level: +2.5 to +5.25 Vdc
Active Level: 0.0 to +0.4 Vdc
All outputs from the drive can sink 40 rnA at the active level. The
system provides pull-up registers.
2 Double Sided Diskette Drive March 17, 1986
Input Signals
All input signals are active when low.
Drive Select 0 through 3
These '-drive select' signals enable or disable all other drive
interface signals, except' -motor on'. When' -drive select' is at
the active level, the drive is enabled. When it is at the inactive
level, all controlled inputs are ignored, and all drive outputs are
disabled. The enabled or disabled condition of the drive is
established within 500 nanoseconds after a change to the select
input, excluding head-load time and settling times.
-Motor On
An active level of this signal starts the drive motor. There must
be a 750 millisecond delay after' -motor on' becomes active
before any read or write operation starts.
- Direction Select
This signal determines the direction the read/write head moves
when the step signal is pulsed. An active level indicates away
from the center of the diskette (out); an inactive level indicates
toward the center of the diskette (in). Any change in the
, -direction select' signal must be made at least 1 microsecond
before the leading edge of the step pulse, and at least 1
microsecond after the trailing edge of the step pulse.
-Step
This signal causes the read/write heads to move in the direction
determined by the '-direction select' signal. Motion is started
each time the signal changes from an active to inactive level (at
the trailing edge of the pulse).
March 17, 1986 Double Sided Diskette Drive 3
-Write Data
Each time this signal changes from the inactive to active level, the
current through the read/write heads reverses, and writes a data
bit. This signal is enabled when '-write gate' is at the active
level. A 250-nanosecond active pulse of this signal causes a bit to
be written on the diskette. These pulses may occur with either a
4,6, or 8-microsecond spacing (O.50/0).
-Write Gate
An active level of this input enables the write current circuits, and
the' -write data' input controls the writing of information.
Transitions of '-write gate' occur 4 to 8 microseconds before the
first significant data bit, and 4 to 8 microseconds after the last
significant data bit. After deactivating '-write gate' , deactivation
of '-drive select' and '-motor on' , and changing '-side 1 select'
must be delayed 1 millisecond, because the erase head is active
for this period.
-Side 1 Select
This signal determines which side of the two-sided diskette will be
used for reading or writing. An inactive level of this signal selects
the read/write head on the 0 side of the diskette; an active level
selects the 1 side. A 100-microsecond delay must be allowed
after switching from one head to the other before starting to read
or write.
Output Signals
-Index
When the drive senses the index hole in the diskette, it generates a
1- to 8-microsecond active pulse on this line.
-Track 00
An active level of this signal means that the read/write heads are
at Track 00 (the outermost track).
-Write Protect
An active level of this signal means that a diskette without a
write-protect notch is in the drive. The drive will not write when
a protected diskette is loaded.
-Read Data
A 250-nanosecond active pulse is provided on this line for each
bit detected on the diskette. These pulses may occur with either
4, 6, or 8-microsecond spacing.
Drive-In-Use Indicator
The Drive-In-Use indicator lights when the drive is selected.
March 17, 1986 Double Sided Diskette Drive 5
Specifications
The following figures show the physical, and performance
specifications for this drive.
Power Dissipation
Operating Limits
Ambient Temperature
Relative Humidity
Maximum Wet Bulb
Non-Operating Limits
Ambient Temperature
Humidity
Mechanical Dimensions
Width
Height
Depth
Weight
11 W (Typical)
10 to 50 Degrees C (41 to 114.8 Degress F)
8 to 80%
26.7 Degrees C (84 Degrees F)
-40 to 60 Degrees C (-40 to 140 Degrees F)
No Condensation
146.0 mm (5.8 in.)
41.0 mm (1.6 in.)
203.2 mm (8.0 in.)
1.6 kg (3.52 pounds)
Capacity Unformatted
Capacity Formatted
9 Sectors Per Track
8 Sectors Per Track
Recording density
Track Density
Cylinders
Tracks
Encoding Method
Rotational Speed
Transfer Rate
Latency (Average)
Access Time:
Average
Track to Track
Settling Time
Head Load Time
Motor Start Time
500 Kb
368.6Kb
320.0Kb
5,876 bits per inch
48 TPl(tracks per inch)
40
80
MFM
300 RPM 1.5%
250K bits per second
100 ms
81 ms
6 ms
15 ms
o ms
500 ms
Performance Specifications
IWiI RM3 RNl 1 452
. .11.1 011 15 R'AVCC GNOA 1 Cllf .. 'I pF Rl"K T 13 4F 11 ,;"0.
I DIS[ VI _ 14 R8 82 12 'm IE 5 V1 J3-B2 <liB
I, J4.M 13 M8419Z lSD4Ar.\ l!..8641K9+5V'2K1K '3 12 I
E t I", ,M.A3 08 01' WA C 3 L!!!..!J I 101 4F" B Jr,..::--'::"';';31 k .... :.-=.'_s L...(':j...W!. J3B3 I tile
I 013 012 12 WI iF 0" ell * 470pF +5V 3 ll!-{ m 1""'-' JUI I
m I RNS' .......... 11 5 ?Iill!lu R14 '9 2 3B 01 - LS04 IE
Li : >l!:!!--. yr5V +5V""isif" 10 WG E lei" J !430T 4 . -----:--------- 06 J3A3
IlEl 1 2 PR WSRS F S 1'-1000F 430 -[ LSI/4 4 +1ZV STEPPING
I I .M B4 RI 5 5F r fi Il\ 9 II OI!!!!J82O/1H RI5 4p- o",',"'Fl ); 5 LS02 -cr lRL'r"'HL.!.... MOTOR
Ef-"J4..B3 I 43(%W} 452 6 11'J07 I 3 'Q+5Y 07 lKTc3
7
.!2
. ?'5V 3.3'"
HEAOONE lJI32 I I 6.2K1514 13 ..
SELUf 'J3-AI 3-r=..TI. +5V 3 I iJ3.6K 0
2
"ll::2l 4 0 '027K 7
3
: 5
WRITE J]-AI RN, D
R5
,*C5 .A.) 11 9 LSiD 213 '2
1./
07
VLS04 .-17
IK
l,5/.lF UI
'::::: lSI. .... ____ .... __ ++-___ +wc.:..__ 11 ,:'"
SENSOR Z.L. J3. ." VLS14 I L lOOK IS 14 lOOK 1 & I;jIO I' +5V 12 38
... F +5Y.... A,!' R!!!l"
J3'A'2m 1 - 4!K 13 LSOC
3
I 820 ,*C17 2 60 4 5'2 - 4.1K Yllr..=..,' J3-A'0
TRACK J :,A,13 L-- ;h IDOl' I LSI23 I!.J J -VLS05 I -HO I r,,,,3.,,,BI.,----c,:
.13--813 UK 111 I [7'01 tb
SENSOR J3-812 RN2 - +5V I 9 LSO III *C16 I 5
l m 14 9 RN!, I I V LS04 J;0.OIt/F I 4;: 6 J'26
1 :' , ": 4.1K IJ.b,..ID J].A6
TOA ON J,,6 I 5 4.J }It 1 .5r.=..,1 +5Y I ;v lS05 MOTOA ON
LOAD J1-4 fMJ' 4 l' LRi? 68 3 JU:
I 5 UOZ 4.7K 5 6 '38 ,.'NOEX
o JIIO jlSg !D.4 6 6' Jg
E I JH2 ll:S:SEEJ. I.7U05 VlS05 1 VU04 I ..nyC? J3A4 I I
T 2 Jl14 ISO I +5V? I 'UK J I 1, F 0\ J].B4 '
3 JHi S fr9.RN6 tb 13 14 6 16 11 21:52 HEAD LOA
+5V !: "ll 5 5 3 6 WSIRS EG INOEX 02 01 4 i SOLENOID
: ".,. 1M 4r"=",,," .. " . Z 2f LSOCl3 'P'R 10 READY
MI14::'pIN ROY
S

EOATA III ,,\!-SIJO 9 3 1 L-...! WD 4E vcc18: R17; A21 5&pF 10 8 :
DIRECTION ' JI-18 '.!t> 12 f L-. DRI2STEP GND 9 &SK 1514 33K 7 & 5 JHD AEAOOATA
.STEP ' JUO -VUOi 1:
0
OOIJ,lf 2 &C 13 10 IiC +I2V? J].A5 1
LS02 I +5";;: 11 g-;Z;, IZ
+I2Y L"'='"--'Rfl11 +5Y I 3 ;},:
YREl ... ::..,====---., 4.1K +5Y _ II 3D 12 AZII :i- C20
5V U + T It/F +5V .rc?l. :RROAUM:D 2 T8 5 4.1K Q4 lSOO 820 J; 100pF rh RETURN
C24 O.OIt/F J, i-flt/
F
'*" 3 3A 2SC29DI
..
WAITE
i
PAOTECT
22+
, IN USE lED
,
TRACKOO
Double Sided Diskette Drive (Sheet 1 of 2)
00 I
I
I
I +12V
I
I
I
I
I STOP
J
n
oLEO
0' OZ
/1
.'"
VR,
3D"
11
R'
2.2K
1Z

4

A3
lOOK
'6
!':K !

e3
ID.056Jl
A2
33"
T
,1
J ,01
51"
1Z
1
R,O ,

,---L-
llon 11 2,2tL 41n
R8 &7
Ie,

9
e. e11
le2
R15 e.
M51720P e6
A1
"0.00"0.4(.
F' ;-

14m
'I,.,"
41" M51721L 0
6
I

, A6 , I
T e,
18K R5 I
6
A13 I
O.15J.l
1Z"
$

330n I

4
I
13
I
141 13
lC4
""
I
f;
A11 A18
2
A'4
un un
330n
,

r
O
.
041
',
330.0.
1
$
f n r:
3
I
A1Z I
JlOn
I
I
I
I
Jf2
1

;r.0!
I
03
I
Notes:
Notes:
--- -
----
- ----
- ---
- - ---
- - - ---
-----
---y-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
High Capacity Diskette
Drive
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Interfaces ..................................... 2
Input Signals ............................... 3
Output Signals ............................. 5
Drive-in-Use Indicator ....................... 5
Specifications .................................. 6
Logic Diagrams ................................. 7
iii
Notes:
iv
Description
The IBM Personal Computer AT High Capacity Diskette Drive is
a direct-access device that can store 1.2Mb of data on a
of high-density diskette required by this drive. Diskettes, which
meet these specifications may not be used in either a 160/180Kb
or a 320/360Kb diskette drive.
Certification Double Sided
96TPI
80 Tracks/Surface
Soft Sector
Recording Density 9,646 Bits Per Inch
Media Coercivity 600 to 650 Oersteds
Jacket Standard 5-1/4 Inch
Adapter.
Note: This drive also can read diskettes formatted for a
320/360Kb dual-sided drive or a 160/180Kb single-sided
drive.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT High Capacity Diskette Drive 1
Interfaces
power. The following show the signals and pin assignments for
the control interface.
Signal Name I/O Signal Pin Ground Pin
- Reduced Write I 2 1
Reserved - 4 3
- Drive Select 3 I 6 5
-Index 0 8 7
-Drive Select 2 I 14 13
-Motor On I 16 15
- Direction Select I 18 17
-Step I 20 19
-Write Data I 22 21
-Write Gate I 24 23
- Track 00 0 26 25
- Write Protect 0 28 27
-Read Data 0 30 29
- Diskette Change 0 34 33
The signals and pin assignments for the dc power interface are as
follows:
Signal Name Pin
+12 Vdc 1
+12 Vdc Return 2
+5 Vdc Return 3
+5 Vdc 4
DC Power Interface (P2jJ2)
August 31, 1984
2 Personal Computer AT High Capacity Diskette Drive
Input Signals
Following are descriptions of the input signals.
-Reduced Write
The inactive state of this signal indicates that high-density media
is present requiring normal write currents, and the active state
indicates low-density media is present, requiring a reduced write
current.
-Drive Select 0, 1, 2, and 3
The Drive Select signals enable or disable all other drive interface
signals, except '-motor on'. When '-drive select' is at the active
level, the drive is enabled. When it is at the inactive level, all
controlled inputs are ignored, and all drive outputs are disabled.
The enabled or disabled condition of the drive is established
within 500 nanoseconds after a change to the '-drive select'
input, excluding head-load time and settling time.
-Motor On
The spindle motor runs when this input is active. The drive
requires a 750 millisecond delay after '-motor on' becomes active
before a read or write operation.
- Direction Select
If this input is at a inactive level the '-step' input signal moves
the heads away from the drive spindle. An active level causes the
opposite. This input is stable for a minimum of 1 microsecond
before and after the trailing edge of the step pulse.
August 31, 1984
-Step
A 1-microsecond active pulse on this input causes the read/write
heads to move one track. The state of '-Direction Select' at the
trailing edge of the Step pulse determines the direction of motion.
-Write Data
A ISO-nanosecond pulse on this input causes a bit to be written
on the disk if '-Write Gate' is active. These pulses may occur
with either a 2,3,3.3,4,5, or 6.67-microsecond spacing 0.5%.
When Write Gate is inactive, pulses do not appear on this input.
-Write Gate
the '-Write Data' input controls the writing of information.
Transitions of this line occur 4 to 8 microseconds before the first
significant data bit, and 4 to 8 microseconds after the last
significant data bit. Making this input inactive removes all current
from the read/write heads and allows the read circuits to operate
within 590 microseconds. All motor-start, head-settle, and
head-load times are complied with before the line becomes active.
-Side 1 Select
selects the 1 side. A lOO-microsecond delay must be allowed after
switching from one head to the other before starting to read or
write.
August 31, 1984
Output Signals
Following are descriptions of the output signals.
-Index
When a diskette's index hole aligns with the hole in the diskette
jacket, a 1- to 8-millisecond active pulse is generated on this line.
-Track 00
This signal is active when the upper head is on Track 00.
-Write Protect
-Read Data
Each bit detected provides a ISO-nanosecond active pulse on this
line. These pulses may occur with either a 2, 3, 3.33, 4, 5, or
6.67-microsecond spacing O.S%.
- Diskette Change
This output is active unless a diskette is present and a step pulse is
received when the drive is selected.
Drive-in-U se Indicator
The Drive-in-Use indicator lights when the drive is selected.
August 31, 1984
Specifications
The following figures show the physical and performance
Power Dissipation
Operating Limits
Non-operating Limits
Weight
Capacity Formatted
15 Sectors Per Track
Recording Density
Track Density
Cylinders
Tracks
Encoding Method
Rotational Speed
Transfer Rate
Latency (Average)
Access Time
Average
Track to Track
Settling Time
Head Load Time
Motor Start Time
11 W (TYP)
Ambient Temperature 5 to 46 Degrees
Celsius (41 to 114.8 Degrees Fahrenheit)
Relative Humidity 20 to 80 %
Maximum Wet Bulb 29 Degrees Celsius (84
Degrees Fahrenheit)
Ambient Temperature -40 to 60 Degrees
Celsius (-40 to 140 Degrees Fahrenheit)
Humidity no Condensation
Width 146.0 mm (5.8 in)
Height 41.0 mm (1.6 in)
Depth 203.2 mm (8 in)
1.6 kg
1604Kb
1.2Mb
9646 Bits Per Inch
96 TPI
80
160
MFM
360 RPM
500K Bits/Second
83 ms
91 ms
3 ms
18 ms
50 ms
750 ms
August 31, 1984
Logic Diagrams
MUDD
RI"
ERASE
HUOI
RI"
ERAU
TRACIUIO
SENSOR
WIlITI
'"OlECT
$ENSOR
MEDIA
SENSOR
INDEX
SENSOR
TPIi T,I'
'"
lOW DENSITY",' J",I.2'-__
DIRECTION",' ____ -'--_____ --'d
WRITE GATE",:
MOTORDN IJI16
STEP:Jl.20
+l2'A" : J22
+5' :J2.4
+5VRET 'J23
FRAME
aROUND
High Capacity Diskette Drive (Sheet 1 of 2)
August 31, 1984
II
" DO
+5, +5'
EI----..... -:f-H-++---+----I
FF
STEPPING
J3.J2 MOTOR
,
,
,
,
J3A51
?
IDRIVI.
+-_----'J"'3 ... "'6 MOTOR
High Capacity Diskette Drive (Sheet 2 of 2)
August 31, 1984
--.- -
--_.-
- - - ..... -
- ---
..:. .E:: .:r=:=..
--_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
Double Sided Diskette
Drive
Contents
De'Scription .................................... 1
Interfaces ..................................... 2
Input Signals ............................... 3
Output Signals ............................. 5
Drive-in-Use Indicator ....................... 5
Specifications .................................. 6
Logic Diagrams ................................. 7
iii
Notes:
iv
Description
The IBM Personal Computer AT Double Sided Diskette Drive is
a direct-access device that can store 320/360Kb of data on a
of diskette required by this drive.
Certification Double-Sided
48 TPI
40 Tracks/Surface
Soft Sector
Recording Density 5876 Bits Per Inch
Media Coercivity 300 to 350 Oersteds
Jacket Standard 5-1/4 Inch
Adapter.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT Double Sided Diskette Drive 1
Interfaces
power. The following figure shows the signals and pin
assignments for the control interface.
Reserved - 2 1
Reserved - 4 3
-Index 0 8 7
-Drive Select 0 I 10
.
9
-Motor On I 16 15
-Step I 20 19
-Write Data I 22 21
-Write Gate I 24 23
-Track 00 0 26 25
-Read Data 0 30 29
Reserved - 34 33
Following are the signals and pin assignments for the dc power
interface.
Signal Name Pin
+12 Vdc 1
+12 Vdc Return 2
+5 Vdc Return 3
+5Vdc 4
Power Interface (P2/J2)
August 31, 1984
2 Personal Computer AT Double Sided Diskette Drive
Input Signals
interface signals, except '-motor on'. When '-drive select' is at
the active level, the drive is enabled. When it is at the inactive
level, all controlled inputs are ignored, and all drive outputs are
disabled. The enabled or disabled condition of the drive is
established within 500 nanoseconds after a change to the select
input, excluding head-load time and settling times.
-Motor On
An active level of this signal starts the drive motor. There must
be a 750 millisecond delay after '-motor on' becomes active
before any read or write operation starts.
-Direction Select
This signal determines the direction the read/write head moves
when the step signal is pulsed. An active level indicates away
from the center of the diskette (out); an inactive level indicates
toward the center of the diskette (in). Any change in the
, -direction select' signal must be made at least 1 microsecond
before the leading edge of the step pulse, and at least 1
microsecond after the trailing edge of the step pulse.
-Step
determined by the '-direction select' signal. Motion is started
August 31, 1984
each time the signal changes from an active to inactive level (at
the trailing edge of the pulse).
-Write Data
Each time this signal changes from the inactive to active level, the
current through the read/write heads reverses, and writes a data
bit. This signal is enabled when '-write gate' is at the active
level. A 250-nanosecond active pulse of this signal causes a bit to
be written on the diskette. These pulses may occur with either a
4,6, or 8-microsecond spacing (0.5%).
-Write Gate
the '-Write Data' input controls the writing of information.
significant data bit. After deactivating '-write gate' , deactivation
of '-drive select' and '-motor on' , and changing '-side 1 select'
must be delayed 1 millisecond, because the erase head is active
for this period.
-Side 1 Select
selects the 1 side. A lOO-microsecond delay must be allowed
after switching from one head to the other before starting to read
or write.
August 31, 1984
Output Signals
-Index
When the drive senses the index hole in the diskette, it generates a
1- to 8-microsecond active pulse on this line.
-Track 00
An active level of this signal means that the read/write heads are
at Track 00 (the outermost track).
-Write Protect
-Read Data
4, 6, or 8-microsecond spacing.
Drive-in-U se Indicator
The Drive-in-Use indicator lights when the drive is selected.
August 31, 1984
Specifications
The following figures show the physical, and performance
Power Dissipation
Operating Limits
Non-Operating Limits
Weight
11 W (Typical)
Ambient Temperature 5 to 46 Degrees C (41
to 114.8 Degrees Fahrenheit)
Relative Humidity 20 to 80 %
Maximum Wet Bulb 29 Degrees Celsius (84
Degrees Fahrenheit)
Ambient Temperature -40 to 60 Degrees C
(-40 to 140 Degrees Fahrenheit)
Humidity no Condensation
Width 146.0 mm (5.8 in)
Height 41.0 mm (1.6 in)
Depth 203.2 mm (8 in)
1.6 kg
Capacity Formatted:
9 Sectors Per Track
8 Sectors Per Track
Recording Density
Track Density
Cylinders
Tracks
Encoding Method
Rotational Speed
Transfer Rate
Latency (Average)
Access Time:
Average
Track to Track
Settling Time
Head Load Time
Motor Start Time
500Kb
368.6Kb
320.0Kb
5876 Bits Per Inch
48 TPI
40
80
MFM
300 RPM
250K Bits/Second
100 ms
81 ms
5 ms
20 ms
50 ms
750 ms
August 31, 1984
fi1iiil +g RN3 RNl 7 452
..... Al 011 15 R'AVCC GNDA,Cll.YRli 13 &80 .. .JK It.,, J381 ,
!4HI a2 ,,1"=<" ','LJ)!"'-""""'- J38Z',
I, J4-A4 n .... MB4192 CIZ..Q. RU )4,(12 t-":-4 r - .... ZSAI15Z I"
ERASE I I J4.Al 08 1 '"IV 018 13 WA C 3 [!!iII;h J3-83
II ..,'" ." "' "WI" .: ... l)' " .. J3Al
I
! O::K I I <;>t5V WG E jjt3DT I h .C9 r-:--- .ii"";5V9
1
116 JJ:A3
I, J4-84 R8f.tKOIiplm-' 1 RI WS HS F 6 100 F 430 1=r0Q1;.lF 4 +'!]V STEPJ'tNG
.... r"'..,."' 9 al RU qP O.',',f.lFl m 5 LS02 y, MOTOR
E II ,MB3 1 43(%W) ,452 6 I 01 I lK cl'"'1cr-
11 1M01 R3 3.31'F
HEADONE l JHZ r 6.
ZK
1514 n +5V +
.R_I_T:
UaT
::: RN13r-=;;.,,4 I :!d
2
L::Z3 4 1027K 7]: 5
LS02 T' ..l. I 11 9 lsm-Z13 12
PROTeCT I .,." RN2 = ,_ LS14 VLS14 - 111 LS04 lK m 15.u
F
u;
'>-'=-. 470 I ' ,1'( D7
IJ3-A1m 1'--=""';;" F C19
INDEX 11 RNI 891!fi1 R13 + 15p.F RIB + 15.uF 13 11 J1-28
'''SOR\l7oI. ;:!d,"::!- "t". I . "" 7 ,:, t;:j J3A1U ::::,:",
TRACK An HN _ 1 8 L-- ;hl00pPL--lLS1Z3 4 9 LS1Z3 12 !U..... 8150T J3.Bl0 '22t.
2:q[ J B13 41J LS14 I/"LS14 --.1' I 01 . r -V:, IN USE LE
SENSOR J3812 +5V 9 LS ::!: C16 I - fTT i
: '"'49 RN7 l"O.1I1.uF I 54F6Jl.n
I 1M 1M 47il I I V LS04 m 4 38 TRACkDD
i 1511
1111
1511. Hh '1 ........ '11
1 5 4 HS 5 1 O+5V Y LSIIS J].A6 i MOTOR ON
: r 5 2 68 3 Jl8
On.n .DSQ. '38 I-INOU
... ,,' , "" V" .. VL,"' 6.,1 !r"M I
12V
9 nA. :
SELECT 2 Jl14 ""6sY 150 Y 1 +5V 1 I I 1 I 1 !if 01] J]M 1 I
3 JI-6 r I 5 S...r::-... 11 INO:X Z 452 4 I,
: "" 1M 4.-..=..,,'.,". ,+5V 2f "'""t""LSII4T 3 JJI'0 RY
-WRIT .. r l OS MBI4301 ROY 8 READY
I __ 11 PIN e21 31 I
",-3.--=..,12 I 11 ,-!-SOO 9 3 I L........!! WO 4E RI1;: R21 56,of 10 1 :
' 0R/ZSTEP 9 BlK'514 33K & ,61 J1-30 -READOATA
.STEP' .,.,. '17. lZ LSOZ Z </iOSTEPCPOURORM
GNO
O.OI.uF 1 5 31
_ .. - UDS 3 'I7:L .. b-jl 15 2 " 7 12 m- 2 6e 13 0 6e +12V n.A51
LS051 1 LS1Z3 LS1Z3 IZ Cl

VRET" L..-='""kN1 +5V 1 3 13 ,J., I
J2-4 C25Cz&eZ9C30 1 4.1l +iV 11 3D R20 ;ke20
r.l2-3 13 +* I#-1F ;;. 5V .r.:; fRAME 2 4:1K LSOO 12 aza ;h 100pf ,J., RETURN
CZ4 O.01#-!f .1. + rozz 3 1! 5 Rl' ZS:OI
", 4.1K
'A
..
..
I
I
I
I +12V
I
I
'STOP
n
OLEO
:'},
DZ
''-' ''-'
VOl
30'
T
J .J 101

51.
12
11 7
OlD
1

11
01
u.
RI. C7
12
lel
5.1M 0.15.11 .9

R7 C6.
/ e11 lez
4
,M51120P
47'
' O.D01,uD.41j.l
33" M51121L
8
9 6
03
100'
16
5
06 5
04 T C5 ,)8K OS
1
13K
0.15""
6

lZK
C3

4
IO.OYP
13
"41 13
1&4
OZ

017 018
33K
1
00047
",
1.1H un
O.OO1,u
I I I
,
el0
016
I
1z.zt 4m
015 C9

j z.z" 4m
0
I
I
I
013 I
"3l0n I

I
I
011 I
01.
330n
,
I'
Q
33Dn
1
-: 01Z
33Dn
I
I
I
I
lf
z
1 B
toO!
I
D3
----
----
- ----
---
- - ---
- -- ---
-----
---,-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
3.5
11
-720KB Diskette Drive
6183315
March 17,1986
Contents
Description ..................................... 1
3.5" Diskette ................................ 1
Operation ................................... 2
Interface ....................................... 3
Input Signals ................................. 4
Output Signals ............................... 6
Drive-In-Use Indicator ......................... 6
Specifications ................................... 7
Logic Diagrams .................................. 8
March 17, 1986 v
Notes:
vi March 17, 1986
Description
The IDM Personal Computer 3.5"-720KB Diskette Drive is a
direct-access device containing a spindle drive system, a head
positioning system, and a read/write/erase system. The drive
uses double-sided diskettes with 80 tracks on each side. Each
diskette has a formatted capacity of 720K.
3.5" Diskette
This diskette is a flexible magnetic disk with a metal hub enclosed
in a protective hard plastic cover. The disk is free to rotate within
the cover and is continuously cleaned by the cover's soft fabric
lining. The diskette's write-protect feature is enabled by sliding
the plastic window in the comer of the diskette cover to the open
position. A sliding metal cover is provided to protect the diskette
when it is out of the drive. The following figure is a simplified
drawing of the diskette used with the 3.5"-720KB Diskette Drive.
Top View
:I:
D'
V
CJ
March 17, 1986
Sliding Cover
;.......
o
Bottom View

c
o
o
B t
/
Write Protect
Window
3.5"-720KB Diskette Drive 1
Operation
When a diskette is being inserted, metal guides ensure it is in the
correct position. The diskette then drops down onto the spindle
motor. The spindle motor ~ n g a g e s the metal hub of the diskette
through a pin-to-hole arrangement called the chucking
mechanism. The chucking mechanism provides precise
positioning of the diskette. The upper read/write head is then
lowered onto the diskette. (The lower head is fixed and does not
move vertically.) The spindle system spins the diskette at a
constant speed of 300 revolutions per minute (rpm). A sensor
generates an index signal once per rotation of the spindle motor.
The two read/write heads are positioned over the desired track of
the diskette by a stepper motor. One step of the stepper motor
results in a one-track linear movement of the read/write heads.
An optical sensor generates a signal when the heads are over
track 00.
During a write operation, data is provided to the drive in modified
frequency modulation (MFM) coded form by a diskette drive
adapter.
Note: Refer to the "System-to-Adapter Compatibility
Chart" and "Option-to-Adapter Compatibility Chart" in
the front of the Technical Reference Options and Adapters
manual for systems and types of diskette drive adapters
compatible with this drive.
The read/write heads record a track of 0.115 mm (0.0045 in.)
nominal width, within a 0.1875 mm (0.00738 in.) track pitch.
The area between the tracks is erased by an erase head. If the
diskette is write-protected, the drive's write-protect sensor
inhibits the write operation.
During a read operation, the signal from the head is amplified and
filtered by read-recovery circuitry, which consists of a low-level
read amplifier, differentiator, zero-crossing detector, and
digitizing circuits. The data is then transferred as MFM data to
the diskette drive adapter.
To remove a diskette, push the diskette eject button to the rear.
This raises the upper head from the diskette, lifts the diskette off
the spindle motor, and ejects the diskette approximately Ilmm
2 3.5"-720KB Diskette Drive March 17,1986
(7/16 in.). A signal is sent from the drive to the diskette adapter
indicating that the diskette has been ejected. The signal is reset
when a diskette is inserted and the diskette drive adapter selects
and steps the drive.
Interface
The diskette drive connects to a diskette drive adapter through an
internal, daisy-chained, flat cable (data/control cable). An
interface adapter is used to connect the drive's 40-pin edge
connector to the 34-pin data/control cable and the 4-pin power
connector. The following figure shows the signals and pin
assignments for the drive's 40-pin edge connector.
Note: Assignments for pins 1 through 34 are the same on both
sides of the interface adapter. Pins 37 through 40 go to the 4-pin
power connector.
Reserved
-
2 1
Reserved
-
4
3
-Drive Select
3
0 6
5
-Index 0 8 7
-Drive Select 0 I 10
9
-Motor On I 16
15
-Step I 20 19
-Write Data I 22 21
-Write Gate I 24 23
-Track 00 0 26 25
-Read Data 0 30 29
-Side 1 Select 0 32 31
-Diskette Change 0 34 33
Reserved
-
36 35
+ 5 Vdc
-
38 37
+12 Vdc
-
40
39
3.5"- Diskette Interface
March 17, 1986 3.5"- 720KB Diskette Drive 3
A key slot is located between pins 34 and 36. Pins 35 and 36 are
grounded on the drive.
P1
Interface
Adapter
2
Diskette Drive
Diskette Drive Interface Adapter
Input Signals
J2
interface signals, except' -motor on'. When' -drive select' is
active, the drive is enabled. When it is inactive, all controlled
inputs are ignored, and all drive outputs are disabled. If, at this
time, the '-motor on' signal is also inactive, the drive is in low
power standby mode. When the drive is not in standby mode, the
maximum '-drive select' delay time is 500 nanoseconds. When
the drive is in standby mode, all signals except '-track 00' and
'-write protect' have a maximum delay of 500 nanoseconds.
-Motor On
An active level of this signal starts the spindle motor. There must
be a 750-millisecond delay after '-motor on' becomes active
before a read or write operation starts. When inactive, this signal
causes the spindle motor to decelerate and stop.
4 3.5"- 720KB Diskette Drive March 17,1986
- Direction Select
When this signal is inactive, the '-step' signal moves the heads
away from the drive spindle; when active, toward the drive
spindle. Any change in the '-direction select' signal must be
made at least 1 microsecond before the leading edge of the
'-step' pulse, and at least 1 microsecond after the trailing edge of
the '-step' pulse.
-Step
A 1-microsecond active pulse of this signal causes the read/write
heads to move one track. The state of '-direction select' at the
trailing edge of the '-step' pulse determines the direction of
motion.
-Write Data
A 250-nanosecond pulse of this signal causes a bit to be written if
'-write gate' is active. These pulses may occur with either a 2,3,
3.3,4,5, or 6.67-microsecond spacing 0.50/0. When '-write
gate' is inactive, pulses do not appear on this input.
-Write Gate
When active, this signal enables the write current circuits, and the
'-write data' signal controls the writing of information.
significant data bit. Making this signal inactive removes all
current from the read/write heads and allows the read circuits to
operate within 590 microseconds. All motor-start, head-settle,
and head-load times are met before the line becomes active.
-Side 1 Select
Making this signal active selects the upper head; otherwise the
lower head is selected.
March 17, 1986 3.5"- 720KB Diskette Drive 5
Output Signals
-Index
When the drive senses an '-Index', it generates a 1- to
8-microsecond active pulse on this line.
-Track 00
When active, this signal indicates that the read/write heads are at
Track 0 (the outermost track).
- Write Protect
When active, this signal indicates that a diskette with an open
write-protect window (write-protected diskette) is in the drive,
and the drive will not write.
-Read Data
4,6, or 8-microsecond spacing.
-Diskette Change
This signal is active unless a diskette is present and a step pulse is
received by the diskette adapter when the drive is selected. The
presence of a diskette is determined by a media sensor.
Drive-In-Use Indicator
The Drive-In-Use indicator lights when the drive is selected.
6 3.5"- 720KB Diskette Drive March 17, 1986
Specifica tions
Size (maximum)
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Power
Media
Capacity Formatted
Track Density
Tracks
Number of Heads
Transfer Rate
Access Time
Track-to-Track
Head Settle Time
Head Load Time
Motor Start Time
Temperature
Operating
Non-operating
Relative Humidity
Operating
Non-operating
Disk Speed
Long Term
Instantaneous
Error Rate
Recoverable
Irrecoverable
Seek Errors
Head Life
Media Life
Specifications
March 17, 1986
42 mm (1.63 n.)
102 mm (4.0 n.)
156 mm (6. 1 n. )
o . 86 kg (1. 9 1 b . )
+12 Vdc 10%
+5 Vdc 10%
3.5" ANS I X3B8/83-14 compat i b 1 e
1 . OM bytes
500 K bytes per side
6.25 K bytes per track
nOK bytes
135 tracks per inch
80
2
250K bits per second (MFM)
6 ms
15 ms
o ms
750 ms (maximum)
0.6 to 51.7C (33 to 125F)
-40 to 60C (-40 to 140F)
300 rpm 1.5%
300 rpm 1.5%
per 109 bits read
per 1012 bits read
per 106 seeks
Approximately 360,000,000 wear
revolutions with less than
10% signal loss
4.0 X 1016 passes per track
3.5"- 720KB Diskette Drive 7
00 +12V Note 1: Unless Otherwise Specified
R;1/4W5% .=r
C;50WV

0
PJ1 L3
(Same On Following Pages)
I .....
(J'Q
40
-bL
100" Note.2: Test Pin Assignment -.JO
...
+12V +12VA
tv=
U.
[ill (to IC1)
0
0

1
.C5 .C8
C4 33" 2.2"
...... 0.1" 25WV 5.0WV
...

CR1
\:J5:Io1
=
<= 39
1S2095A .... '"1
(J'Q

+12V rn CD
RETURN
..
38
...bL
?G
CD 0
=
0
+5V
+5V
CD (')
a

rI.J.
.5:101
::::

I'D +5V 37
Note 3: [EJ
0
RETURN
5:101
a
:So DG
Q4
rn
<Ii!! >Il A881 .....
I'D
+5VSB
0
R3
R46
(toIC5)
'"1
100K
3.3K
.....
FRAME GND
36
g
R47
til
FRAMEGND
35 2.2K
C6

0,01"
"t1
CD
@]
'"1
rn
==
0
RWPWR1
I:l

(SH.2)
5:101
-
=-
(1
.-
0
;-1 (SH.2)
PWRON1 16

.-
S-
IC CD
QO
3.5" - 720KB Diskette Drive (Sheet 1 of 5)
'"1

+ (;j:;> 2c:l
14 __________
10 2 1 1 HCOO 3 6 11 1C4
l
sv 2 1C2 lC4
DRJVESELECTI 12 4 1 3 WDATAO (SH.3j
DRIYESELECT2 14 6 :;> 5 +:' DVSELO 6 I
DRIVESELECT3 8 6 3 0-1"'-+---+---'-' ....... -'1=-'-----"---+-1---"1'9 i5i SIDEOI (SloI.3}
',' J 'I'.
T R21
I"-______ '+i'''=-...,. _____ __ WG WE 12 1::===
+qV 2 1 16 srSEL ERA 11 '";';1 pO
RN2

18 II
PWRONf!!---r--PWAONl ISH 1)
____________ -;:"" __ .,-j_---'I2 Ni'RON 1)
.. =_"
-3 -1'
: W2 I 2
I 2
W5
r

_ _'l3 01 018 14
L ________ ..J
TAACKZEIIOSENSOR
M.
4.7K
WPSWHO
lh
6
WGATEO (8H3J
EGI,TEO ($H.3}
l.OWWCl(SH.3)
-
o
=
(SH. 2) iSINKO
(SH. 21 LOWWCl
(SH. 2) WDATAQ
(SH. 2) WGATEO
(SH. 21 EGATED
(SH. 2) SIDEDl

COREGND D-D
HEAD SELECT Il- 9
Rrw-A
,
R/W-S
D-
,
ERASE
D-
,
SHIELD
0-
B
COREGND g-
HEAD SELECT
"'"
R/W-A
""
6
R/w-e
""
6
ERASE In
,
SHIELD lQI-h
{HEADlj-

r
eS1
'"

leso
'"
m
1.5",
,r11
0",1"
c",
6
181588
I
g
I
,

0
'------'-'- HDOA
----'-'- HODS
HDIA
15 HOIB
f
AGNO
"
AGND

E
WDUMPA MC2870P
,C,
'.SK
R9 19
WDUMPB
10 20
COMMON1
cn 12V.3..!.. ,cc
S

"'
"
22 COMMONO
"'
+12V
,

'"
3
@
C"6
1$1598
!"I',!"
" "
'"
"N
'"
'OK
co;
"
" 1$1588
""
" "" 4.7K
""
'"
'"
'"
" 270.

" 270,
:
w
1500p
"" "
'"
100"
""
"
cn
O.Olp
"
C"
Q,Dlp
C"
2200p
or l
"n
'"
?
, , , , ,
-r----o+12V

'" ::: tt 'OK
c Ci
"
" DIFFOA

DIFFOB
: c"
3300p
CQMPIA
COMPIB 41

OGND
,
"" ,,<
MMVA
Cll,J
f'
"
36 330
P
I
35WV
MMVB
J;;19
Z

1330P
0
"
0
voo
2 ;3

:;: :<: w <ij
28 29 30 3'132 33
I
o
"
,
"
+12V

c",
'"

JAG
000 ATt (SH.2J
-
-
PJ9
(SH.2) +12V
01
@]
CI4
O.lll
@)
R26 RI
4.7K 4.7K
(SH.2J MTRENO )---------'
(SH.2) GND
(SH.2) +5V
(SH. 2) WPRCTQ
( ~ H . 2) WPSWHO > - - - - - ~
(SH.2) IXPLSl
IC4
DN68378
R2
750
RI6
5.1K
10
IC5
2 DN6839A
@]
C3
TC9142P
6 0.11'
IC2
VR
lOOK
R17
560
R3
1M
R4
470K
R5
IK
C4
1022 ....
R19 RII
lOOK R22 10K
R6 51K
66K
@)
R25
75K
RIO
lOOK
01: 2SA1243
Hl "- H3: THS105
-
tv

I
N
N
a
='
a:

='
:3.
OO!!

{SH. 2) MTRENO
(SH. 2) lXPLS 1
(SH.2) +5V
(SH. 2) WPSWHO
(SH. 2) WPRCTO
(SH. 2) +12V
(SH.2)GND
/
"-
/
"-
(
"-
/

J
10
fZ-
11
R107
c.E
5
68K
13

TC45388F
R10S
lCl02 3
20K
14
A109

2
10K
.1U

15
16
Ll01

+ Cl02 CA1C1
IS.2075A 22U
J,
?DD11
I I
C116 _____ J

.
ellS
C114
11
4.7U
251,.
Rl10
4.7K
23
R10S Rl11

lOOK
27
28
r
L
VR 1
L
el19
56
Yl01 C10B
CBB 68

3
r- ----,

rRl02
5
_2_ 3 ..J ON6837B
Cl07
33K
0.01 SU
r- ----,

.22U 68K
_2_ 1 J DN6839A
I
CR102
RLS-73
E3
HW301C
E2 El

el13 Cl1.2 el11

21 20 1. 18
r!L
16

HA13432MP D--
lelO1

e11D

6 7 8 9 10 11
C1Q5 Cl04 Cl03
1'U
I,lU
J.W
Rl04
15K
A10S
1.SK
Rl03 jclO.
2.4K .1U
W3
W2
1
Wl
l
Adapter Card
The following is a logic diagram for the Adapter Card.
(CABLE SIDE) (3.5" FOD SIDE)
__ -
.., Reserved
Reserved
D/Setect3
U1
Index
D/SelectO

4 16
3 L......-...
-+ __ _______ ____ __________________ ____
L......-. +5V,,---
- u314
D!Select2
U1
U'
5 L......-..
-+ __ __ _________ __________________ ____ r+_"
__ ____________ ______ __ __ ______ 16 Oir/Select u31 I ........

U2
:><>-"-------t+_ '0

U3 10 8 v;U,,' ,,12'---t-+-
U2
-+ __ __ __________ __________________ ______ r+_24
20
Step
WriteDBta

U1

L--.
U2
15
: CONNECTOR J2
4-1 +5VDC
3 --i +5V Return 10 Ul (pin 20), U2 (pin 20). U3 (pin 14) 37 +5V Return
2--{ +12VReturn 39 +12VRelurn
1-1 +lDOC .1DOO
__ -1 L.
Notes: Ul, U2 = 74LS244
U3 = 2201/330 OhmsTRES
Adapter Card Logic Diagram
March 17, 1986 3.5"- 720K)J Diskette Drive 13
Notes:
14 3.S"-720KB Diskette Drive March 17, 1986
----
T: : ~ : =
-----
--_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
mM 10MB Fixed Disk
Drive
6361482
ii
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Specifications .................................. 3
Logic Diagrams ................................. 5
iii
iv
Description
The IBM 10MB Fixed Disk Drive is a random-access storage
device that uses two non-removable 5-1/4 inch disks for storage.
Each disk surface employs one movable head to service 306
cylinders. The total formatted capacity of the four heads and
surfaces is 10M bytes (17 sectors per track with 512 bytes per
sector and a total of 1224 tracks).
An impact-resistant enclosure provides mechanical and
contamination protection for the heads, actuator, and disks. A
self -contained air recirculating system, which consists of an
internal filter and a breather filter, maintains a clean-air
environment. Thermal isolation of the stepper and spindle motor
assemblies from the disk enclosure results in a very low
temperature rise within the enclosure. This isolation provides a
greater off-track margin and the ability to perform read and write
operations immediately after power-up with no thermal
stabilization delay.
Fixed Disk Drive 1
2 Fixed Disk Drive
Specific a tions
Size (maximum)
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Power
Maximum Ripple
Media
Track Density
Number of Tracks
Temperature
Operating
Non-operating
Relative humidity
Operating
Maximum Wet Bulb
Shock
Operating
Non-operating
Access Time
Average Latency
Error Rates
Recoverable
Irrecoverable
Seek Errors
Design life
Disk speed
Transfer Rate
Recording Mode
B2.55 mm (3.25 in.)
146.05 mm (5.75 in.)
203 mm (B.O in.)
2.0B kg (4.6 Ib)
+12 Vdc :!: 5 %, 1.B A (4.5 A maximum)
+5 Vdc:!: 5%,0.7 A (1.0 A maximum)
1 % with equivalent resistive load
Rigid media disk
345 tracks per inch
1224
4 to 50C (40 to 122 F)
-40 to 60C (-40 to 140F)
B to BO% (non-condensing)
26C (7BOF)
10 Gs
20 Gs
3 ms track -to-track
B.33 ms
1 per 10
10
bits read
1 per 10
12
bits read
1 per 10
6
seeks
5-years (B,OOO hours MTF)
3600 rpm:!: 1 %
5.0M bps
MFM
Fixed Disk Drive 3
4 Fixed Disk Drive
.12V
'-"'='-+-+- +12V
.. v
NOTES: UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED
1. RE8ISTANE VALUES ARE IN OHMS. 1/4W. 50ft.
2. ALL 1% RESISTORS ARE 1/8W.
3. CAPACITANCE VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS, +81).20%.
4. DIODES ARE IN4148.
5. .......... INDICATES CONNECTOR JI
B. ~ INDICATES CONNECTOR J2 THRU J8.
7. ~ INDICATEs TEST POINT PINS.
'NO
1
paD 24
PBI
23
PB2 ~
;rs ~ :
+REDUCEDIWR
+STEP
+DlHEcnON
'0
+OUTENA
-WAITE FAULT
Fixed Disk Drive - Type 1 (Sheet 1 of 3)
11
260
~
0
(JQ

PHASEA ~
~

~
(JQ
""
-PHASE A
~
=
III
PHASEB
-PHASES
-SEEK COMPLETE
22
-READY
10
-TRACK
12
-WRITE FAULT
20
-INDEX

+STEP
+DlRECTlON

C.

;.
iii:'"

:I.
""i!

+REDUCEDIWR
835
C13
4F
.. 4.87K.1%
CI4

liRIj:;.,JI-l-...lI'Y-----------------------------------'iir-_ACTIVITYlEO

NOTESIUNLESSOTHERWISESPECIFIEO):
1. All RESISIORS" ARE IN OHMS 114W. 5%.
2. All CAPACITORS -ARE IN MICROFARADS. 10%.
l-lt- INDICATES Jl.
4. III INDICATESJZ.
[!]C5. PDlYCARB.DNATE 50V. tD%.
."
GNU
GNU
1 .. V
RP'
4.7K
J6_2
2 +TlMERDUT 3
PI-16 > TEST WRAP
P2-7 )>------------'
NOTES:
1. SHEET TO SHEET CONNECTION IS AS FOllOWS:

2. UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/4W 5% VALUE IN OHMS
CAPACITORS +80-20% VALUE IN JA
3. E1 IS A PROGRAMMABLE JUMPER SOCKET
.. V
R16
470
'5V
.15
470
C8
22
R12
1110
R11
1110
+12V
CR14
IN 4001

R1.
.75W
eftS
IN5811
RELAY
K1
J67
"
~ J 9 . 2
"
.s.
"
T
~ ,
n 200
) J9-4
""
"
. -PWRSUSORLED
-TRKlERO
"
2JM
' .
'"
"
"
l'
. ~
200
) J9-6
""
".
....
=

Jl0.fl +5V

L618pH

=-
C31
0
130pl
....
C32

JIO-IZ

L410pH
0
JIO-14

JIIH
ox
CLR
1
P2-13
P2.14 -MFMW:ITE
____________________________ --=-!.!l'W!!!R!!.1TE'--<J103
-8,
...
2100
IL. ____________ -RESET III
G "fcc .. ;:;t'Gn.;.:'.'------=
'"._ ..

____ ,
+
l ...... ,.' I +5:,+ ...
4 NI' an Rl02
::
========t::::1!'W;yLl,-.':r==::1F'lr .... 3a-STPe",,! El. .. _''..-J [31 -POWU lOSS Ul 8 1 6 RESET '"
[21 -OPTIDlAlRESET 10 SOS Ull +51 -
C35 P35 32-STrtMIPZU. 5 6 j-
70, T,t!----

r
1
jJ.F LSI4 JaN
ri !! !: lET J32-9
JI.U-$TEP>-----< ...... .
+5, P33 2 A.. l,r- OIUT J3N

'" m 30 -1A.PINS EI R65 UIIK 7 ,.j!,:::.">; . _______ ----> DO lET J3Z-10
un 510n 1111 lnnm13 *:'9 ClIO CRt elll
urn - -
J3J.24 SllESH! PH + C39.10jJ.F -=- ilSI'1 .15111 115111 +51
J3HZ$IZESElO>- 23'4&
Rn,UK
35
1
- II -'0 9 ;0O!''--___ -> +lEDUn IUISTAICE [31
[2IHEUCOI'lm---------+---+-+H---"-u .45 .. 121 PIJ 20 In SEEIlCOI.Lm IZI
"r.. m 19 +WIOISUll(3)
121 +BtftECnUII dIS '15 11 nneE.I URlflT 131
(21 +DllUSELEcr :J.!3-+--1-+-h_-"lZ6 P43 saBI P1S'f"'---rrt----- .. " .....,t---:r-----===-.:--rl: ),! ,'.!.' ---------+WIITlFAULT 121
J1-I-WR1Tt GATt >-__ 12 LSO. I' -In. 1161 86.16.9 0 1 _ 6 ---....=....... Do\, at JU.l
LS14 P3s3ICURR. a 4
5100

12IIUU 21 PU .. 01,011 m-a
121 Hfl 0 SEllE u P41 QIO.T1P42 5 2 183.241 ....rlTpt .. '
+51 2 '10( U4
I1IMBSHZ' 14'11 IH{V U Stl3iZ ii2n 12.1IU 4.71
(21 IIUSElt' lli m 8101 4
ITAL2 UK
C33 IIYSTA C3'
J:2ZPF...,.. '141""_++-+->''<1 ' 13
-'" I r:OI 11 +WIITE 131 .. '" l-t''''' .. L __ +-l._.::: _____ --'=:'L1llt====== -IllITE (31
LSU + VlSU HEADY 121
lag 3 I U13 US ____________ _
Ull 15 UK -SIlSHO(21
+l" 11/-2
'.LSl9S
Q
12
13 mS.
n
4 CD r ... -:-,,--Itlt-;:::===============
12I_CIl1"WFAUlT_:+: ..
+51
..

l'D -IDIEl I'

t:='
'1-14 -IIIHl!' ....

'HI

t:='
m-ID
.11111 .. ITED.UFE
:I. 114-11
<
n.
l'D
....
'ON
.....
'34-11
J34-12
.134-14
n-u
"11101
.II!.u. ...
11.1f.1111.1UI
'1-14 -IIIIErnlJl"
law +'Im
'"
HE EIIE
.ISH +enDIE.1E
'"
+1fRlTtfAiLT
'"
HEAlY
'1-21 -In UllCT 1
'HI -D"IELECT!
'1-111 -DILUEllCT3
'1-32 -I'. snEtT 4
IllOmOlAl'UfT
[II -IIZUElD
III -SIZESEll
IN-CimOUfllElET
[II -'ETIEUCOll'l.lU
'"
+".,
til -usn
;
;
ClI5t
114111
+>n
CIII
C2 + 114 ,
.1JLf
i
..
..
" ..
" 11
" .
iii

z

,

CU.I
111.11
"
.I,.f
J
-t1l1PIE. ISH
... ,"
'"
-CM'POil '8l-!
KDIElr' [II
+HEAIW.I J31".14
IIIELZ"
'" +IIEAI.EI.I/O 'SHUI
) I"IE JO...
) IPAIEIlEnDlJ II'"!
) "UE .....

) '1m:ICLI .....
CHIP'.FIILY
'"
+III1ECTIIII'1
'"
'IIEX
'"
RI.t 1
:j: + ... , ... i fo
___ -_-_"_' ____________________________________________ ________________ _
LSI',
y
-'IIEI
"-21
: Ul B
-TIn .... 'HI
+CTlOH.IE
'"
-WIITEFAUlT 'I-U
...
..
-lEAD' 'Irr
-BI'
'M
-121' 12111
-1I'lfLEml JI.,
+IRI1ElruCT 11.31
"-,
II
+"
Ii
..
flIlUIELRTEB
'"
UK

.
T

. :.
U7 .1Z
?

... n
."
13 IT
.,

7431
I
j
"
III
11
)
HEEKCOlmn
'"
{Db
."
1481
IU.lean
+5' -----.,tVV'
"'
Fixed Disk Drive -- Type 3 Sheet 2 of 3
18.1601
"
H,131Y

c..
RilE DATA
0 RITlDlTA
.
'"
+WII1
0
:I.
J34-1 -p OWER LOIS
41!!
[II +W'1ISAILE

[II +REDUCEW.CURIEIT
I-<

[II -WIITE
...
5100
.. ,
sian
LllL"
TI'
...
RP5012
'2835
m
" ..
.n
+12f .., I -' .. 4=:"':::"0..'-- ftEi+1} nHI
2In
mt,11
;CP

1---.---+-.---1------> FAUE 1111+511 .1313
" cal UD
__ _.J .,'"
..
Ll340
"
1---.-->:"-'.:""' ... "-1.-+ ____ --> .1 SHUl .l3H.1I
... I
s n bell
+-------- 131 J"F f,------>;II J3HU3
07 35ln

I v vv _+5,
-,.WEIUSS III
_______________ UI3

________________ -',."' ..
Notes:
14 Fixed Disk Drive
--- -
----
- ----
- ---
- - ---
- - - ---
-----
...... -_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
20MB Fixed Disk Drive
1521498
March 17, 1985
Notes:
Contents
Description ..................................... 1
Interfaces ...................................... 2
Control Input Signals .......................... 3
Output Control Signals ......................... 5
Data-Transfer Signals .......................... 7
Specifications - Type 13 ........................... 9
Specifications - Type 2 ........................... 10
Logic Diagrams - Type 13 ........................ 11
March 17, 1986 v
Notes:
vi March 17,1986
Description
The IBM Personal Computer 20MB Fixed Disk Drive is a
direct-access device that can store up to 20M (lM = 1,048,576
bytes) of formatted data. The average access time is 85
milliseconds using a servo positioner.
An impact-resistant enclosure provides mechanical and
contamination protection for the heads, actuators, and disks. A
self-contained air recirculating system, which consists of an
internal filter and a breather filter, maintains a clean-air
environment. Thermal isolation of the stepper and spindle motor
assemblies from the disk enclosure results in a very low
temperature rise within the enclosure. This isolation provides a
greater off-track margin and the ability to perform read and write
operations immediately after power-up with no thermal
stabilization delay.
March 17, 1986 20MB Fixed Disk Drive 1
Interfaces
The interfaces of this drive are divided into three categories:
control, data transfer, and dc power.
The control interface is a 34-pin printed circuit board (PCB) edge
connector. The signals and pin assignments are as follows.
Signal Name Signal Pin Ground Pin
Reserved 2 1
-Head select 2 4
3
-Write gate 6
5
-Seek complete 8 7
-Track 000 10
9
-Write fault 12 11
-Head select 0 14
13
Reserved 16 15
-Head select 1 18 17
-Index 20 19
-Ready 22 21
-Step 24 23
-Drive select 1 26 25
-Drive select
3 30 29
-Direction in 34
33
Control Interface
220MB Fixed Disk Drive March 17, 1986
The data transfer interface is a 20-pin PCB connector. The
signals and pin assignments are as follows.
Signal Name Signal Pin
-Drive Selected 1
+MFM Write Data 13
-MFM Write Data 14
+MFM Read Data 17
-MFM Read Data 18
Grounds 2, 4, 6, 8, lD, 11,
12, 15, 16, 19, 20
Reserved 3, 5, 7, 9
Data-Transfer Interface
The dc power interface is a 4-pin PCB connector. The signals
and pin assignments are as follows.
Signal Name Pin
+12 Vdc 1
+12 Vdc Return 2
+5 Vdc Return
3
+5 Vdc 4
DC Power Interface
Control Input Signals
The control input signals are of two types: those that are
multiplexed in a multiple drive system, and those intended to do
the multiplexing. These input signals have the following
specifications.
Active=Low=True: 0.0 to 0.4 Vdc at 40 mA
Inactive=High=False: 2.5 to 5.25 Vdc at 0 mA
The following are descriptions of the control input signals.
March 17,1986 20MB Fixed Disk Drive 3
-Write Gate
The active level of this signal allows data to be written on the disk
and prohibits any step pulses from moving the heads. The
inactive level allows data to be read from the disk, and allows the
step pulse to move the heads.
-Head Select 0, 1, and 2
These three signals enable the selection of each read/write head
in a binary-coded sequence. The' -head select 0' signal is the
least significant. Heads are numbered 0 through 8. When all
head-select signals are inactive, head 0 is selected.
- Direction In
This signal defines the direction the read/write heads move when
'-step' is pulsed. An inactive level defines the direction as out,
and if a pulse is applied to '-step', the read/write heads move
away from the center of the disk. An active level defines the
direction as in, and the read/write heads move toward the center
of the disk.
-Step
defined by the '-direction in' signal. The motion starts when the
, -step' signal changes from active to inactive (the trailing edge of
this signal pulse). Any change in '-direction in' is made at least
100 nanoseconds before the leading edge of the step pulse. This
drive supports two methods of stepping or seeking:
Slow Seek The read/write heads move at the rate of
incoming step pulses. The minimum time
between successive steps is 3 milliseconds and the
minimum pulse width is 2 microseconds.
Buffered Seek The adapter's controller may burst step pulses to
the drive until the time after the last pulse
exceeds 200 microseconds or the maximum
420MB Fixed Disk Drive March 17,1986
number of step pulses is received (1 for each
track). The drive starts motion of the heads after
receiving the first step pulse. Step pulses are sent
to the drive every 70 to 200 microseconds.
-Drive Select Signals 1, 2, 3, and 4
When one of these signals is active, it connects that drive to the
control lines. The drive select lines are daisy-chained and all
drives are jumpered to respond to drive 1.
The fixed disk drive provides a 220/230 ohm termination for a
single '-drive select' signal.
Output Control Signals
The drive control signals are open collector outputs that can sink
a maximum of 40 rnA in the active state, with a maximum output
voltage of 0.4 Vdc. When the output is in the inactive state, the
collector's cutoff current is a maximum of 250 microamperes.
-Seek Complete
This signal goes active When the read/write heads settle on the
final track at the end of a seek. Reading or writing is not
attempted when '-seek complete' is inactive. The following
situations force '-seek complete' inactive:
When power-on starts a recalibration sequence because the
read/ write heads are not over track 0
When less than 2 microseconds have elapsed after the leading
edge of a step pulse or a series of step pulses
If the + 5 or + 12 V dc fluctuates or is lost momentarily but
restored.
The '-seek complete' signal returns to the active level no later
than 100 milliseconds after the trailing edge of the last step pulse.
-Track 000
This signal is at an active level when the drive's read/write heads
are at the outermost track.
-Write Fault
This signal means that a condition at the drive is causing improper
operation of the disk. An active level of this signal prevents
further writing and stepping at the drive until drive power is
switched off.
This signal goes active when any of the following conditions
occur:
Write current exists in the head without '-write gate' active,
or no write current exists in the head with '-write gate' active
and '-drive select' active.
A step pulse is received while '-write gate' is active.
Multiple heads are selected when '-write gate' is active.
DC voltages are out of tolerance.
An off track condition is detected while '-write gate' is
active.
The' -write gate' signal is active when write is disabled by the
drive electronics.
-Index
The drive provides this output signal once each revolution to
indicate the beginning of a track. This signal normally is inactive
and goes active to indicate an index. Only the change from
inactive to active is valid (leading edge of the pulse).
-Ready
When this signal and '-seek complete' are active, the drive is
ready to read, write, or seek, and the 110 signals are valid. An
inactive level of this signal prevents all writing and seeking.
The '-ready' signal is inactive four times during drive operation:
At power-up time, '-ready' remains inactive until:
Access recalibration to track 0 is complete.
Spindle speed is stable within 1.0% of nominal (10
revolution average).
Spindle speed deviates 1.0% of nominal (10 revolution
average).
The' -write fault' signal is active.
Data-Transfer Signals
All signals associated with the transfer of data between the drive
and the system are differential (pairs of balanced signals) and are
not multiplexed.
Two pairs of balanced signals are used for the transfer of data:
'write data' and 'read data'. The following describes the
data-transfer signals.
MFM Write Data
This is a differential pair that defines signal shifts written on the
track. When' + MFM write data' goes more positive than
'-MFM write data', flux reverses on the track, provided that
'-write gate' is active. The system drives '-MFM write data' to
an active level when in the read mode.
MFM Read Data
Read data is sent to the system through the differential pair of
'MFM read data' lines. When' + MFM read data' goes more
positive than '-MFM read data' , flux reverses on the track of the
selected head.
Specifications - Type 13
Size (maximum)
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Power
Maximum Ripple (0 to 15 MHz)
Media
Track Density
Number of Tracks
Formatted Capacity
Bytes/Sector
SectorslTrack
Number of Cylinders
Number of Heads
Temperature
Operating
Non-Operating
Relative Humidity
Operating
Non-Operating
Maximum Wet Bulb
Shock
Operating
Non-Operating
Access Time
Track-to-Track
Average
Maximum
Average Latency
Error Rates
Recoverable
(16 retries-soft)
Non-recoverable
Seek Errors
Design Life
Disk Speed
Transfer Rate
Recording Mode
March 17,1986
82.5 mm (3.25 in.)
146 mm (5.75 in.)
203.2 mm (8.0 in.)
2.8 kg (6.16 lb.)
+12 Vdc 5%, 1.0 A (2.0 A maximum)
+5 Vdc 5%, 0.75 A (0.8 A maximum)
100 mV, peak-to-peak
Rigid media disk
350 tracks per inch
2448
21.3 M bytes
512
17
306
8
26C (78.8F) (non-condensing)
10 Gs
25 Gs
20 ms (average)
85 ms (traverse 1/3 Tracks)
200 ms
8.33 ms
per 10
10
bits read
per 10
12
bits read
per 5 X 10
6
seeks
5 years (20,000 hours MTBF)
3600 rpm 0.5%
5.0M bps
MFM
20MB Fixed Disk Drive 9
Size (maximum)
Height
Width
Depth
Weight
Power
Maximum Ripple (0 to 15 MHz)
Media
Track Density
Number of Tracks
Formatted Capacity
Bytes/Sector
Sectors/Track
Number of Cyl inders
Number of Heads
Temperature
Operating
Non-Operating
Relative Humidity
Operating
Non-Operating
Maximum Wet Bulb
Shock
Operating
Non-Operating
Access Time
Track-to-Track
Average
Maximum
Average Latency
Error Rates
Recoverable
(16 retries-soft)
Non-recoverable
Seek Errors
Design Life
Disk Speed
Transfer Rate
Recording Mode
10 20MB Fixed Disk Drive
82.5 mm (3.25 in.)
146 mm (5.75 in.)
203.2 mm (8.0 in.)
0.59 kg (1.3 lb.)
+12 Vdc 5%, 1.0 A (2.0 A maximum)
+5 Vdc 5%, 0.75 A (0.8 A maximum)
100 mV, peak-to-peak
Rigid media disk
580 tracks per inch
2460
20.1 M bytes
512
17
615
4
10 to 45C (50 to 113F)
-40 to 65C (-40 to 140F)
26C (75.8F) (non-condensing)
10 Gs
25 Gs
20 ms (average)
85 ms (traverse 1/3 Tracks)
200 ms
8.33 ms
per 10
10
bits read
per 10
12
bits read
per 5 X 10
6
seeks
5 years (20,000 hours MTBF)
3600 rpm 0.5%
5.0M bps
MFM
March 17, 1986
-
-
(6X)M74LSI4P

SHUNT BLOCK
WITH SOCKET
(SH.3) 2.5 V REF
+5V TO TAKO SENSOR
TRKO SENSOR RETURN
IP(3)
(NDEX )-'''''1,,'---<>---"43>"--------''''''-'''''-1-'
WRITEERRORo-____ ______
(SH.3) 0-_____________ --",,'-"""-, '---'
(P25)
Note: Jl CONNECTOR ALL ODD NUMBER POSITIONS J2 CONNECTOR 2. 4
6,8,11.12,15,15.19.20 ARE GROUNDED
20M B Fixed Disk Drive Type 13 (Sheet 1 of 4)
(SH3)
DS5 17 AESETWRITE FAULT
(SH.3)
p--t--------oPHASE B (SH_3)
DB2 14 PHASE A (SH 3)
DB3 15 PHASE B (SH_ 3)
"
IS5176
+r J8/1
'--""""---7)
J8t2
DRV SELECTED
LED-CATHODE
")o'"'-,--c++---"'='----<> REDUCE IWC ISH. 2)
L-___ (SH_2)
WRITE SELECT (SH. 2)
DRIVE CONNECTED
DRIVE CONNECTED
GND (RETURN)
ANALOG PRE AMP (SH. 3)
+12V
GND(FRAMEI
J4/3 __ _
Rfii H/L f---------o WR1TE SELECT +5 V
J4123 (SH.1)
-A13
J4/6 2Kn
HSO'L
J4/11
HS1H E:r HS2' (SH.1)
J4117
HS1L
(SH. 3)
"
1.5Kf1

HS2' (SH1)
WUS.L
(SH.1)

L ___________ WRITE ERROR (8Hf)
20MB Fixed Disk Drive - Type 13 (Sheet 2 of 4)
(SH.l)
r----------------------<>25VREF (SH.l)
D"
DOZ
36Y
(SH.1) PHASEAo-----f-----+----------jf-------------------"1
(SH.l)
(SH.l1 PHASEAo-----f-----+----------jr-------------------'l
(SH.l) PHASESo-----r----,:=-+--------:;:;;;v---jr------------------'l
R'8
150Kn
R"
2.2KO
+12 V TO MOTOR
:
MOTOR STOP B (SH.4)
____ -::':"::-____ ---<> .. MOTOR STOPA (SH.4)
(SH.l)
680
'W
:::> -l.CTUATOR LOCK
L--------------------7 >- -)
>'--------------------------0 MOTOR START (SH.4)
,-------------------...----0+12 ANALOG PREAMP (SH.2)
+12 V DC FROM HO;TN).I' __ -+_-+-_....;:.;"'-_-+ __ ---.,-____________ ---.l
+ 12 ANALOG 592 (SH.2)
.----+--+---<l+12VLOGIC (SH.4)
+12 V SPINDLE CTRL (SH.4)
J9/1
r--____ ---4 +5 V INDEX SENSOR
-
.j:::>.
N
=
::
=
"f'j

=-
0
...

t::l
:I.
-<

(SH.3)
loon
1/2W
0"
188176
(SH.3)
+12V
(SH.3) (SH.3)
+12V +12V
t
J1O/5

18"CK)
_
(PINK)
Jl0/11
f"---------------GRAY)
Jl0/8
(PURPLE)
Jl0/6

f"---------------GREEN)
Jl0/7
(WHITE)
(SH.3)
MOTOR STOP 8 (SH_ 3)
(BROWN)
(ORANGE)
(SH3) MOTORSTARTo-------------------------+-+---------------------r::-=!"=::--:Oc::="==-=
D'
250843-0
--- -
----
- ----
- ---
- - ---
- - - ---
-----
--_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Interfaces ..................................... 1
Control Input Signals ........................ 2
Output Control Signals ....................... 4
Data-Transfer Signals ........................ 6
Overlapped Seek ............................ 7
Specifications .................................. 8
Logic Diagrams ................................. 9
iii
Notes:
iv
Description
The IBM Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive is a
direct-access device that can store up to 20Mb of formatted data.
The average access time is 40 milliseconds using a quasi
closed-loop servo positioner.
Interfaces
The contro. interface is a 34 pin printed circuit board (PCB) edge
connector. The following shows the signals and pin assignments.
- Head Select 3 2 1
- Head Select 2 4 3
-Write Gate 6 5
-Seek Complete 8 7
- Track 000 10 9
-Write Fault 12 11
- Head Select a 14 13
Reserved 16 15
- Head Select 1 18 17
-Index 20 19
-Ready 22 21
-Step 24 23
- Drive Select 1 26 25
-Drive Select 2 28 27
-Direction In 34 33
Control Interface
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive 1
The data transfer interface is a 20 Pin PCB connector. The
signals and pin assignments are as follows:
- Drive Selected 1
+MFM Write Data 13
-MFM Write Data 14
+MFM Read Data 17
-MFM Read Data 18
Ground 2, 4, 6, 8, 11, 12, 15, 16, 19
The dc power interface is a 4-pin PCB connector. The signals and
pin assignments follow.
Signal Name Pin
+12 Vdc 1
+12 Vdc Return 2
+5 Vdc 4
+5 Vdc Return 3
DC Power Interface
specifications.
Active: 0.0 to 0.4 Vdc at 40 rnA
Inactive: 2.5 to 5.25 Vdc at 0 rnA
-Write Gate
The active level of this signal allows data to be written on the
disk. The inactive level allows data to be read from the disk, and
allows the step pulse to move the heads.
August 31, 1984
2 Personal Computer AT 20MB Fixed Disk Drive
-Head Select 0, 1,2, and 3
These four signals enable the selection of each read/write head in
a binary-coded sequence. '-Head Select 0' is the least
significant. Heads are numbered 0 through 15. When all Head
Select signals are inactive, head 0 is selected.
-Direction In
, -Step' is pulsed. An inactive level defines the direction as out,
and if a pulse is applied to '-Step', the read/write heads move
of the disk.
-Step
defined by the '-Direction In' signal. The motion starts when the
, -Step' signal changes from active to inactive (the trailing edge
of this signal pulse). Any change in '-Direction In' is made at
least 100 nanoseconds before the leading edge of the step pulse.
This drive supports two methods of stepping or seeking:
Slow Seek The read/write heads move at the rate of
between successive steps is 3 milliseconds and
the minimum pulse width is 2 microseconds.
track). The drive starts motion of the heads
after receiving the first step pulse. Step pulses
are sent to the drive every 35 microseconds.
August 31, 1984
- Drive Select Signals 1 through 4
control lines. Making the appropriate jumper connections at the
drive determines which select line of the interface activates that
drive.
single I drive select I signal. The signal lead that is terminated is
the one that selects the drive based on the position of the drive
select jumpers.
The drive control signals are open collector outputs that can sink a
maximum of 40 rnA in the active state, with a maximum output
voltage of 0.4 Vdc. When the output is inactive, the collector's
cutoff current is a maximum of 250 microamperes.
-Seek Complete
This signal goes active when the read/write heads settle on the
final track at the end of a seek. Reading or writing is not attempted
when I -Seek Complete I is inactive. The following situations force
I -Seek Complete I inactive:
read/write heads are not over track O.
When less than 5 microseconds have elapsed after the trailing
edge of a step pulse or a series of step pulses.
restored.
If the drive attempts to retry a seek after settling on a track.
August 31, 1984
-Seek Complete returns to the active level no later than 100
milliseconds (1 second if a seek retry occurs) after the trailing
edge of the last -Step pulse.
-Track 000
- Write Fault
switched off.
occur:

Write current exists in the head without '-Write Gate'
active, or no write current exists in the head with '-Write
Gate' active and '-Drive Selected' active
More than one seek retry between Seek commands from the
controller
A step pulse is received while '-Write Gate' is active.
-Index
and goes active to indicate '-Index'. Only the change from
-Ready
When this signal and '-Seek Complete' are active, the drive is
ready to read, write, or seek, and the I/O signals are valid. An
August 31, 1984
, -Ready' is inactive four times during drive operation:
At power-up time '-Ready' remains inactive until:
Spindle speed is stable within O.S% of nominal (10
Drive self -check is complete.
Spindle speed deviates O.S% of nominal (10 revolution
average).
' -Write Fault' is active.
not multiplexed.
'-Write Data' and '-Read Data'. The following describes the
MFM Write Data
track. When' +MFM Write Data' goes more positive than
'-MFM Write Data', flux reverses on the track, provided that
'-Write Gate' is active. The system drives '-MFM Write Data'
to an active level ('-MFM Write Data' more negative than
, + MFM Write Data' ) when in the read mode.
August 31, 1984
To ensure data integrity, the controller applies a
write-precompensation of 12 nanoseconds to all write data on
cylinders 300 and greater.
MFM Read Data
MFM Read Data lines. When '+ MFM Read Data' goes more
positive than '-MFM Read Data' , flux reverses on the track of
the selected head.
Overlapped Seek
The drive supports overlapped-seek operations. An overlapped
seek occurs when the drive is deselected 20 microseconds after
the last step pulse is sent. Another drive is then selected, and the
, -Step' and '-Direction In' signals are set by the operation
desired. The controller provides at least 100 nanoseconds of hold
time on '-Step' and '-Direction In' after '-Drive Select' is
deactivated.
August 31, 1984
Specifications
The following figures list the internal and performance
specifications of this drive.
Rotational speed
Cylinders
R/W Heads
Index
Internal Specifications
Formatted Capacity
Bytes/Sector
Sectors/Track
Transfer Rate
Access Time
Track-to- Track
Average
Maximum
Settling
Average Latency
Track Density
3573 rpm :to.5 %
615 + Landing Zone
4
1
20Mb
512
17
5M Bits/Second
2 ms
40 ms
85 ms
12 ms
8.4 ms
750 TPI
August 31, 1984
20M B Fixed Disk Drive (Sheet 1 of 4)
I
I
-- ....
.. !!! .. !!!
I
~
' + F ' ~
Ii
~
, . ~ . "
+Sy
:"1-
i g! i
..
=+=
! !
..
. .
~
-
o
('II
a;
Q)
..t:.
~
Q)
>
";:
c
~
" ~
C
"tJ
Q)
" ~
LL
m
:::iE
o
('II
August 31, 1984
>
=
(JQ
= (IJ
-

I-'

I-'
\C
oc
"'"

;;J
=
=
!.
n
=
51
'=
=
-
('D
..
>

=
::
=

('D
=-
t:::l
...
(IJ

t:::l

('D
I-'
..
-U'-:;::t
,
4-----,
,I IH
,

"
--,

20MB Fixed Disk Drive (Sheet 3 of 4)

-NITIUICIO"
:
".1 .. 1.1
'I'I'T
::
.-.
'"

i
,
,
,
-WOnoi===="
.1
+,m
... ,
'"
"
,."
ws"
...
.
"" '" 1 ...
20M B Fixed Disk Drive (Sheet 40f 4)
112
-POST' LOCI
7'-+-,,-_--_ --If7,-,:: Inl
'" I ...
"" 113+1'8ST''''0II
.14111 :14_PlST11IOT0II
'"
--- -
----
- ----
----
- - ---
- - - ---
-----
---,-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Personal
Computer AT 30MB
Fixed Disk Drive
August 15, 1985
Copyright IBM Corp. 1985
Notes:
August 15, 1985
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Interfaces ..................................... 1
Control Input Signals ........................ 2
Output Control Signals ....................... 4
Data-Transfer Signals ........................ 6
Overlapped Seek ............................ 7
Specifications .................................. 9
Logic Diagrams ................................ 10
August 15, 1985
iii
Notes:
iv
August 15, 1985
Description
The IBM Personal Computer AT 30MB Fixed Disk Drive is a
direct-access device that can store up to 30M of formatted data.
The average access time is 40 milliseconds using a servo
positioner.
Interfaces
The control interface is a 34-pin printed circuit board (PCB) edge
connector. The signals and pin assignments are as follows.
-Head select
3
2 1
-Head select 2 4
3
-Write gate 6
5
-Seek complete 8 7
-Track 000 10
9
-Write fault 12 11
Reserved 16 15
-Index 20 19
-Ready 22 21
-Step 24 23
-Drive select
3 32 31
-Direction in
34 33
Control Interface
August 15, 1985
Copyright IBM Corp. 1985 30MB Fixed Disk Drive 1
The data transfer interface is a 20-pin PCB connector. The
signals and pin assignments are as follows.
-Drive Selected 1
+MFM Write Data 13
-MFM Write Data 14
+MFM Read Data 17
-MFM Read Data 18
Grounds 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 11,
12, 15, 16, 19, 20
Reserved 3, 5, 7, 9
The dc power interface is a 4-pin PCB connector. The signals
and pin assignments are as follows.
Signal Name Pin
+12 Vdc 1
+12 Vdc Return 2
+5 Vdc Return
3
+5 Vdc 4
DC Power Interface
specifications.
Active: 0.0 to 0.4 Vdc at 40 rnA
Inactive: 2.5 to 5.25 Vdc at 0 rnA
August 15, 1985
-Write Gate
The active level of this signal allows data to be written on the
disk. The inactive level allows data to be read from the disk, and
allows the step pulse to move the heads.
-Head Select 0, 1, 2, and 3
These four signals enable the selection of each read/write head in
a binary-coded sequence. The '-head select 0' signal is the least
significant. Heads are numbered 0 through 15. When all
head-select signals are inactive, head 0 is selected.
-Direction In
, -step' is pulsed. An inactive level defines the direction as out,
and if a pulse is applied to '-step,' the read/write heads move
of the disk.
-Step
defined by the '-direction in' signal. The motion starts when the
'-step' signal changes from active to inactive (the trailing edge of
this signal pulse). Any change in '-direction in' is made at least
100 nanoseconds before the leading edge of the step pulse. This
drive supports two methods of stepping or seeking:
Slow Seek
August 15, 1985
The read/write heads move at the rate of
between successive steps is 3 milliseconds and
the minimum pulse width is 2 microseconds.
30MB Fixed Disk Drive 3
track). The drive starts motion of the heads
after receiving the first step pulse. Step pulses
are sent to the drive every 35 microseconds.
-Drive Select Signals 0, 1, 2, and 3
control lines. Making the appropriate jumper connections at the
drive determines which select line of the interface activates that
drive.
single I -drive select I signal. The signal lead that is terminated
selects the drive based on the position of the drive select jumpers.
The drive control signals are open collector outputs which can
sink a maximum of 40 rnA in the active state, with a maximum
output voltage of 0.4 Vdc. When the output is in the inactive
state, the collector's cutoff current is a maximum of 250
microamperes.
-Seek Complete
This signal goes active when the read/write heads settle on the
final track at the end of a seek. Reading or writing is not
attempted when I -seek complete' is inactive. The following
situations force I -seek complete I inactive:
read/write heads are not over track 0
When less than 2 microseconds have elapsed after the leading
edge of a step pulse or a series of step pulses
August 15, 1985
restored
If the drive attempts to retry a seek after settling on a track
The I -seek complete I signal returns to the active level no later
than 100 milliseconds (1 second if a seek retry occurs) after the
trailing edge of the last step pulse.
-Track 000
-Write Fault
switched off.
occur:
Write current exists in the head without I -write gate I active,
or no write current exists in the head with I -write gate I
active and I -drive select I active
More than one seek retry between Seek commands from the
controller
A step pulse is received while I -write gate I is active
An off track condition is detected while I -write gate I is
active
The I -write gate I signal is active when write is disabled by
the drive electronics
August 15, 1985
-Index
and goes active to indicate an index. Only the change from
-Ready
When this signal and I -seek complete I are active, the drive is
ready to read, write, or seek, and the I/O signals are valid. An
The I -ready I signal is inactive four times during drive operation:
At power-up time, I -ready I remains inactive until:
Spindle speed is stable within 0.2S% of nominal (10
Drive self-check is complete.
Spindle speed deviates O.S% of nominal (10 revolution
average).
The I -write fault I signal is active.
not multiplexed.
I write data I and I read data. I The following describes the
August 15, 1985
MFM Write Data
track. When '+ MFM write data' goes more positive than
'-MFM write data,' flux reverses on the track, provided that
'-write gate' is active. The system drives' -MFM write data' to
an active level ( , -MFM write data' more negative than '+ MFM
write data') when in the read mode.
MFM Read Data
'MFM read data' lines. When '+ MFM read data' goes more
positive than '-MFM read data,' flux reverses on the track of the
selected head.
Overlapped Seek
The drive supports overlapped-seek operations. An overlapped
seek occurs when the drive is deselected 20 microseconds after
the last step pulse is sent. Another drive is then selected, and the
, -step' and '-direction in' signals are set by the operation
desired. The controller provides at least 100 nanoseconds of hold
time on '-step' and '-direction in' after '-drive select' is
deactivated.
August 15, 1985
Notes:
August 15, 1985
Specifications
The internal specifications of this drive are listed in the BIOS
Fixed Disk Parameter Table, under "Real-Time Clock/CMOS
RAM Information" in Section 1 of the IBM Personal Computer AT
Technical Reference manual. The fixed disk type is on the defect
label on the drive.
August 15, 1985
...
=
(SH. 161 PEAK DEl 2
(SH. 161 PEAK DEl 1
(SH. 141 -POS FLTO
(SH. III -INJECTION
(SH.71
-ENBL ALIAS FLTR
R2l-l
10.2K
R2l-2
Il.7K
R2l-1
1l.7K
C2
75.F
-POSITION (SH. 141
+POSITION (SH. 21
L-_____ ~ (SH. 151
Rl
2.94K
C14 +6V
~ ~ ~ ________________ ~ ~ l _ 9 0 ~ O ~
30MB Fixed Disk (Sheet 1 of 18)
KEY:
.J. DIGITAL GROUND
\7L LOW LEVEL ANALOG GROUND
\7H HIGH LEVEL ANALOG GROUND
,.h FRAME GROUND
HLTRO POS (SH. 21
(SH.4)
(SH. I)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.5)
(SH.6)
(SH. ')
(SH.5)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.I)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
+CUR SNS OUT
+POSITION
+ZERO EST
+RETRACT
-(+AMP+OTT)
(+AMP On)
( AMP OTT)
( AMP+DTT)
-(+LR +OTT)
+LA OTT)
+1/2TR B.BBV
-LIN REG
1/2TR 3.31V
-AMPLIFY VEL
+AMPLlFYVEL
MIC(,),OS"
MIC(B)BUS BI
MIC(B)BUS B2
MIC B BUS 13
MIC(I)IUS B4
MIC B)BUS B5
MIC(B)BUS BB
MIC(B)BUS B7
-RO CNT
-lO CNT
+COMP ClK 1.5MHZ
+SETUP ClK
IX
SAM EST VEl
SAM EST POS
+fLTRO POS
+H PR AMP OT
-ENABLE CTR
+12V +6V
A"
"K
G. E7.G7
A2
"'.
E2 011 01
1.15K
B3
CHEX
I
TV
GZ H.
HI
G'
G3
C\3
G. .15,u.F
CI
J5
03 AI
J3
A"
F3
H3
IK
H.
F!
HZ
JI
JZ
G\ A10
C'
r.i-l
! t
AIO
24.IK
R72 200K
O.
CZ
71.5K
"
J.
"
",I

C'
J' "K
"
1000pF
G.

f7

J.
H'
GO
+T RI04
.. K
..
J7
H7
F8

H. C' 3

O.

8' -:: 474LS74
.3 A9
I
'7
C'
8.
87 J'
8.
+6V
+5.

I.
11
,
+BV
I2
U21
_
2
10 74lS74 I

\3
+6V
El C5, C7
O.
7 LM3B5
7414
AI. B9 Z-I.2

U19-3 +6V
,

V
I
I
CI7 +.V
270p
T
845 +12V
2.4K
-POS 1/2 TRK
+EST POS
POS .5TRK
NEG .5TRK
POS 1/4 TRK
NEG 1/4 TRK
DOWN
-CMPL(MIC I)
+VCM DRV IN
+ON TRACK
+CON REf9.5V
(SH.l1)
(SH.II)
(SH.13)
(SH.13)
(SH.13)
(SH.13)
(SH.l)
(SH. tI)
(SH.4)
(5H.13)
(SH.I1)
(SH.16)
@
('l

>
'<
C
::I.
(JC
g
C
.... [Il
I;tj
- s::
('l

0
'?
-
\C>
\0
QC
00
VI
'"
+12V
..
r
,
.25 OHM Kl
120-2 JW1% R8B 405 OHM
453 3400HM 18
5 H
UJ8-2 Raj
+5,
'11
"
-' U41-6 L
112 TNO-S07
ID' ,
U41-5 I U41 -1
,
TNO-SOl IlND-907
LJi l r
7 ' _J
u = .
(SH.6)1-+'-"::':";:;":':":':':::"'---------';' 30B6 ,
7 U6-! 1114-5 Y
_14116 1.1.2JLF 6.19K I I
19 184
L ___ ---l
,
(SH. 6) 4 V H L__ __J
V
U5
_
2
3
13
Ii:'
Ir'
f'
7406 A14-3
5 6 36.5K
UB-3
(SH.6) +SPINDLE OR2
740.
(5H.8)1-+"'::':";:;O':':":':':::"'--'_--'-' ,
AI4-4
13.2K
12
(SH.6) +ZERO CURR
(SH.9)
+RESET
(SH.5 I
+C COIL PUS
(SH.5 I
+A COil POS
(SH.5 I
+8 COIlPOS
(SH5
,
BCOILNEG
-A COIL NEG
(SH.5 I
(SH.S
)j-CCOllNEG
(SH.ll
) GEN1
UB-4
740'
11 10
U6-S
7406
R14-6
5.1K
+12V
-re31 TC4D +T +T I
AIS-3 t
g
!,
lK H 07
___ J' r j'N6'J4
14
U41-J U41-2 1I41-1
IND-901 TND-901 TND-B01
I 7426
11 10 12 U22-4

14LS14
13 f2
U206
14LSI4
5

:f
U1-3
14
1406
, ,
U1-1
R11-'
1= 7406 '9D
,

U1-2
A11-2
740. J9'
11 ID
U1-S
'i'
,
740.
V
U7
_
4
13 12 14..
U7-6
7406
R11-3
38'
+v

r
RIS-2
IK
RIB-I
38.
0'
RIB-2
[ i
O
""
H
O'
l
2N6031

R1B-3
J9'
[
OlD
t
2N6031
+INTERFACE ENBl.
I SH.l0)
+POWERGDOO
(SH.S)
(5H.-4)
(SH.I1)
GEN2
(SH.l1)
+VOICE COIL
:
(5H.4)
(SH.16)
-VOICE COIL
(5H.4)
COILB
(SH.16)
(SH.I1)
COILA
(SH.11)
COILe
(SH.l1)
-INTERFACE ENBl ISH. 9)
@
n
0
'0
'<

til

n
0
-?
::c;
00
u.
-
w
>
=
=
[IJ
-....
Y'
....

00
til
RJ1-Z
4.75K
RlI-! Rll-4 A
+-'_'_' ____ -+_'._OK___ -"s-S ni034

U40.' : 3046 s-r
TNO-907 L-1"-------- iii-"
U40-5 U40-3
R32-'
50
TNO-90I TNO907 Rl2.]
I ,3
9 { : Q ]046 I +-,______ 1>+,_"+ I-+-+--t-D

rn7 I r I
R6S 2 R6S I TNO-90l TNO 907 L __________ J
+VCM DRV IN 499 499 8 10 1 I
(SH. 2) C19
I
I
;:l2N6D]7
(SH.3ll--'-+-"PO"w,,'... ''''GO''''''-'_____ +--_--, 100
14 - : RJO-l
:99
R1'
887
3046 I,
3.741< '"';r

RJl-3 L_
1.82K 1.0K
H H
(SH
R1
5 OHM
l/2w
H
R7
27'
1/2W
(SH. ___________ t-___________________ +------t---'
-t:
:
51V4
)U<>""'-'----'
7406
l
(SH.71 I--"+..,,"'-'.''''RA''''''-_____ + ____ --'-I' ;,,-, ------------------+-----'--
U9-3
7406
U9-2
7406
r:'=1
n15
l+
6V
2N6DJ7 R92
RJ4 4.75K U5-3
II< 10 LMJ24
9' >"-'-r+"C"'U"-' ",SN",S-,,''''U'-+ (SH.2)
R9'
"
OHM I R93
l!2W ..
H
....
...
~ (SH.13)
=
(SH. &J
3:
(SH.6)
(SH.6)
=
(SH.7)
~
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
~ .
(SH.7)
~ (SH.12)
=-
(SH.7)
~
(SH. II
...
(SH.7)
-TOL DIFTRk LTH
WRITE(A)
READ(A)
HPt
WRITE(B)
READIS)
MIC(8)8US 86
+ZERO EST
+SEEK OUT
MIC(BIBUS 85
+TDClK
+SETL/TRKFOl
~
~
:l.
(SH.8)
+Tl eLK
~
~ (SH.6)
(SH.ll)
(SH.I1)
(SH.lI)
(SH.10)
(SH.IO)
(SH.l0)
HI OUT
+SZOUT
+SJ OUT
+ORV SEL{Gf)
+HD SLo
+HDSLf
+HDSL2
(SH.13)
(SH.13)
(SH.13)
(SH.13)
(SH.13)
(SH.16)
(SH.l0)
@
(SH.l0)
()
(SH.16)
-POS .25 TRK LTH
NEG .25 TRK LTH
POS .5 TRK LTH
NEG .5 TRK LTH
+PLO GATE LTH
+SERVO CLK2
I +WRITE GATE
-WRITE FAULT
AE ERROR
.g
;> (SH.13)
'<
=
(SH.7)
:l.
eg.
(JCI
(SH.12)
=
(SH.13)
63
(I)
(SH.l0J
....
+ON TRK LTH
+AMPLIFY VEL
OFF TRACK
+ALE(B) LTH
+STEP
::: ....
('l
!Jl
0
'? ....
-
\C
'"
QC
CO
(Jt
V.
+.v
E307 E7
01 EI
G.
""
D3
J
PIXDZ
fI
J7
GOLF
J2 MODULE EO
J" 1614487 AS
CO
AS
" AI H.
J. H"
.2
C2
E"
R
F2
02 A3
J3 84
~
B3
JI C4
J9 81
"

C8
8' F7
.. H7
87
" C7 G8
G7
02 J6
82 .6
E2 GI
HI DO
86 08
A9
.9
"

f3
G9 A4
G4
C3 .3
CI
03
" .7
C5 CHI 66
-
+MIC LIN REG
UN REG
TRK INTHPT
FAULT ERROR
GUARD BAND
-LO tNT
RD CNT
+LO UMBO
-(+AMP-DTI)
(+AMP+OTI)
(+LR+DTTj
(+LR OTT)
( AMP OTT)
( AMP +OTT)
-Olf TRK TVP
+INDEX GATED
+A COIL POS
A COIL NEG
+8 COIL POS
B COIL NEG
+C COIL POS
C COIL NEG
+INDEX GATED
E.
STEP PULSE
+HD SEL Z
+HD SEL Y
-STEP PULSE
+HD SEL X
+MOSLI
+MOSL2
+COMP CLK 1.5MHZ
+SETUP CLK
(SH.7)
(SH.II)
(SH.2)
(SH.7)
(SH.1I)
(SH.6)
(SH.7)
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
(SH.I2)
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
(SH.7)
(SH. II)
(SH.3)
(SH.3)
(SH.3)
(SH.3)
(SH.3)
(SH.3)
(SH.ID)
(SH.O)
(SH.12)
(SH.16)
(SH.16)
(SH.6)
(SH.16)
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
,---
~
39
38
J7
ISH. 8)
+12 MHZ
18 38
35
-EA
31 3'
33
ISH. 5)
ISH. 9)
+RESET
9 32
r,-----
2
3

+L
5
.0 6
7
UI.
8
r
MICRO A
:JJI/J2 "
CABLE 22
INTERLOCK
23
2.
JI-16
JZ-7
25
~
27
28 3
~
=
3:
t:=
~
11
12
?-
~
15
~
~ ISH. 5)
=-
~
ISH. 5)
ISH. 12)
16
17
-STEP PULSE
'---
-FAULT ERROR 12
WRITE INHIBIT 13
11
U29-4
a:
ISH. 1)
ISH. 11)
~
ISH. 12)
:I.
ISH. 10)
~
ISH. 10)
~ ISH. 7)
+TXB-RXA 74LS08
LED-'
OFF TRACK
+WRITE GATE
+STEP
+TRACK 0
....
(II

A80-2 +t
V
IK
U25-2
1407
+5V
"
Ii'- 2
RBD-l +t
V
IK
Vo25-1
+5V
1 1407
L A4B-3
IK
+SEEK COMPLETE
+READY
DRIVE SEL 3
DRIVE SEL 3
DRIVE SEL 4
DRIVE SEL 4
DRIVE SEL 2
DRIVE SEL Z
+BUSY
I SH.12)
I
I
I
SH.IO)
SH.11)
JI-30
J'-32
SII. 11)
JZ-l
I
I
Jl-Z8
SH.l1)
SH.1)
+WRITE FAULT (
+DIRECT IN I
SH.ID)
SH.ID)
SH.3)
SH.3)
SH.3)
SH.3)
SH.l1)
+SPINDLE DRI
I
+SPINDLE DHZ
I
+SPINDLE DRJ
+SPINDlE DR4
I
+HOLD LATCH
I
I
+TXA-RXB (
+SI OUT I
SH.1)
SH.6)
SH.l1)
+ZERO CURR
WRITEIA)
READIA)
+TPI
+TPI
I
I
I
I
I
SH.3)
SH.5)
SH.5)
SH.5)
TPI
....

(SH.l0)
ISH. 51
(SH.5)
(SH.6)
=
(SH.6)

ISH. 51
C!:l
(SH.2)
+WRITE GATE
-GUARD BAND
+MIC LIN REG
+TXA-RX8
+SUSY
I
-DiF TRK TYP
CMPL(MIC B)

(l>
Co

0
ISH. 'I
+12 MHZ 18

0

::l.
ISH. 91
-<
+RESET 9
(l>
L
40

@
('l
0
>
'"

=
g
(J'Q
=
sa
'"
- ....
(SH.5)
-TRK INTRPT
('l
-Y' 0
'? ....
\0
'0
00
00
VI u.
,--------
"15
30
MICRO B
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
31

3
4
It--
6
7
,

22
23
24
25
26
27
28

11
12

lli
13

I V 14 7407
Rh
R48-1
16
" 17
'-----
5 6
R44-3 T +sv
U25-4
IK
7407
MIC(B)8US 80
MIC(B)8US 81
MIC(S)8US 82
MIC(BlBUS 83
MIC(B)8US 84
MIC(B)8US 85
MIC(Bl8US 86
MIC(8)8US 87
+8 ALE
MIC(S)8US SO
MIC(S)8US 81
MIC(BlSUS 82
MIC(BlaUS 83
MIC(BlBUS 84
MIC(B)8US 85
MIC(BIBUS 86
MIC(B)8US 87
MIC(D)DUS 86
MIC(S)8US 85
+SETL/TAKFDL
-ENBt ALIAS FLTR
TGt OfF TRK
+TRACK 0
+ZERO EST
+ZERO EST
SAM EST VEL
SAM EST BIA
SAM EST POS
1X
+H PH AMP or
ENABLE eTR
+TRACK 0
+TX8-RXA

AMPLIFY VEL
U18-2 +AMPLIFY VEL
7414
.r:
WRITE(B)
READ(B)
+RETRACT
L
I
(SH.12)
ISH. 121
(SH.12)
(SH.12)
(SH.12)
ISH. 21
ISH. 21
(SH.12)
ISH. 131
ISH. 21
ISH. 21
ISH. 21
ISH. 21
ISH. 2)
ISH. 51
ISH. 'I
ISH. 21
(SH.12)
ISH. 121
ISH. 111
ISH. 51
ISH. 11
ISH. 131
ISH. tol
ISH. 21
ISH. 51
ISH. 21
ISH. 21
ISH. 21
ISH. 21
(SH.2)
ISH. 61
ISH. 61
ISH. 21
ISH. 21
ISH. 51
(8H.11)
ISH. 51
(SH.5)
(SH.4)
(SH.2)
(SH.11)
-
......
24.0 MHZ-XTL
+5V
+5V
14
Xl
R4B-2
lK
R96
100
C3B
12700PF
+5V
14

+5V
L---_____ -----j (SH. 7)
4
__
____________ -,-+-"TO=-",CL",K'--_-j (SH. 5)
+5V
IC43
74LS04
U21-2
U29-2
74LSOB
1
56PF
L----------------'-"l
______ +-,--T,-,I--,C",L,,-K_--I (SH. 5)
U29-3
74LSOB
L-----------J (SH. 13)
...
QO

=

=

...

tD
=-
t::I
...

t::I

tD
@
(")
.g
>
'::i =
_.
=
S
III
-
g::
I-'
(")
!Jl
0
'? ...
-
\C
10
QO
00
U"I
'"
+12V
+BV
R66-1
200
RSl CNlRl U38-3
ISH. 15)
lPn-2907
CR3
CR13
DT
BLS ZENER
7.7V
U45-1
lPn-6502
R90
820
R35-4
U40-1
10K
lND-907
R36
10K
R1D3
4.7K
Rl05
332
----<
R3
698
R35-2
510
8
------
,
6'
+12V
R37-1
390
R35-3
4.3K
11
--,
,
'9
.
U41-4
lND-907
R35-5
lOOK
C20
20p.F
+BV
U45-3
lPn-6502
R68
2.0K
R3b-5
10K
R37-3
390
12
+6V
Rl03-2
4.7K
R67
lK
U8
3086
+12V
R59-1
10K
U5-2
lM324
ISH. 3) _____ _
ISH. 3)
R59-2
10K
+RESET
ISH. 3)
ISH. 6)
ISH. 7)
,
I U39-J
I lPQ-650Z
_____ 8 ______ j
(SH.3)
+INTERFACE ENBl.
(SH.&)
+DIRECT IN
(SH.7)
+TRACKO
!SH.12 I
+SEEKCMPL.
(SH.6)
+READY
(SH.ll I
+DRV SEL(GF)
(SH.6 I
+WRITEFAULT
!SH.5 I
+INDEX GATED
+5'
R46-! .-_________________________________ -""""'AO'-'."""''''-_-o JI-4
t-----__ JI,,",.51
U20-4
74LSI4 r-_________________________ (SH.lli)
R46-1
JJO
+5.
10
9
R46-2
220
__ ISH. 7)
t------- I'" 'I
'\:"'u,-o.-,--------------------------t------ ::: :::
74LSI4 __ (SH.5)
+5.
R44-2
IK
'n
U22-3
742.
.-______________________
4 (SH.5)
+5V U20-2
B
R46-3
JJO
U18-4
7414
74LSI4
R4S-4
220
,-_________________ -.!!"""A"'0"'''''''--'-'_-----<>JI_18
tl U:0.3
74lS14
R48-5
'20
+HD SL1
(SH.5)
.-____________ __ ---o Jl.24
+5'
t---------,+.:_'-l'3 _______ _._-+'-'."'T'''-P------i (SH.6)
+5V U186 (SH.5)
R46-5
JJO
R46-7
220

R46-7
JJO

1
, ,.
3
,
7
U17
" _ 7438
- .
5
U19-3
743.
9 B

U19-4
12
7438
13
11
7414
R46-6
22D
R46-6
JJO

U17-2
7438
B
Ul'-3
9
7438
10
B

U18-5
7414
U17-4
12
13
7438
11
-DIRECT IN
HEAD SEll
TRACK 0
SEEK CMPL.
READY
DRIVE SEL
WRITE FAULT
WRITE FAULT
INDEX
-0
JI-34
JI-2
JI-ID
JI-8
JI-22
J2-1
JI-12
(SH.5)
JI-2D
@
(J
.g
>

=
(JCI
=
53

- s::: ....
(J
Y'
0
-? ....
:0
\C
00
OC
'"
Ul
JI-26 -DRIVESELI
(SH.6) -DRIVESEL2
(SH.6) -DRIVESELJ
(SH.6) -DRIVE SEL4
(SH. I) +HDLD LATCH
(SH.J) +POWER GOOD
(SH.B) +S10UT
(SH.3)
COilB
(SH.3)
(SH.3)
(SH.J)
(SH.17)
(SH.7)
(SH.l)
(SH.2)
(SH.14)
{SH.2}
(SH.2)
(SH.l)
(SH.5)
{SH,5)
(SH.2)
(SH.5)
COILA
COILC
GEN 2
+GATE2
+AMPLlFYVEL
+SETL/TRKFOL
+ONTRACK
POSHTD
+ESTPDS
-POS1/2TRK
+RETRACT
+INOEX GATED
TRK INTRPT
+VCM DRV IN
+MIC UN REG
I DBDAlD
D5DA3D
D4DAJD
OJDAlD
D20A30
DtOAlO
DDOAlD
C90AlO
P5
J4
R66-J
200
+5V
R47-1
220
+5V
+5V
L-____ t2

'1' 8
7 2

R47-4
33.
r"
1_
-= t.OK
DIDABD
D50A6D
04DAID
D30A60
D2DAIO +BV
DtOA6D
DOUA6D
U6-6
7408
1.0K

1
1.0K

LED-t
-LED-I (SH.6)
+ORVSEL(GF) (SH.6)
(SH. 10)
GENt
+S20UT
+S30UT
INJECTION
(SH.J)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.I)
(SH.15)
@
n
0
'tl
'<

@

n
0
?
'0
00
u.
N
I-'
>
=
I)Ci
=
'"
-I-'

I-'

00
til
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH.5)
MIC(B)BUS B7
MIC(B)BUS B6
MIC(B)BUS B5
MIC(B)BUS B4
MIC(B)BUS B3
MIC(B)BUS B2
MIC(B)BUS Bl
MIC(B)BUS BO
+LO OMOO
(SH. 5) -STEP PULSE
(SH. 6) +SEEK COMPLETE
+5V
3-2
4
7
UI6
74LS374
8
13
14
17
18
11
...l!!

+5V
R44-2
lK +5V
14
13
10 U23-2
12 74LS74
5
6
9
12
15
16
19
+5V
U29-1
74SLS08
1
+ENABLE NOTCH
+SEEK OUT
WRITE INHIBIT
-OFF TRACK
+OEMO GN B3
+OEMO GN B2
+OEMO GN Bl
+OEMO GN BO
(SH.14)
(SH.5)
(SH.6)
(SH.5)
(SH.6)
(SH.16)
(SH.16)
(SH.16)
(SH.16)
'--________ __ (SH. 10)
N
N
(SH.7)
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
(SH.7)
(SH.8)
(SH.17)
-TGL DIF TRK
-POS.5 TRK
-NEG .5 TRK
+ON TRACK
-POS 1/4 TRK
-NEG 1/4 TRK
+B ALE
+T1 CLK
+GATE 1
+5V
3 2
4 5
7 6
8
U24
9
13
74LS374
12
14 15
17 16
11 19
c...?ll.
~
~
18
-TGL DIF TRK LTH
-POS .5 TRK LTH
-NEG .5 TRK LTH
+ON TRK LTH
-pos .25 TRK LTH
-NEG .25 TRK LTH
+ALE(B) LTH
+PLO GATE LTH
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
@
>-
(')
= 0 IJel
'0
=
'"
g.
-....
5a
s::
....
(')
I.C
0
-?
00
til
:0
00
U>
ISH. 12} f--'+:co,,,,.,,,AB,,,l,-'
R50-2
(SH. 1) --<>-'-'10
R51-1
10K
RSl-2
10K
14
+5V
U30-3
R43-2 DG212
1K
10 ,
,
- J
"
C1
4700pF
U30-4
11
(SH. 1)
(SH.1t)
(SH.l0)
(SH.l0)
(SH.l)
(SH.l1)
(SH.16)
(SH.16)
-WRITE GATE
+WRITE GATE
+POSITIDN
-INJECTION
PEAK DET 2
PEAK DET 1
+5V
R47-2
590
R47-3
169
+5V
+5V
R95
R97
2K
2K
14
-WRITE GATE AE7
(SH.16)
U2-3
MC3302 U22-2
7426
+12V
+5V
R62-2
R62-1
10K
560
+RD/-WRT SEL TR
(SH.16)
U22-1
7426
+6V STRESS CONNECTOR
l C40BDD
C40A90 0
C40A80 0
C4DA70 RST CNTRL
C40A60
(SH.9)
C4DA5D
C4DA4D
C40A3D
(SH.ID)
Jl-13
(SH.15)
J2-17
(SH.3)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.5)
(SH.17)
(SH.17)
(SH.12)
(SH.12)
(SH.12)
(SH.12)
(SH.2)
(SH.3)
(SH. IS)
0
+WRITE GATE
+MFM WT DATA
-WRITE GATE AE7
+MFM RD DATA
+VDICE CDIL
+HD SELX
+HD SEL Z
+HD SEL Y
+GATE I
+GATE 2
+DEMD GN BO
+DEMD GN BI
+DEMD GN B2
+DEMD GN B3
+CDN REF9.5V
VDICE CDIL
+RD/ WRT SEL TR
J6
AI

Al Bl
A3
0 0-

A4
0
B4
A5
0 0-

A6 B6
A7
0 0
B7
A6 B8

A9
0-
ru-
0 0
BID
AID
All
0
BII
+llV, All
0
0
81l
AI3 BI3
L
AI4 BI4
AI5
0 0
BI5
AI6
0 0
B16
A17
0 0-

AI8 818
AI9
0-

AlO
0 0
810
f--<>
Bli
All
0-

A23
0 0
Al4
0
B24 L
Al5 B25
+l2V, A26 826
Al7

A2B 0

+SERVD CLK l
PEAK DEl l
-MFM WT DATA
-MFM RD DATA
SERVD AGC DUTPUT
AE ERRDR
PEAK DEl I
(SH.5)
(SH. I)
(SH. IS)
J2-14
J2-18
(SH.17)
(SH.5)
(SH. I)
(SH. IS)
(SH. 16) I SERVO AGC OUTPUT
@
C46
.ll'f
)
R40
2.15K
+6V
R9B
4.02K
C4B
100pF
R99
C49 20K
1DOpF
Rl00
169
U34
Lf351N
Rl0l
2K
R102
4.99K
11
220,uH
C50
820pF
+12V +5V
R43-1
lK
__ +,-,G",A",TE,-,I'----l(SH. 13)
U32 L--------l(SH.16)
LM319N
R43-2
lK
o'-'-_ ..... ______ -.-__ ...!+-"G"'AT"'E.!.2_-iISH.16)
"-------1 ISH. 11)
+12V
IC27

+5V
IC36

+5V
IC28

Notes:
August 15, 1985
2830MB Fixed Disk Drive Copyright IBM Corp. 1985
--- -
----
- ----
- ---
- - ---
- -- ---
-----
-----
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
mM 64/256KB Memory
Expansion Option
and
64KBMemory
Module Kit
6361488
ii
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Switch-Configurable Start Address .............. 2
Specifications .................................. 5
Logic Diagrams ................................. 7
iii
iv
Description
The 64KB Memory Module. Kit and the 64/256KB Memory
Expansion Option are available for the IBM Personal Computer
family of products. Depending upon the amount of memory
currently installed on the system board, memory module kits can
be added to provide a maximum of 256KB of RAM without using
any of the system unit expansion slots for a memory expansion
option. The system board must be populated to the maximum
256KB of RAM before a 64/256KB Memory Expansion Option
can be installed.
The IBM 64/256KB Memory Expansion Option has four banks
of nine pluggable sockets. Each bank will accept a 64KB
Memory Module Kit, consisting of 9 (64 K by 1) modules with
16-pin industry-standard parts. The base 64/256K expansion
option comes with modules installed in bank 0, providing 64K of
memory. The kits must be installed sequentially into banks 1, 2,
and 3. The following chart shows how the 64KB Memory
Module Kit can be installed on the system board and the
64/256KB Memory Expansion Option.
Number of Memory
Minimum Maximum 64KMemory Module
Memory Memory Module Kits Type
64/256K 64K 256K 1, 2, or 3 64K by 1 Bit,
System Board 16 pin
64/256K 64K 256K 1, 2, or 3 64K by 1 Bit,
Memory Option 16 pin
In addition to the memory modules, the memory expansion option
contains the following circuits: bus buffering, dynamic memory
timing generation, address multiplexing, and card-select decode
logic.
Dynamic-memory refresh timing and address generation are
functions that are performed by the system board and made
available in the I/O channel for all devices.
Memory Expansion Options 1
The 64/256KB Memory Expansion Option is parity checked. If a
parity error is detected, a latch is set and an I/O 'channel check'
line is activated, indicating an error to the microprocessor.
To allow the system unit to address the expanded memory
provided by the 64KB Memory Module Kit or the 64/256K
Memory Expansion Option, refer to the Guide to Operations
manual for the proper memory-expansion-option switch settings.
Switch-Configurable Start Address
The 64/256KB Memory Expansion Option must be configured to
reside at a sequential64K memory address boundary within the
system address space. This is done by setting dual-in-line
package (DIP) switches on the option. The 64/256KB expansion
option has a small DIP module containing eight switches. The
switches are used to set the card start address as follows:
Number 64/256K Options
1 ON: A19=0; OFF: A19= 1
2 ON: A18=0; OFF: A18= 1
3 ON: A17=0; OFF: A17= 1
4 ON: A 16 = 0; OFF: A 16 = 1
5 ON: Select 64K
6 ON: Select 128K
7 ON: Select 192K
8 ON: Select 256K
DIP Module Start Address
2 Memory Expansion Options
The following method can be used to determine the switch settings for the
64/256K memory expansion option.
Starting Address = xxxK
= Decimal value
64K IxxxK
Convert decimal value to binary
Bit ...... 3 2 0
Bit value 8 4 2 1
Switch
1 234 5 6 7 8
~ [
l
[
Amount of memory
installed on option
256K
192K (on=logicaI1)
128K
64K
bit
o
2 (off = logical 1)
3
The system board operates at a frequency of 4.77 MHz, which
results in a clock cycle of 210 ns.
Normally four clock cycles are required for a bus cycle so that an
840-ns memory cycle time is achieved. Memory-write and
memory-read cycles both take four clock cycles, or 840 ns.
Access and cycle times for memory used on the 64/256 Memory
Expansion Option are:
64K by 1 Bit
Access 200ns
Cycle 345ns
The 64K by 1 modules require only one voltage level of +5 Vdc,
and require 128 refresh cycles every 2 ms. Absolute maximum
access times are:
64K by 1 Bit
From RAS 200ns
From CAS 115 ns
Specifications
64K by 1 Bit Module
Pin (used on 64/256K option
and 64/256K
system board)
1 N/C
2 Data In* *
3 -Write
4 -RAS
5 AO
6 A2
7 A1
8 -5Vdc
9 A7
10 A5
11 A4
12 A3
13 A6
14 Data Out * *
15 -CAS
16 GND
17 *
18 *
*64K by 1 bit modules have 16 pins.
* *Data In and Data Out are tied
together on Data Bits 0-7
(three state bus).
Memory Module Pin Configuration
+';Y
RN2 16
(4) Alq
(4) A18
(4) .0.17
(4) Alb
NLSI18

r+ B
__________________________________ (2) CAS TIMING "i:
(4) OACK 0
(2) RAS TIMING
V. 7
V7
+'iV
GNO

10; 474508
2 ...2...JUll) &
t:t L-/
II I.r- 1
YO;
"'SO,
10 U n )o"8__________________
GNO Vee
8 I.
.... +')V ....!...r-.... II
II lu
L-______________________________
64/256KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 1 of 4)

Q
(JQ _.

_.

(JQ
"'"l

CD SR DEC (2)
a
rIJ.
co SEl DEC )2)
CiS1 )3,
C""A"S2 )3,
CAST )"
CAS 0
)2,
RAS , )3,
RA52 )3,
RiSi )21
RASO )2)
Rfo )2)
",,,
00
"
'"
'"
'"
'"
"
.,
+'iDC

AO(l!I
- AI (2)
- A21al
- 121
- A"121
- (21
- AI> 121
-
"
.,
iiEI2J

In (31
'" PI
'" PI
" .,
., .,
IIOCH(K(41

RASTIMING (1)
3:
!'D
e
~
g

{I}
...
8
0
'=
e.
i
IoC
111 RAS 2
(1) CAS2
(2) AO
(2) AI
121 A2
(2) .,
(2) ,lit
121 Ali
(2) At>
(2) A7
(21 WE
(1) RA5 1
(1) CAS '3
12'
DO
12'
DI
12. D2
12. D'
12.
'" I"
'"
I"
Ob
I"
D7
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PIN 2 ~
'"
POUT
U"
2._ DD
"D
."
DI
'"
.14 DZ
U'<Z 2.IIt D'
'"
2,1'+
""
"".
2.1't
f-
'"
U", 2.'
f- Ob
It RAS OIN 2.IIt
f-
D7
~ (AS ~
f-
!. ,0.0
f-
n ! ~ - ~
,4k- AI.! (9X)
1*,0.<; ~ BANK 2
\ -'t- Ab
q A7 f--
'3 WE
'---
PIN 2 ~
'"
POUT
U2 .. DD
"'
Z.'
DI
UI7 2.11+ D2
UlB
2.IIt D'
UI' Z.'
'"
U"
2.1'"
f-
Il<
U," 2.1'1 f-
Ob
. 2.'
I-- D7
"
HAS.. DIN/
.
~
~ S oro f-
AI U'37
I-
AZ
.,
f-
\ ~
..
f-
(9X)
.. BANK,
\-%- .b
, .7
f-
WE
'---
PIN
PIN {2J
(7'tLSII PINS 9,10)
POUT (2)
(7'tLSll PIN 'i)
"64-256Ke
AOI HEM. CO. ."
EDGE CON .,0
A29
A28
AL7
A2.
A2'
A24
A20
A22
A21
ALO
AI9
AI.
AI7
AI.
A"
AI4
m
AI2
A09
AD.
A07
AD.
AD'
AD4
AD'
A02
819
.11
.,2
+SV
(10 BO"1
80'
fl+ f
f f f f f
!+
+SV +SV
+! :1
t t t t t t t t T 831
OND ONO
801 T
f f+ f
~
*
t t t t I 1+ 829 I 1 1 1 I I i I I 829
+OV +SV
c. 810
OND
ONO
+ov
'---
+SV
J+
T f
t + f + t
AD (2)
AI (2)
A2 (2)
Ai (2)
A4 (2)
AC) (2)
At. (2)
A7 (2)
A8 (2)
ACJ (2)
AID (2)
All (2)
AI2 (2)
AI, (2)
AI4 (2)
AI"} (2)
Alb (1)
AI1 (1)
AlB (1)
AI9 (1)
DO (2)
DI (2)
02 (2)
0"1 (2)
04 (2)
DC) (2)
Db (2)
07 (2)
DACKO (1)
MEMW (2)
HEMR (2)
TO TTL
ONO
TO RAM'S
--- -
----
- ----
----
- - ---
Personal Computer
- -- ---
----- --_.-
IBM 256KB Memory
Expansion Option
6138355
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Switch-Configurable Start Address .............. 2
Voltage Requirements ...................... " 4
Specifications .................................. 5
Logic Diagrams ................................. 7
iii
Notes:
iv
Description
The IBM 256KB Memory Expansion Option is available for the
IBM Personal Computer family of products. The system board
must be populated to the maximum 256KB of RAM before the
IBM 256KB Memory Expansion Option can be installed.
The IBM 256KB Memory Expansion Option has four pluggable
sockets. Each socket will accept a 64KB Memory Module,
consisting of one (64K by 9) 32-pin D RAM Module. The
256KB expansion option comes with all four modules installed
providing 256KB of memory.
In addition to the memory modules, the memory expansion option
contains the following circuits: bus buffering, dynamic memory
timing generation, address repowering, and card-select decode
logic.
Dynamic-memory refresh timing and address generation are
functions that are performed by the system board and made
available in the I/O channel for all devices.
The 256KB Memory Expansion Option is parity checked. If a
parity error is detected, a latch is set and an I/O 'channel check'
line is activated, indicating an error to the microprocessor.
To allow the system unit to address the expanded memory
provided by the IBM 256KB Memory Expansion Option, refer to
the Guide to Operations manual for the proper
memory-expansion-option switch settings.
256KB Memory Expansion Option 1
Switch-Configurable Start Address
The 256KB Memory Expansion Option must be configured to
reside at a sequential 64KB memory address boundary within the
system address space. This is done by setting dual-in-line
package (DIP) switches on the option. The IBM 256KB Memory
Expansion Option has a small DIP module containing eight
switches. The switches are used to set the card start address as
follows:
Number 256KB Options
1 ON: A19=O; OFF:A19=1
2 ON: A18=O; OFF:A18=1
3 ON: A17=O; OFF:A17=1
4 ON: A16=O; OFF:A16=1
5 ON: Select 64KB
6 ON: Select 128KB
7 ON: Select 192KB
8 ON: Select 256KB
DIP Module Start Address
2 256KB Memory Expansion Option
The following method can be used to determine the switch settings for the
256KB memory expansion option.
Starting Address = xxxKB
= Decimal value
64KB xxxKB
Convert decimal value to binary
Bit .......... 3 2 1 0
Bit value .... 8 4 2 1
Switch
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0"-
r- r- r-
DODD
N
t
bit
o
2 (off = logical 1)
3
The system board operates at a frequency of 4.77 MHz, which
results in a clock cycle of 210 ns.
Normally four clock cycles are required for a bus cycle so that an
840-ns memory cycle time is achieved. Memory-write and
memory-read cycles both take four clock cycles, or 840 ns.
Access and cycle times for memory used on the IBM 256KB
Memory Expansion Option are:
Time. 256KB Card
Access 290 ns
Cycle 840 ns
Access/Cycle Times
Voltage Requirements
The IBM 256KB Memory Expansion card requires 3 voltage
levels: + 12Vdc, +5Vdc, and -5Vdc.
Specifications
This is the pin side view of the IBM 64KB 32-Pin 0 RAM Module.
J9 H9 G9 F9 E9 09 C9 B9 A9 V Beveled Edge
000000000
-------------------
J8
0 0 A8
J7
0 0
A7
J6
0
0
A6
J5
0 0 A5
J4
0
0
A4
J3
0
o
A3
J2
0 0
A2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
J1 H1 G1 F1 E1 01 C1 B1 A1
Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
A1 04 B9 A14 J8 A1 B1 +8.5 Vdc
A2 03 C9 A09 J7 AO C1 -2.2 Vdc
A3 02 09 A11 J6 A7 01 05
A4 01 E9 A12 J5 A5 E1 06
A5 DO F9 A13 J4 A3 F1 07
A6 CS G9 RS J3 A2 G1 D8
A7 OG 8 H9 A10 J2 A4 H1 +5Vdc
A8 OGA J9 A06 J1 GNO
A9 A8
The +8.5. +5 and -2.2Vdc are developed on the 256KB Memory
E ~ a n s i o n Adapter.
IBM 64KB Memory Module Pin Configuration
Notes:
JI

'... 6
+ OACKO PWD
+ DACKO AI) {21
0
(JQ _.

(2.3)
OOD PARITY Il)
.-...
(3)
- SELECT (2)
_ .
SELECT (2)

(JQ
...

a

rLJ.
lEMA 812 DG (2)
, ,
13'
,.
GO'> -AS
, , MOD 0,2
, ,
, ,
, ,
"
,.
GO'> -AS
, , NOD 1.3
'---------""l,u, '!><..:--------------------'
256KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 1 of 3)
ao
'SV

1
A7

AO PWRO
, ,
UI
RNI I
,

J07 8.2K :
,
'SV 'SV RN2
="
,
30 n

A6
""'. 3
A6 PRW[)
16 51 1
3 S 2
"
I.
13 11 161---11

J09 lS 12 I 11 12 U12
I
,
A06 MOO 2
fE2
I 11 2

I
,
::
AS .,..
AS b
'3 U12 8
101 '7
JOS I. 3 2 10 3

ADe. MOD I

UlS
,
I
407<

A. """"
13 3

,
I
.. U" 7IfSI38
11' I.
!

J02 .,..5 12 S 13
,-------?
7 A06 MOD 0
"""
, ,
400'

A3 PRJ<)
. 11

0
..:'-

, ,
A' I.' '3
JO'

.-------2
IS A06 MOD 3
t!I!J
40 40.'

A2 PRWD
rl
= 8 +5V +5V 1.I'7'l-LS08 ___ 1
J03

-=
- SE1.ECT (1)
11
A30'
AI PRI<)
1921<8 sa Lj. U7 U'+ .. OACKO PHD (I)
'J NLSOO I
AI

i.
JOO 1281<B SEL
r I
.. SELECT (Jl
61.j.KB SEL
AO
.,,,
A7PRWD
J06
JlJ
4- U20 74L532
g
AI' AlS
I.
AI7 AI.
-OGA
S"Y
A08 MOD 3
0
AIO
A"
... A'2
.. CD SEL DEC
1"7
'=

'SV

g
AO 403<

AS PRWD
"
I.
12 Ci55EL1iEC: U8
-DGA 3
ADS MOD 2
AO, I

7

11 10
.. A22 ,

12 12 U2

-DGA 2
A9 PRW[)
CO. 74-50'+
ADa MOD I
AIO A2' ,
74-LS04. 1<+532

-DGA 1
13 U21 11
AIO PRWD ADa MOD 0
HO.

,
All
420'

All PRWl)

-DGB Lj.
A07 MOO 3
DO.

AI2 A'9<

11 -DGB 3
S UIS 6
A12 PRIIID
EO'
'2 U8 AD? MOD 2

A" AIO'
, 11 -DGB 2
11 Al3 PRJ>.{) 12 us AO? MOD I
12 UI8 FO,

At< A17 ,

AIL!- PRWD
, I.
00. 3 -OGB 1
2 U8 'NLS32
A07 MOD 0
AIS A" ,

AI5 PRWD
'1-
7
L.,-
(1) OG
MIllo
MIll I
MIllO
MOD 3
MOD'S
O-J
III
DO
O.
D2
OJ
DO
OS
DO
D7
10 ODD
GOI ==3 GOI
GOI
GOI
DO
r
01
AO'!
AD>
D2
A02
OJ
DO
.0'
DO'
OS
EO'
DO
FO'
07
_T
-
...
I.e 7
6

...

PARITY
9 .. ---,.
to
,

,.
"
.

to
,.
>
.. , , .
..
,
1._--"
RN3
JOo
'SV
'NLSI25A
..
0 5 5 .,.

8

U19

'0 U7
II ....... ........

'NL508
I

FOOTPRINT CF IMCRY tIlOl.I..E
(VIEWED 'TI-ROU(i-I 11 MODU..E)
Notes:
10 256.KB Memory Expansion Option
--- -
----
- ----
----
- - ---
- - - ---
-----
--_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
128KB Memory
Expansion Option
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Memory Cycles ............................. 1
110 Channel Check ......................... 1
Addressing ................................ 1
Specifications .................................. 2
Voltage Tolerances .......................... 2
Power Dissipation ........................... 2
Temperature Variation ....................... 2
Logic Diagrams ................................. 3
iii
Notes:
iv
Description
The IBM Personal Computer AT 128Kb Memory Expansion
Option has 18 RAM modules (64Kb xl) for a total capacity of
128Kb.
Memory Cycles
Memory read and write commands require a l-wait-state, 3-clock
memory cycle. Data moves as a byte (8 data bits and 1 parity bit)
or as a word (16 data bits and 2 parity bits) and is parity-checked
on the adapter. A parity error causes an I/O channel check
(non-maskable interrupt) to the system.
I/O Channel Check
When the I/O channel check occurs, a non-maskable interrupt
(NMI) results. Bits 6 and 7 of hex address 0061 are the status
bits used to determine the source of the NMI (bit 6 is I/O
channel check, and bit 7 is system board parity check). Writing
to the failing card will clear the status bit.
Addressing
This adapter responds to addresses from hex 080000 to hex
09FFFF.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT 128KB Memory Expansion Option 1
Specifications
Voltage Tolerances
The maximum variation of the +5 Vdc is +5% at the adapter
pins.
Power Dissipation
The + 5 V dc power used by the adapter is a maximum of 5.25
watts, and the maximum current used is 1 ampere.
Temperature Variation
The adapter will operate between 10 and 50 degrees Celsius (50
and 122 degrees Fahrenheit).
August 31, 1984
2 Personal Computer AT 128KB Memory Expansion Option
>
c
(JC
C
rI.!
~ -
~ ~
.......
rI.! ~
~
=
....
=\C
!.oo
(SHTI' +LA2'i
( ' ; } ~
(SNT I, +lA22
=
(SNT I, + LA21
i
(SNT I, +lA20
IIHTI) +LAlq
5-
(SHTI)-9RFREs.
~ (SHT I, + LAIS
...
lINT II + LAI7
~
....
N
ac
~
~
~
51
=
~
t'!j
~
~
S"
0
'=
~
g
SHE.q + BALE
~
1.5&82
;t QI COMPARATOR
18 QZ
.. ,
IE. Q't
U.2
I ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ LSll'i
..0----2'

DRIVER
.7
P=Q pL' 2 U'
,
12 QS I
AlSc)H
2 PI
~
TRANSPARENT
17 Pl
o LATCH
-., z...f..Q.
I,)p,,+ UII
,
2 01 .,
,q
I
...
11 P6
P7
II P8
U,.
ALS01+
"
UIO
12
O.
I.
AlSO"+
. "
,
UI
-
, D.
Qb tl!-----
r
OC
r----'-!- ENABLE C
It ALS12

U'
~
Q
(J'Q _.
n
-HEM (S16 (SHTI' t::t
_.
=
(J'Q
+ RA5 eso (SHY 2) ...
=
a
rIJ.
+ CAS eso (SHT 2)
+C5 (SHT3,4)
(SHY I) -tMR
(SHY I) -MEI1\/
(SHY 1) +CAS eso
(SHY l)+RAS (SO
(SHTI) +8AO
(SHTI) - S8HE
';

]UII)8
ALSa.
b
UIO
ALSO'"
8
UIO
TIt DELAY
1 IN UI8
I, PE2121; I
,- '+0 80 160 200
121

b 8
ADOR SEL (SHY 5)
+(AS

I UI7 12
'; FlO
I;

-.
II
;
Ulb
RN2
- RAS 0 (SHT5)
FQ!.
I

l"i FlO
q '300 8
Ulb J
12
RN2
-CA'S OL (SHY 5)
1'3 FlO
! U'3B
12 14 '30n '3
RN2
CAS OH (SHH)
+ SBHE (SHY 4)
-BAD (SHY 4)

(SHT 7) +501 -----------------'''1
7) +S02 ---------------'-1
(SHT 7) +SD3 ---------------'--1
7) +S[)'+ ---------------"-j
(SHT 7) +500; ---------------'--1
(SHT 7) +506 ----------------'-1
(SNT 7) +SD7 ---------------'--1
(SHT 8) +BAO --------------j-----'''9
(SNT 8) +soe ---------------1---1-"'--j
(SHTI) +509 --------------j--"1
8)+5010 ----------------1----1--'-1
(SHT 8)+5011 --------------j--"-1
(SHT --------------+--"-j
(SHT --------------+--'-j
(SHT 1)+5011+ ----------------1---'-j
(SHT 1)+501"> ----------------1---'-1
(SHT 8) - SBHE------------+----'-'oj
'MOO (SNT4,51
+1'101 (SNT4,51
+1'102 {SHT4.5}
,t<>,
(SNT4.5)
''''''
(SNT4,5)
,ttl'; (SNT4.5)
,"'"
{SHT4.Ii)
+1'107 (SHTU)
1"----------------+ Moe 4.5)
1"'----------------+ M09 (SHT 4,51
1"---------------+ 1'1010 (SHT 4.5)
1"'---------------+ MOil (SH14.5)
1"---------------+ MDl2 (SHT 4.5)
/"'----------------+ 1'1013" {SHT 4.5}
1"----------------+ MOII+ (SHT 4.5)
1"'----------------+ MOl"> (SHT 4.Ii)
BUS GATING
SBHE + BAO' OPERATION
WORD TRANSFER
+ BYTE TRANSFER (508-501"
BYTE TRANSfER (SOO -507)
+ NOP
(SHTI)-Bt1Et1R _________ ,
{SHT1} +C5 r4---------------------------- -(5 {SHT4}
'+ FOO
0; UII
1 28KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 3 of 7)
(lHT4I+HDP IN I
(In!)
....
....
(lNT3)
(lNT!)
(lNT!)
(lNTS) +f"06
\lIlTS) +1'107
....
(lIlTS) +JoI[l'l
(lHYI) +11010 (SHUI TI1D11 -
('HT3) +11012
t.NT J)
(lHT3J+I1Dl'+
(lHT3) +1'1010;
IIKTJ) 5AB
(lMTI)-IIREFRESM
tSHYI) BAO
....
(lNT1)
(lHTT)
(lIITT)
... ',
(IHT1)
flNT7)
h""
'" '
0; ur9
U'i7

" "
. "
1 WE
" RAS
P'''''''------''''" CAS r-

,
'"
.2JIf DIN/Dour
.,,,
"'''
... "
2.1"
2.1"-
'"
.2 DlN OOUT I ..

I TIllS CAROPROYlOES A CHOICE CF TWO SETS AHCLES THAT
Af'EHORVSOCKETCANPlJJGINTO.ASSHOWNBEUIW
COMPONENT SIDE VIEW
INCORRECT CORRECT
UIII U'+2 UI42

o 0 0 0
000000
o 0 0 0
o 0 0 0
o 0 0 0
o 0 0 0
o 0 0
>
=
(JCI (SHT5) +P1DP OUT 0
=
fIJ
""el ....
(SBT3) +"'"

(IHT3)
.......
(SHll) +1<>2
(SHI3) +.."
=
.... (INT3) +..,..
=
\C liNT 3) +11)'
!.OC (IHT3) +MD6
("')
(SHT3) +11)7
F2B
0
iluI< PARITY CHECK
A
'.
EVEN ')
10 C
" D
U7
12 E
"F
I G
, H
, I
+ MOP INO (INTi)
i
= ....
(SHT 5) + HOP OUT I
...
>
(SHT3) + M08
!003
(INT3)
+ """
...
(lHT3) +MDIO
N
(,HT3) + MOil
QC
(INT3) + MOl2

(SNT3) + MOI1
=
(INT3) +f"{)11t
(SHU) + MOl')
11 FDa F28D
""''''CHECK
A
,

EVEN 0;
10 C
" D
u<
12 E
" F
I G
, H
, I
+r1:>PINI (SHT5)

a (IHTZ)
-'AD

(INTI) -Bf'EI'IR

(IHT1) +cs
-=
(lNTZ) +511

(IHTI) -8MEM
=
=
(lHT3) -cs
0
."
C'. (SHT7) +ftESET
=
ALSO"
I

n F74
12 U2 10
II )Ui! 8120PR a CJ
U2 j II 11
"
"

"O"lATCH 12 Ul
"
W
11 Ult Fi UI9 L5'i.L
LSIZo;
. ,
I: U19 UlCJ 1 ui! b
, uz
, uz
DR,
-liD o-t CK (SHIl)
=
...... 128KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 5 of 7)
CARD TABS
r--ifrn---------------------+SD8 (1113)
1-"-'--------------------+509 (SIIn)
(SHTl) +SDIl (SHn)
f""'---------------------+SDI2 (lHT3)
f"''---------------------HDll (lHT3)
f"-'-------------------- +5011+ (lIT3)
f""--------------------+SOI''i fSHT3)
f"J!j"'----------------------+LA21 (INTI)
e<1,,'-'-,--------------------+lA22 (SlIT')
f""'----------------------+lA21 (t1lT1)
IINfI) +LAI'I (SHY"
-S8HECSKTU)
-HEMR(S1IT2) -HEHW (SHT 2)
(SHT1)-MEH CSI6-----------------""L"'"
(SHT1) +lA17 (SHTI)
(lHT1)
(SM11)

"'
(SHTU)
BHEHWflHT4,5)
=
============================!jb A1 n"l +8AO (lHYZ,1!iJ 8 A" y .. 12 -BRFftESH (SHTU)
.O'+l"F
CERAMIC
CAP
WYDC
"
(6-(8
(10-(12
(1'+-(1';

C'fl-t'lo;
(1+7-(')1
C'il-C'iT
(<;9-(&6
>-
c
CARD TABS
()Q
c
[I)
~ .....
~ ~
., ,...
[I} ~
~
,...
=
\0
~
00
-
~
.j;;o..
(SHT 4)-1/0 CH (K
A09
AOI
AOB
A07
A06
ADS
A04
+5DO (SHT 3)
+SD! (SHT 3)
+5D2 ISHT 3)
+501 ISHT 3)
+504 (SHT 3)
+5D') (SHT 3)
~
a
'=
c
.....
~
AD,
AD2
."
"0
+5D6 (SHT 3J
+5D7 (SHT 3)
+5AO (SHT 6J
+SAI (SHT 5)
.,
>-
""'l
A29
A2B
A27
+SA2 (SHT 5)
+ SA, (SHT 5)
+ SA4 (SHT 5J
,...
N
00
~
=
~
~
a
~
~
trl
~
'=
A26
AZS
A24
A2,
A22
A21
A20
AI9
AlB
~
AI7
+S
829 AI6
AIS
+SAS ISHT 5)
+SA6 (SHT 5J
+SA7 (SHT 5)
+SAB (SHT 5)
+SA9 (SHT 5J
+SAIQ (SHT 5J
+SAII (SHT 5)
+ SAI2 (SHT 5)
+ SAl, (SHT 5J
+SA!4 (SHT 5J
+ SAIl) (SHT 5)
+ SAI6 (SHT 5J
~
=
[I}
o
=
~
AI4
BID A"
B3I
B2B
+ SAI7
+ SAle
+ BALE (SHT ')
0
'=
.....
BI9
B02
-REFRESH (SHT 6)
+RESET DRV (SHT 4)
o
=
\0
Notes:
August 31, 1984
--- -
----
- ----
----
- - ---
-- - ---
-----
-----
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
S12KB Memory
Expansion Option
Contents
Description .................................... 1
Memory Cycles ............................. 1
Memory Address Switches .................... 1
II 0 Channel Check ......................... 3
Specifications .................................. 3
Voltage Tolerances .......................... 3
Power Dissipation ........................... 3
Temperature Variation ....................... 3
Logic Diagrams ................................. 5
iii
Notes:
iv
Description
The IBM Personal Computer AT 512Kb Memory Expansion
option has 36 RAM modules (128Kb x I) for a total capacity of
512Kb.
Memory Cycles
Memory read and write commands require a l-wait-state, 3-clock
memory cycle. Data moves as a byte (8 data bits and 1 parity bit)
or as a word (16 data bits and 2 parity bits) and is parity-checked
on the adapter. A parity error causes an I/O channel check
(non-maskable interrupt) to the system.
Memory Address Switches
There are two banks of memory address switches on each
memory adapter. These switches are set to values for the first,
second, third, etc. memory adapter in the system.
The first memory expansion adapter must start at address space
hex 100000. If more than one adapter is installed, no gaps
between memory are allowed. All expansion memory must be
one contiguous block starting at address hex 100000.
The figure on the following page shows the switch settings for
each adapter.
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT 512KB Memory Expansion Option 1
1 st 512KB
Memory
Expansion
Adapter
3rd 512KB
Memory
Expansion
Adapter
4th 512KB
Memory
Expansion
Adapter
Switch Bank 0
1234 5 67 8
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
1 2 345 6 7 8
~ ; f ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
12345678
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
Switch Bank 1
12345678
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
1 234 5 6 7 8
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
1 234 5 6 7 8
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
August 31, 1984
I/O Channel Check
When the I/O channel check occurs, a non-maskable interrupt
(NMI) results. Bits 6 and 7 of hex address 0061 are the status
bits used to determine the source of the NMI (bit 6 is I/O
channel check, and bit 7 is system board parity check). Writing
to the failing card will clear the status bit.
Specifications
Voltage Tolerances
The maximum variation of the +5 Vdc is 5% at the adapter
pins.
Power Dissipation
The + 5 V de power used by the adapter is a maximum of 5.25
watts, and the maximum current used is I ampere.
Temperature Variation
The adapter will operate between 10 and 50 degrees Celsius (50
and-I22 degrees Fahrenheit).
August 31, 1984
Personal Computer AT S12KB Memory Expansion Option 3
Notes:
August 31, 1984
4 Personal Computer AT S12KB Memory Expansion Option
(SHT1)+LAI
(SHll) + LAI8
IIHT1) +L
(SNT1) +LA
(SHT1) +LA
(SNT1) +L
(SHT1) +LA
(INT 1) BREFRESH
.2l
..
..
...
"
LE (SHTII +BA
'W,
SW.
SW'
SW4
SW,
SW
swo
SW7

6J2 NOTE[)
,r
LSb82
Q I COMPARATOR
"7 I"
,
Q2
,
.,
'J-
,
1& 04
U62
..- .. .,
7
---;'
"0-

rf
0 /' ,
, .7
'U'
-1: ___ J'.
12 08
,
ALS'iH
"
TRANSPARENT
17 P2
o LATCH
"
>--

Rtf
l'i P4 0' 0'
..
Op; 1 AI
,
11 P&
UI21 7
2 FOO
r--
P7
>--'- ' G
I UII ':I O.
0'
17
T T II P8
+'i R2 F20

,'lIOKD 14 Fl1q 12 12
II 8
o ., Q':I l'i
, 'OR>

S I (NOTE i)

1 COMPARATOR
UI2 q h
5Wq I 1&
l'i G
SWIO !I"i
'" ., 12 FOO
U,"
14

ff-

7 .. QIf 14
, ., DRIVER
SI .. "
,
..
U'. ' U'
..
,-- n UIO 12
, 0; O'i 1&
SWI':I 'i 12 7 ..
P=Q
1- '=' If
SWIO ---i-L +'io--J!!. Qb
"
ALS04
.7 ':I UfO
, 00 Qb 18
SWI'i fill
I
O. ___ oJ
-MEM CSI6 (IHT&)
+RAS (SO lINT 2)
+ RAS cs I IIHT 2)
+RAS C52 ISNT Z)
+RAS C51 lINT ZI
+(A.S CSO IIHT Z)
"'CAS CS1 IIHTZ)
p,
roc 17 P2
p,
,------!-! ENABLE (
l'i P4
o p,
11 Pf.I
P7
II P8
ALSH
.
, U' +CS (SHT3A)
512 KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 1 of 8)
0'1

(SHT7) -fe1IO

(SHT1) - ......
..,
fIl
0
=
!.

0

(SHT1) +CAS eso
= ....

(SNT 1 J +HAS eso
..,
>
(SHT 1) +RAS CSI
-3
(SHTlj+CAS (51
111' DELAY
11.cL
O
,I,
., UII
1 IN UI!
r ItO eo 160 ZOO
"I
,

+(1.5

L UI7 12
,
F.
It 30R b
"
,
U" ,
'N2
FO.
If

" .
0'"",
9 UI6
0.2
If FDa

(SHTi)
RAS 0 (SHT5)
-RA5 I (SHTi)
til
...
N (SHT1) ....
FlO
ALSO'<
UI6
12 9 10n 8
,

.,2
-CA.'; CL ISHT Ii)

1:1:1
-SBHE
a:
ISNT7)

51
0

UIO
11 FlO
so,
lRB
12 1'4 '300 '3

0.2
UIO
0; FlO
If U18 --'-
11 10n If
,
'N2
10 FlO
II U18 .. 12 '300 Ii
,
RN2
-CAS OH (SHT iii
-CAS IL (SNT 8)
CAS IH (SHT6)
+SBHE (5H14)
-=

-BAD (SHT4)
f!l.
0
>
= =
O!JCl
-=;
(SNT 1) +RAS (S 1
0'.-
,
flO
"i UI7\. '0.
"'
-RAS 2 (SHT 6)
0
w
=
...

(SHT 1)
II FlO
'cfU17
;0.
,
"
-RAS'3 (SHTII
...
I.C
OC

'US
OOV/RCVR
(SNTI)+SOO ---------------21 AI
(5HTII+501 ----------------'--j
(SHTB)+SD2 ----------------'-iA1
(SHTlj+SDl ----------------"-i
(SHTII +5O'f ---------------2..j ..
.
U
2 M
(SHT7) +BAD

19 G
U8
AlS2Lt';
....
ORV/ReVR
(SHT7) +508 -------------1----'--1
(SHT7)+S09 ---------------1---"-1A2
(SHT 7) +$010 A1
(5HT7)+5011 ---------------1---"-i
(5HT7)+5012 ---------------1---'-i ..
(SHT1)+SOI"j ---------------j---'-i
(SHT7j+SDILt ---------------j---'-i.7

(SHT7) -SBHE-------------+---""'<>!
Ub
" 1""'-----------------

.. .,.
+MD2
.. m
+"'"
+"'"
+-
+,.,7
(SHT .... ,
(lIffU.l1
(SHTU.I)
(SHT4.5.1)
(SHT4.'B)
(SHT4.U)
(S1IT4.UI
(SNT4.S,1)
BI 1""'------------------+1(1)8 (SHT4.5.i)
82 12 +1'1)9 (SHl4.5.i)
81 11 +!'t00 (SHT4.5.1J
Bit Iii + I'tlII (SHT 4.5.1)
SO; I + MOI2 (SHT4.U)
Bf:o 1& + MDA (SHJ 4.5.&)
87 17 + f'l)11t (SHT4,UI
BB 18 + P'II)r; (SHT4.5.i1
BUS GATING
5BHE ... BAD OPERATION
WORD TRANSFER
+ BYTE TRANSFER (51)8 S015)
BYTE TRANSFER (SOO SD1)
+ NOP
(SHT7) -II'EMR _________ ,
(SHT1) +cs (SHle)
It Foe
u"
51 2 KB Memory Expansion Option (Sheet 3 of 8)
go
"'C
(SHT 5) +HOP OUT 0

F280
2lu" PARITY (HECK
A
...
(SHTl) +KlO
!
(SHTl) +1101
=
(SHY 3) +t<l2
e.
(SHT3) +""
n
(SHT3) +-
ISHTl) +-
=
ISHT3) +MDb
I
(SBT3) +HD7
'S EYEN
,
IO(
" 0
U7
12 E
"F
I G
'H
, I
+ HOP fMO (SHT5.1)
=
-

...

ISHT 51 + I'f)p OUT I
VI (SHTl) + MD.

(SHT3) + ..,.
N
(SHT3) + MOlD
(SHT3) .. MOil
==
(SHTl) + M0l2

{SHTl) +I'fDB
(SHT3)

(SHTl) +P1DIO;:
1'3 FOe
,,"0

PARIT't'CHECI<
A
,

,
10 (
EVEN
" 0
"'
12 E
" F
I G
'H
, I
+ f"I)p INI (SHY 5.6)
e
=

-IIAO

(SHT2)
(SHT1) -II'V'R
."
+(S

(SHTI)
(SHT2) +-
= =
OIJC
(SHT1)
.,,; ISHT3) -cs
::.-
=w
=r (SNT I) +RESET

I
11 10 10

1'3 F7..
12 UI JO
II .)U2 BI20PR Qq
U2 J II
"
"

"O"LAT(H 12 Ul
"
W
1'3 ULt 1'3 UI9 8 2 LS<:il
LSI2'i
I: Ulq Ulq '3 U2 Eo
, uz
, "'
DRY
-110 CM ex (SHTI)

\C
OCI
{SHT4.I+1'1DPINO --_____ .-,
(SHU) +I'IDPIN I (lHT3\ -
(lIlT 3)
(SlIT 3)
(INT3)
(SHTl)
(SliT!)
(SNT3)
(SNT3)
(SMT3)
(SHT3)
(SIIT3) +MDIII -----------1
(SH13) +HD11 (SlIT 3) +1'1012 -
(SIITl) -----------1
(SHU) +1'101'+ --=======1J (SliT 3) +MO/o; -
_ FI<;S
-====:t====::t
IA

1.1'+ DIN
n

(SHT1) -lIptfJ''IW
(SHTI) - 12 I'>
(INTI) 30n L ___ _
(SIITI) 18 RNl

{SliT I}
.. ".
(SHTI) ADDR S[L SEL

(SHTI,
(INTI'
(SHTI) +5.1.7
[SliT I) .f5An
(SMYI)
(IHTI'
{SliT I)

' -""
== '.:?,'
'"-------
/SHTI) -RASO
8\i =
(SHT2) -lIASl -------------------<-J
. "
1 RAS!
,
RASO
I CAs DIN/DOUl

1'1010;
-
1 DIN DOur ,It
r----------+MIlP OUT o (SHTUJ
I
AI"EMQllYSO(KETCANPLUGINlO.THISCMDt1USTBESOCK[TED
COMPONENT SIDE VIEW
"", ..;.. 0
o 0 0 0
000000
o 0 0 0
o 0 0 0
o 0 0 0
o 0 0 0
00 0
""""
"" O'lli
o 0 0 0
000000
o 0 0 0
o 0 0 0
o 0 0 0
o 0 0 0
o 0 0 0
INCORRECT
(SHTUJ
1 DiN/DOUT I ...
1'1 DlN/DOUT
1.1'1 DIN/DOUT

1,1" DIN
1.I'IDIN/DOUT
II'1DIN/DOUT
DIN/DOUT
"'"""-------------'1' AD
Ul6
U"
U,2
u"
'0
"""'-'-________ --"'<j2 Al r-
+""""'-----------""-11 A'I _
AI) _
________
"'"""--------------'1' A7
'---------,2:'i' __ --f-
-

+""!!l.L---------,''-jA I "U26

run
ruzz
I, A6
, A7

2""
P'''-'-''----------'''<j=

1,I'IonvOOUT

II'1DIN/DDUT
MO.
MOP IN I
1.1'1 DIN/DOUT
II'1DIN/DOUT
1 1'1 OIN;;oUT
>
= IJCl
=

r>
til
=
:=
!.

("')
OC

=
.g
$.
I'D
...
>
I-l
u.

N

:::
I'D
51
=

trl

ii!l.
=
:=
0
'a
....
=
:=

ISHT1) -MEM (5Ib----------------'"'-j
(SHT8) +5AO
ISHYI, -REFRESH
.Oll7",F

WVD(
.,
",PA f5;S (APS

'" (b-efl
(ID-(l2
(111-(1';

(41-CII-;
('+7-C'>1

C'>'1-(M.
IO",F
TANTALUM
CAP 2: 7
WVD(
(1 LEADS)
(1,(2,(1
+ C,>, C'I,Cll
(16.CIIO,(ltb
- -CC;2. C'>8

(SHT3)
ISHT3)
ISHT3)
ISHT3)
ISHY3)
ISHT3)
ISKY3)
ISHY3)
P"''----------------------+L42l ISHH)
(SHTZ)
(OLt +LA21 (SHT2)
.ill +LA20(SHTZ)
+LAI<I (SHH)
-SBHE (SHTU)
-f"EMR ISHTZ)
-MEMW(SHT2)
(SHT1) +LA!7 (SHT1)

"'
'----r------AI yl!""'---+-----BMEMR (SHT3.4)
L-_+_---!
Y4 1 -BREfRE5H(5HT1.5)
"
y';f-!'---"""'----BBMEMW (5HT6)

CARD TABS
(SHU) -110 CH CJ(
AOq
AOI
AOS
+$00 (SHT 3)
+501 (SHT 3)
AOT
+S02 (SHT3)
AOb
+S01 (SHT3)

+ SOlI (SHT 3)
W+
(SHT 3)
A03
A02
+ SOb (SHT 3)
+507 (SHT3)
A31
A30
+500 (SHT 7)
+501 (SHT 5)
AZ'l
+502 (SHT 5)
A28
+SA3 (SHT 5)
A27
+50' (SHT 5)
A2b
(SHT 5)

+5Ob (SNT 5)
A2'
+507 (SHT 5)
A23
+SA8 (SHT 5)
A22
+SAq (SHT 5)
A21
+SAIO (SHT 5)
A20
Alq
+ SAil (SHTS)
+SAI2 (SHT 5)
AI8
+SAI3 (SHTS)

AI7

82q Alb
+SAllf (SHT 5)
+SAI'5 (SHT 5)

+SAI& (SHTS)

AI,
BIO AI3
B31
828
+SAl7
+ SAIS
+ BALE (SHT 1)
Blq
802
-REFRESH (SHT 7)
+RESET DRY (SHT 4)
--- -
----
- ----
- ---
- - ---
- -- ---
-----
--_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Personal Computer AT
128KB/640KB Memory
Expansion Option
6183312
March 18, 1986
iv March 18, 1986
Contents
Description ..................................... 1
Operating Characteristics .......................... 2
Memory Address Switches ......................... 2
Specifications ................................... 3
Logic Diagrams .................................. 4
March 18, 1986
v
Notes:
vi March 18, 1986
Description
The IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER AT 128KB/640KB
Memory Expansion Option is a variable-size memory adapter
designed to:
Increase the size of base memory by 128K to allow full 640K
real mode memory addressing
Increase the size of expansion memory by 512K without using
an additional I/O slot.
The option has two banks of pluggable sockets, Bank 0
and Bank 1.
Module
o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 PO 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 P 1
~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - / /
Bank 0
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD D ~
Bank 1
DDDDDDDDD DDDDD
DDDDDDDDD DDDDD
Memory Module Location
Swi tch
Block
L-___ / /
Bank 1 is the 128K bank. It contains eighteen 64K by 1 dynamic
random access memory (DRAM) modules. The 128K is base
memory residing at address hex 80000 through hex 9FFFF. Bank
o is the 512K bank. This bank may be populated by an IBM
Personal Computer AT 512KB Memory Module Kit, consisting of
eighteen 256K by 1 DRAM modules. The 512K is expansion
memory residing at an address determined by the option's
dual-inline-package (DIP) switch settings.
March 18, 1986 128KB/640KB Memory Expansion Option 1
Memory-read (MEMR) and memory-write (MEMW) operations
require a l-wait-state, 3-clock memory cycle. Data moves as a
byte (8 data bits and 1 parity bit) or as a word (16 data bits and 2
parity bits) and is parity-checked on the adapter.
110 Channel Check
If a parity error is detected, a latch is set and an I/O 'channel
check' line is activated; the result being a non-maskable interrupt
(NMI) indicating an error to the system unit's microprocessor.
The status bits (I/O channel check and system-board parity
check) determine the source. Writing to the failing option clears
the status bit.
An eight-position DIP module is mounted on the option. Its
switch assignments are as follows:
Switch Switch Assignments
Number
1 ON:LA23 = 0 OFF:LA23 = 1
2 ON:LA22 = 0 OFF:LA22 = 1
3
ON:LA21 = 0 OFF:LA21 = 1
4 ON:LA20 = 0 OFF:LA20 = 1
5
ON:LA19 = 0 OFF:LA19 = 1
6 ON:Bank 0 populated OFF:Bank 0 not populated
7 ON:Bank I populated OFF:Bank 1 not populated
8 ON:Reserved OFF:Bank 1 memory is 128K
DIP Module Switch Assignments
The first 512K of expansion memory must start at address space
hex 100000. If additional memory expansion options are
installed, no gaps between memory are allowed. All expansion
memory must be one contiguous block starting at address hex
100000.
2 128KB/640KB Memory Expansion Option
March 18, 1986
Specifications
Pin 256K by 1 bit 64K by 1 Bit
Module Module
1 A8 N/C
2 Data In
~
Data In
*
3
-Write -Wr i te
4 -RAS -RAS
5
AO AO
6 A2 A2
7 A1 A1
8 +5 Vdc +5 Vdc
9 A7 A7
10 A5 A5
11 A4 A4
12
A3 A3
13 A6 A6
14 Data Out
*
Data Out
15
-CAS -CAS
16 GND GND
*
Data In and Data Out are tied toJether on
Data Bits 0 - 7 {three state bus
March 18, 1986
128KB/640KB Memory Expansion Option 3
(SH.7)
(SH.7)
(SH 8)
-BREFRESH
+ LAZ3
+ LA22
+LA21
+LAZO
+SALE
LSIZ,>
",,_r -MEM C5 16 (SH.7)
FOO r----

'--_+ _____ ,'-l:F;;"sO""""_--'j' OZ
[7
"
GO
QI 10
9

Z"
4 P2
b F9 LSb82
, "
"eo;
Qb f"'-' ____ -.J
'0.
, "
" LSIZ'>
Sl3 PO 2[':::,
= = 17p8
-
- +'> p;Qp!'''-' __ -4-__ --'

128/640 Memory Card (Sheet 1 of 8)
Q'f-!''-'---------+RAS (SO (SH.2)
Q2 18
Q3 17
ALS12
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
(SH.2)
(SH.3,4)
::
~
(SH.7) -MEHR
...
(SH.7) -MEHW
r')
=-
....
$'J
TIME DELAY
FOO II PE2121'3
10
uz8'8
I UZq
9
IN
I 40 80 160 200
"I
4
,
8
+CAS
ADOR SEL (SH. 5)
....
I.C
QO
=-.
(SH. 1) +CAS eso
....
(SH. 1) -I-RAS CS a
N
~
~ USI 12
'5 FlO
13 30n 4
4 ,
'3 U'51
un
"
F08
r
I,ilU30
"
RAS 0 (SH.5)
QO
~
(SH.l) +CAS (51
=
.........
=-.
"'"
=
(SH.7) +8AO
~
=
::
(SH_l) -SBHE
~
a
9 F08
I ~
8
,
FlO
ALS04 4
, 10 30n 7
, , '3 U'i2
un
U27
II FlO
AlS04
I ~ U<;2
8
q ,on 8
9 8
un
U27
'S FlO
4
, I [ ,on C
'3 U')3
un
CAS Ol (SH.S)
CAS OH (SH.S)
CAS IL (SH.B)
0
~
tr1
10 FlO
12 30n '5
"
8
9 U'i,
U '2
-CAS IH (SH.5)
~ +5BHE (SH.4)
~
=
~ .
-8AO (SH.4)
0
=
0
-=
-o
(SH. 1) +RAS CS I
"
flO
I ~ U'51
8 14
30n
'3
un
- RAS 1 (SH. 6)
=
VI
0\
....
(SH. 8) +5DO
~
(SH.8)+SO!
QCI
(SH.S) +502
~
(SH.B) +50,
==
(SH. 8) +SOlt
.........
(SH. 8) +50')
="
(SH. 8) +506
~
(SH. 8) +5D7
c:>
~
(SH 7) +B40
==
a::
tD
9
0
(SH. 7) +508
~ (SH. 7) + SD<j
t'fj
(SH. 7) +5010
~
(SH. 7) +5011
(SH. 7) +5012
~
(SH. 7) +5013
'"
(SH_ 7) +5014
.... (SH. 7) +501')
0
=
(SH.7) -5SHE
0
'=
....
S
=
a::
(SH.7) -BMEMR
=
..,
t':l
=-
(SH.1) +CS
....
~
....
~
QCI
="
ALS24')
'us
DRV/RCVR
,
AI BI
"
8
A2
"
12
7
" "
"
'"
,
.- U42
"
S
AS
B,) Ie;
4
"
Ab
"
,
A7 87
17
'"
A8
88 18
~
T/it
"
G
ALS2lf<;
'US
DRV/RCVR
,
AI BI
"
8
A2
82 12
7 ., B, 13
,
A4 U4<j 84 14
S ., es 1<;
4
Ab
BE> Ib
,
17
A7 87
2
A8 B8 18
0---'- T/R"
"
G
BUS GATING
SBHE +840 OPERATION
- - WORD TRANSFER
- + BYTE TRANSFER (508-501'5)
+ BYTE TRANSFER (sao 507)
+ NOP
<j ALS,Z 8
~
~
12 U28 II
+ MOB ISH. 4,5,6)
+ M09
+ MOIO
+ MOil
+ MOl2
+ MOl4
+ MOle; (SH.4,5,6)
CS (SH.4)
f
(SH. 5) +MDP OUT 0
(SH.3) +1"100

+1"101
!'J
+ ...D2

+I1D,
Ie
+f"I04
QC "'0'
c:I'I
+110&
(SH.3) +,..07
FOB F28D
'_r-'-'--
Il"" PARITY CHECK
B A
, B
EVEN I)
"c
II
0
"'
E
F
1 G
,
H
I
+ MOP IN 0 (SH.S,B)

QC

(SH.5) +MDP OUT I
........
(SH.3) + M08
c:I'I + MOCJ
olio.. + HOlD
It FOB F28a
.. RITY (HECK
B A
, B
EVEN I)
10 (
II
0
U,"
+ MOP IN I (SH.5,6)
=
+ MOil
IZ E

+I"IDI2
+11013

+1101"
(SH.3) +I'1DI'5
" F
1 G
,
H
I
I'D
a

(SH.2) -BAD
g
(SH.7) -BHEHR
(SH.ll +cs
I.
(SH.2) +SBHE
8
-BHEr1W
0
(SH.7)
(SH.31 -cs
"C

8
(SH.8) + RESET CRY

I
I, 7 12

F71t
12 UI 10
q )UI 8 12 D PR Q 9
UI J II LK
U21
Q
CLR
"
"

"0" LATCH IZ , II
1, U2 U2 8

LSI21)
9 UZ II U I 6
, UI
- 1/0 eH Ck (SH.a)
-...l 128/640 Memory Card (Sheet 4 of 8)
00 ($H.4) +tIOP INO --=======r
(SH.4) +MDP 1M I -
IS,." __
(SH.B)
[SH.B)
''1''
(SH.B)
.",,=====1
."'011 =======1
(SH.S) +5A17
(SH.8) +SA18
"
""
, ..
, "
" tJ 12
" ..
, "
'"
. "
'or
. ...-
" m

""
""
'"

12"'1
n A'>
..
'"
' ..
, "

"=
2,'" DIN/DooT
I-
I-
I-
(SH.6)
-HAl
-HA2
(SH.B)
,---------+,..DPWT I (SH.4.6)
I-
'"
1'+ DIN OOOT
201M Dour I ..
::
e;
(SH. 3) +"'00
+MOI
=-
+M02
.... +MDl

....
I.e
OC +M08
=-.
+MOI2
....
+MOn
N
OC (SH. 3) +1'101')

=
(SH. 5) -MAO
.........
="
"'"

=
- MAL;

- MAl>
ISH. 5) - MA 7
::
(SH. 2) - RAS I

(SH. 2) -CAS IL
a
ISH.2) -CAS I H
=
(SH.7) -BSME MW
.:l
(SH_ 4) + MOP IN 0

(SH.4) +MOP IN I
ISH. 5) +MDPOUTO
'C
g;
(SH.5) +MDPOUTt

=
=
0
'C
Q;
=
=
\0
______
2. lit DIN/DOUT
Ull
2.14 DIN/Dour Ul'l
t'""'O"-,------________ l'i
2,14 DIN/Dour
2,14 DIN/Dour
2,1'+ DIN/Dour
DIN/Dour
AD
t'":,"A,,-1__________ -'j7 AI
+'""'A'-<2__________ -'<, A2
U18
t'"",A,,-,__________ 1!f.j2 t--
I"''''------------.!.!.i
ll
A'I r--
":":": ________ -'I"jD A<; r---
I"'''-________ ---''jll Af> ..-
I"''-'--________ ---'!.j<l A7 r-
,,_""""'-M-'---------'1
1
AS I--
r-
______ I-
MOP OUT 0
MOP OUT I
________
1"'''-________ 47 Al
I"'"A,,2----------'''-1A2 Iubo
Al
uc;a
________
11 A6
, A7
MAe I A8
-S8MEMW 1 WE
-CAS IH Ie; (AS
HOI') 2 14 DIN/DOUT
2.14 DIN/O OUT
MOIl
2 lit DIN/DOUT
MOll 2.1" DIN/DOUT
MOlD 2,14 eINIO OUT
2.14 DIN/Dour
2.1'+ DIN/e OUT
2 DIN /0 OUT I'"
-
o
(SH.l)-MEM (S'& -------------------'''''-1
CARD TABS
"
'"
'"
CI'
+508
+SOCI
+SDII
+SDIZ
+5D11
+SDI'+
+SDIr;
+LA19
-SBHE
MEHR
-HEMW
+LAIB
+LAI7

ORIVER
U-.
YI!'-''''---+-----BMEHR (SH.3,4)
A2 YZ II> BME"'W (SH.4,5)
(SH.a) +5AO -----------------------------j-''-lAl Y"l''+ +840 ISH. 2,3,5)
(SH.B) -REFRESH 8 Ali YIf 12 BREFRESH (SH.l,5)
o.lUF
CERAMIC
CAP
WVOC
(1-(7
(CJ-Clb
(18-(2"
CAPS
I'
(29-01
01-(1f'i
('+7-(118
('<;"-('>11
(bl-<bb
+ (I.
__ (')1-(-':;1,(11&
,&0
y'>f-!-'----""-":.;'.;;.n--"'---__
U1Z
, G
'--
(SH.3)
(SH.3)
(SH.l)
I
(SH.l)
(SH.2,3)
(SH.2)
(SH.21
(SH.l1
(SH.l)
(SH.4) -I/O (H (K
+S
-
-
AD I

B2q
Fi
BID

CARD TABS
PI
I.no
AOB
A07
AOb
ADS
A04

A02

A2q
A2B
A27
A2b
A2S
A24

A22
A21
A20
Alq
AI8
AI7
Alb
AI<;
AI4

B28
Blq
B02
+SOO (SH.3)
+501
+SD2
+50'3
+504
+501)
+SOb
+ SD7 (SH.3)
+SAO (SH.7)
+SAI (SH.5)
+5A2
+5A'3
+5A4
+5Az:i
+5A6
+5A7
+5A8
+SA9
+5AIO
+5AII
+SAI2

+5A14
+SAI<;
+SAlb ISH. 5)
+SAI7 (SH.5)
+SAIB ISH. 5)
+ BALE (SH. 1)
- REFRESH (SH.7)
+ RESET DRY (SH. 4)
Notes:
Notes:
Notes:
--- -
----
- ----
- ---
- - ---
- - - ---
-----
--_.-
Personal Computer
Hardware Reference
Library
IBM Personal Computer AT@
512KB/2MB Memory
Expansion Option
6183310
March 18, 1986
iv March 18, 1986
Contents
Description ..................................... 1
Operating Characteristics .......................... 2
Memory Address Switches ......................... 3
Programming ................................... 4
Specifications ................................... 5
Logic Diagrams .................................. 6
March 18, 1986
v
Notes:
vi March 18, 1986
Description
The IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER AT@ 512KB/2MB
Memory Expansion provides 512K of additional random access
memory (RAM) and can be expanded to provide a total of 2M of
additional RAM.
Four 18-socket banks accept 256K-by-l dynamic RAM (DRAM)
modules. Bank 0 is fully populated. Banks 1, 2, and 3 may be
populated by using three IBM Personal Computer AT 512KB
Memory Module Kits, consisting of eighteen 256K-by-l DRAM
modules each.
Module
012 3 4 5 6 7 PO 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PI
I I
Bank 3
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
Bank 2
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
~ D
Bank 1
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
SW itch
Block
Bank 0
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
I I
Memory Module Location
March 18, 1986 512KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option 1
Opera ting Characteristics
Memory-read (MEMR) and memory-write (MEMW) operations
require a l-wait-state, 3-clock memory cycle. Data moves as a
byte (8 data bits and 1 parity bit) or as a word (16 data bits and 2
parity bits) and is parity-checked on the adapter.
110 Channel Check
If a parity error is detected, a latch is set and an '-I/O channel
check' line is activated; the result is a non-maskable interrupt
(NMI) indicating an error to the system unit's microprocessor.
The status bits (I/O channel check and system-board parity
check) determine the source. Writing to the failing option clears
the status bit.
2 512KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option March 18, 1986
An eight-switch DIP module is mounted on the memory
expansion option. These switches set the starting address for
each option above the 1M system board RAM. The switch
assignments for the starting address for Bank 0 are as follows:
Switch Switch Assignments
Number
1 ON:LA23 = 0 OFF:LA23 = 1
2 ON:LA22 = 0 OFF:LA22 = 1
3
ON:LA21 = 0 OFF:LA21 = 1
4 ON:LA20 = 0 OFF:LA20 = 1
5
ON:LA19 = 0 OFF:LA19 = 1
6 Not Used.
7 Not Used.
8 Not Used.
Switch Assignments
The address of the first expansion memory option must start at
address space hex 100000. If additional memory expansion
options or IBM Personal Computer AT 512KB Memory Module
Kits are installed, no gaps between memory are allowed. All
expansion memory must be one contiguous block starting at
address hex 100000.
Notes:
1. An expansion option must be fully populated before another
can be installed.
2. In order to determine the total expansion memory installed
check bytes hex (30 & 31) in CMOS RAM.
March 18, 1986 S12KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option 3
Programming
Programs that test for memory by writing and reading until a data
error is detected, must write back to the failing card to clear
possible parity checks. This is required for a partially populated
512KB/2MB Memory Expansion.
4 SI2KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option March 18, 1986
Specific a tions
256 by 1 Bit
Pin Module
1 A8
2 Data In
*
3
-Write
4 -RAS
5
AO
6 A2
7
A1
8 +5 Vdc
9
A7
10 A5
11 A4
12 A3
13 A6
14 Data Out
*
15
-CAS
16 Ground
*
Data In and Data Out are tied
together on Data Bits 0-7
(three state bus).
March 18, 1986 512KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option 5
ISH. B) +AEM
(SHiel
(SH.B)
(SH.B)
,
,
(SH.9)-BREFRESH
(SH.2)+RAST1t1 ,.;
J'!:'
"
.. , ... ...
... ,
, ,
,
.
,
I-
,
I
;;::: ,
....
."
" " . .. IOKO:
""
. "
V
"'" .. , ,
....
."
"" ... ,,'

"" , ,
" '1"
m

,
"
'"
" " '"
"
,
""
"
""
IKXIt
'"
"""
,

,
,

P'" .'
,
'f-o
. '----

}
nAt ttll
"
.""
,,'
' ..
""
."p
"
.
'--

L---...!. AO 12
"-------' AI
""
QI Z
'"
'"
., ,
""
+.,.,0---19 Q11'l

f
,""
"eo
'"

.

'l U81 8

2 U81 1

512KB/2MB Memory Card (Sheet 1 of 10)
I
""
4;'
'"
, ..
"
,

IzlDno;
.. ,
."" ,
.. ,
."" ,
-""
CSIf> (SH.91
-c; (SH.3A)
." (SH.4)
-<A>
-os
-<.OS
o (SH.2j
I (SH.2)
-US2 {SH.21
1 (SH.2)
"'"
o ISH.5)
-'"
1 (StI.6)
SZ(SH.7)
lIAS 1 (SH.8)
(SH.9) -ttEttR
(SH.9) -ttEttW
(SH.1) -CASD
(SH.1) -CAS I
(SH.1) -CASZ
(SH.1) -CAS\t
(SH.9) +BAO
(SH.9) -seHE

UB'

F02

60 U94
F02

F02

UB'
ALSO

ue,
AlS04
,

TIttE DELAY
,lIN
PE2Im I
U'O
I 40 80 1600 ZOO
121
81

f08
4 U91 60
,I USB A
ADDR SEL (SH.9)
+AAS TIMING (SH.1)
+CAS 11
FlO
R",
I
UOI
B

I
UA
RN'
I FlO ,on
-CASOl (SH.5)

12
"
,
-CASOH (SH.5)
\t FlO
.. ,
...
U92
10 7

-CASIL (SH.51
I
I} FlO
""'
300
L.j!Ij ""2
B 12
- CAStH (SH.S)
9 FlO
"'"
...
10 UI}\t
B

B
- CASZl (SH.71
I
:I FlO
.. ,
'0

"
-CASZH (SH.7)
I FlO
RN,
1O.
U ..
12 I. I
"
CAS\tl (SH.S)
I I
FlO
RN'
10D

12 r; 2
- CAS\tH (SH.S)
-BAD (SH.4)
+SBHE (SH.4)
(SH. 10) +500
(SH.l0) +501
(SH. 10) +502
(SH. 10) ":501
(SH.l0) +5D'f
(SH.l0) +5()';
{SH. 10J +506
(SH. 10) +507
(SH.9) +BAO
(SH.9) +508
(SH.9) +50'>
(SH.9) +solO
(SH.9) +5011
(SH.9)" +5[)IZ
(SH.9) +50n
(SH.9) +SOIIf
(SH.9) +sop;
(SH.9) - SBH
(SH. 9) -BMEHR
(SH: 1) -(S
E
.U5
r:RV/R(VR
AI
.,
"
A2
BZ IZ
7
..
Uo.
B1 11
.. Bit Ilf
..
.. ,.
..
.. I.
,
A7 .7 ~
2
AB
98 \8
--,;-
Tiq
G
ALSZltlli
BUS
[)RY/RCYR
AI
.,
"
A2
B2 12
7
A'
U'.
B1 11
A.

,.
.. ..
I
.. ..
I
A7 .7
17
2
AB

I.
~ T/R
,.
G
BUS GATING
S .... +8AO OPERATlON
- WORD TRANSFER
- + BYTE TRANSFER (S08-S011li)
+ - BYTE TRANSFER (500 -507)
+ + NOP
U.,
I
ALS12
oJ
Y-
+1'100' (SH.4,5,6,7,8)
+1'101 (SH.4,5,6,7,8)
+M02 (SH.4,5,6,7,8)
."' .
(SH.4,5,6,7,8)
'MIl'O (SH: 4,5,6,7,8)
+MD< (SH.4,5,6,7,8)
+M06 (SH.4,5,6-,7,8)
+1'107 (SH.4,5,6,7,8)
. "'"
(SH.4,5,6,7,8)
+ MOil (SH.4,5,6,7,8)
+ 1'1010 (SH.4,5,6,7,8)
+ 1"1)11 (SH.4;5,6,7,8)
+ 1'1012 (SH.4,5,6,7,8)
+ MOil (SH.4,5,6,7,8)
+ MOIIf (SH.4,5,6,7,8)
+ MDlIli (SH.4,5,6,7,8)
(SH.5}+MOP OUT 0
(SH.3)
'..x>
(SH.3)
.""
(SH.3} 'f<l2
(SH.3)
.""
(SH.3)
'''''
(SH.3) ."',
(SH.31
(SH.3)
(SH.5) + MOP OUT I
(SH.3) . ..,.
(SH.3)
+ """
(SH.3) + 1'1010
(SH.3) + MOil
(SH.3) + MOIZ
(SH.3) + MOil
(SH.3) + 1'1)1'1
(SH.3) +MOIo;
(SH.2) -BAO
(SH.9) -BI'J1R
(SH.1)
(SH.2) +5BHE
(SH.9) -BMEI'I
(SH.3)
W
(SH. 1 0) +RESET DR'
,
"
U88
,""
"80
2

PARITY (MEa
,
"
EVEN 0;
roc
+ MOP INO (SH.5,6,7,8)
II 0
'"
",
",
, G
'H
, I
U88
A FOB FZ80

, ,
, ,
EVEN 0; + I'(lP IN I (SH.5,6.7,8)
ro c
II 0
U ..
",
" ,
, G
, H
, I

I
"
, ,

IZt=} 10 F7't
" PO
10 JUIOO
12
0 Q 9
UIOOJ II (lK
lJ82
l:i
(LR
,
" AlS'lZ
AlSO'
"Q"lATCH
"
II
II U"'
'"
lSI21j
II ro UBI
-UUroD ).
W
0; UIOO
-I/OCHCK (SH.10)
.....
o
(511.4)
($H.4)
(SH.3)
(SH.9)
(SH.2)
(SH.l0)
(SH.B)
(SH.l0)
I
(SH.1O)
(SH.B)
(SH.1O)
(SH_l0)
(SH.:?)
(SH.l)
+!1DPINO

+ MOl
+1102
+ MD.
+
+MD'i
+110&
+1'101
+1108

+1'1012

H-.ol4
+MOI'i
"'" -BMEt1W
II> .0Sl1
-CASOL
Zr:-- If "" +5AI 14;00
+SAZ 'i 2A FI'>8 VI
""
lllAMPLX
14 urOI
R'
'(l 7
+5AIO 18
"" +5AII 102B
A'
IZ3Wl<;
,"
""
,"
BADDR SL SEL v,,12 nUl "
rG
. ,--h
""
+SAb "ZA FISS
""

II 'A Mf'LX
144A UI021'2 7 9 .on B
+5A14
'"
""
+5AI<;
10 i: n'
1,>.002
+SAlb
+SAI7
y,,12 ""
I
r G
.

_______________ >J& 1.60 RN4
r 2A r'------'C"
_______________ 2J'i ,A
----------------'<' 4A i-t
L....-
+5A18
'"
'"
'"
'"
,,,
'"
'"
'" -BHEM""
-RAS 0
'"
'"
'"
'"
"
'"
"' -8M HW
RAsa
__ Ub ______________________ __
..... '1 +MOP OUT 0 (5MA,6,7.8)
,
(SH.7.8)
1"------=:.>--------8I1AI (SH.7,8)
r-----"-"''-'--------BMA2 (5M_7,8)
1'-----='-'-------8t1A, (5M_7,8)
f1-----='-'-------B'1A<; (SH.7,8)
1"'-----='-'--------BHAb (5M.7,8)
(SH.7,8)

:-;,,""'''''j!'''--------------------------+MDP OUT I (SH.4,8,7,8)
......
......
(SH.3) +1"100
(SH.3) +1'101
(SH.3) +M02
(SH.3) +M01
(SH.3) +MO'I
(SH.3) +MD'i
(SH.3) +MD6
(SH.3) +MD7
(SH.3) +MDB
(SH.3) +MOo:,
(SH.3) +MOIO
(SH.3) +11011
(SH.3) +MDl2
(SH.3) +MOI1
(SH.3) +HDI'I
(SH.3) +MOI'i

:>,1'1 Z7
________________
HOlt 2 lit :NIOOUT UZI
2,1'1 DIN/DOUT UZZ
2 lit DIN/DOU
________ --"'-"e;'iD"DliiiliN/DOUT UZII
+-"."'AD'---________ AD U2'i
...,.",AL'________ -L7 ..
...,MA",-' ________ ----'j6 A2 U26
12 M
."
MAO
MA7
MA'
II All
10 A'i
11 A6
, A7
'A8
,
BI"IEHW WE
-HAS I RAro
--
f-
f-
2D
--
(SH.5) MAO
(SH.5) MAl
(SH.5) MA2
(SH.5)
(SH.5) HAlt
(SH.5) I"IA'i
(SH.5) I1A6
(SH.5) HA7
(SH.5) HAB
.!b,,______ 0

BANK I
MDP DUT

_________
....,"'----------"-1"
MAl 12 Al
(SH.1) -US I MAlt II All
:::::: = =-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-=-j ::: :: ::
(SH.B) -BHEHW .-JIA ""L-------__ '''-A7
A.
.. ""'---------'''' ..
+=''''-'---------''<>' 11m!
(SH.4) +MOP IN 0 ------------1
(SH.4) +MDPlNl
(SH.5) +MOP OUT 0 ------------1
(SH.5) +HDPOUTI
-(ASIH I"m
________ .Ll"'liit DIN/DOUT
2 1'+ DIN/DOUT

';1'+ DIN/DOUT
2 1'+ DIN/OOUT
21ItmN/DOUT
.D.
r---
H PIN 1
DIN/DOUT
-
IV
20IN/OOUT
DIN/OOUT Ii')
Z lit DIM/DOUT U'i7

2.11f OUT

21")0 N/DDU Ultl
'_lit DIN/OOUT U'42
.",""----------.....lJ' AD
BANK 2:

t"''''-----------''I2c.jH
LAA
... '""--________ Iui4e
...
+"""-'-----------"'_jA7 luifb

, '"'

.",""-________ {,,',"I11f DIN/DOUT
2 lit DIN/DOtH
2 Ilf DIN/DDUT

+"'''-'-----------------------'-''' OUT
.","-------------------- OOUT
Oo.lT
DIN/oOUT
2"DiiiTo'Oi.JT Ilf
2 Ilf DIN/DDUr
It DINIOOUr
2 1'1 DIN/oour
U'ifl
2 II! :NIOOU
2 Ilf DIN/DDUr
21:r N/DOU
lit DIN/Dour U60
'-"''''------11.,
+"'''''------''1' ..
12A'i
II Alt
ICA'i
U"
U62
____
A7 I-
.. A8 _

-
f-

BANK 1

U71 _
+"'''"------'''-1A2 U70_

+"'''''-------''''yA'i
+"'''''------''''-!A6
""
>-

, IIr
..... '-------',>q""'"
___
."."'--____ DIN/Dour

2 II! DIN/DOUT
2 lit D1N/CDIIT

DIN/DOUT
2 DIN/DOUT 1'+
"
(b-
,. .'fluF
CERAMIC
'AP
!7 WVOC
(I' -C12
'"
CI7
(SH.t) -FAST CS 1&
(SH.l0l + SAO
(SH. 1 0) -REFRESH
(SH.5) MA8
-CIII)
(SH.2) ADOR 5a
ISH. 10) IW.E
BYPASS CAPS
X'

CARD TABS
0"
'" I
'" ,1 (I.<Z.O
'"
+ CII),
'"
ro.D"F rr- " .. m.'''' - -C"i2. C'i'
co,
(17
'18
01.
CO2
I",
'D'
m
, .
'01
'"
(I'
I

+'P
DRIVER
UIO<;

n
l8

YZI&
'.,
nl't
"
,,,
"
,,'
, G
"
,
"
7
-
,
eRN"
... 30n 3
RN'
-8MEMR (SH
-8MEMW (SH
+BolO (SH
- BREFRESH (SH
-BMol8 (SH
BB MEMW (SH
+SD8 (SH.3l
(SH.3)
+ SOlO (SH. 3)
+ SOli (SH.3)
+ SOl2 (SH.3)
+SOI1 (SH.3)
+SOI'l (SH.3)
+ SOl') (SH.3)
+lAll (SH.t)
+Lolll (SH.t)
+lAZI (SH.t)
+lAlD (SH.t)
+lAlq (SH.t)
-SBHE (SH.2.3)
-I'EHR (SH.2)
- MEHW (SH. 2)
.3,4)
.4,5,8)
.2,3)
.1,5)
.7,8)
.7,8)
BAllOR SEL (SH
+BBALE (SH
.5)
.. ,
CARD TABS
(SH.4) -1/0 (H (K
AD.
ADI
AD8
+500 ISH. 3)
+501 ISH. 3)
AD7
+S02 ISH. 3)
AD6
+50, ISH. 3)
A D ~
+504 ISH. 3)
A04
+SOS
ISH. 3)
AD'
+S06 ISH. 3)
AD2
+507 ISH. 3)
'"
+5AO ISH. 9)
"0
+SAI ISH. 5)
A2'
+SA2 ISH. 5)
A28
+5A, (SH.5)
A27
+ SA4 ISH. 5)
A26
+ S A ~ ISH. 5)
A 2 ~
+SA6 ISH. 5)
A24
+SA7 ISH. 5)
A2'
+5AB ISH. 5)
A22
+SA9 ISH. 5)
A21
+SAIO ISH. 5)
A2D
+SAII ISH. 5)
A"
.., SAI2 ISH. 5)
AI8
+ SAI"3 ISH. 5)
~
AI7
82' AI6
+ ~
+ 5AI4 (SH.5)
+ SAl') ISH. 5)
A I ~
+ SAlb ISH. 5)
~
AI4
810 A"
a"
All
a28
+ SAI7 ISH. 5)
+ SAIB ISH. 5)
+ AEN ISH. 1)
+ SALE ISH. 9)
a,.
SDZ
-REFRESH ISH. 9)
+RESET DRV (SH.4)
Notes:
16 S12KB/2MB Memory Expansion Option March 18, 1986
Notes:
Notes:
----
----
- ----
---
- - ---
- -- ---
-----
--_.-
The Personal Computer
Hardware Library
Reader's Comment Form
Technical Reference
Options and Adapters
Your comments assist us in improving the usefulness of our
publication; they are an important part of the input used for
revisions.
6137804
IBM may use and distribute any of the information you supply in
any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation
whatever. You may, of course, continue to use the information you
supply.
Please do not use this form for technical questions regarding the
IBM Personal Computer family of products or programs for the
IBM Personal Computer family of products, or for requests for
additional publications; this only delays the response. Instead,
direct your inquiries or request to your authorized IBM Personal
Computer dealer.
Comments:
111111
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 321 BOCA RATON, FLORIDA 33432
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER
SALES & SERVICE
P.O. BOX 1328-C
BOCA RATON, FLORIDA 33432
aJalj P I O ~
aldelS IOU op aseald
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES

Technical Reference Options and Adapters Volume 1 Apr84

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Reference Options and Adapters Volume 1 Apr84

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

----

01 3SV 41JJ llZW

+ t: I.. ,*. '45 24

__ 16 Oir/Select u31 I ........

9 { : Q ]046 I +-,______ 1>+,_"+ I-+-+--t-D

You might also like